HomeMy WebLinkAboutUNPLATTED TOV PUBLIC WORKS ADMIN BUILDING EXPANSION- RENOVATION 9-5-95I
I
I
I
J
I
I
I
t
I
I
!
,l
I
I
I
I
I
I
Io
13C9 VAiL VALLTY DRiVt
lrAt!, cOLOR ADC 81657i0J- +79- 2158 rAX 479-2')66
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS/TRANSPORTATION
PUBLIC WORKS ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
EXPANSION/RENOYATION
TOWN OF VAIL. COLORADO
Town of tlail
{}FFltffi f;*pY I I I I r.'!+{r{rir;n1,..,, ..._i.i :,:,.1,.,,1..,f i5
llllnxl, DESrcl\
lslee'VAlu*l
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
. Town of Vall
1309 Vail Valley Drive
Vail, Colorado E1657
Susic Hcnert - Design Coordinator..
Fax - (303)479-2166
.........(3 03Y7 9 -2 444
Andy lftudtscn - Ptanner........... ....(3O3Y79-2138
Grggg Barry - Landscape Architect................... ....'(303)479'2337
Vail Bulldlng Department
Gary Moran
Archltects
RNL Desfgn... ...'.(303)29s'r717
Kris Hedberg, Project Manager
Mrrk Hergcs, hoject Architcct
Mark Slonc
Local Architects
Fax - (303)292-0845
Mortar Architects....................... .....(303)476-5105
143 East Meadow Ehive
Vail. Colorado E1657
Jini Mortrr
Jennifcr Decker
Civil Engineering
Carter burges....
216 Sixteen6 Stre€t Mall
suite 1700
Denver, Colorado 80202
Louis Andreson - P.E.
Steve Long
Fax - (303)820-2402
Struchral Engineerlng
Monroe & Newell Engineers....... ................(303)949-7768 (Avon)
C048 East Beaver Creek Blvd. Suite 301
P.O. Box 1597 Avon, Colorado 81620
Petcr Monroe - P.E.
Mechanical Engineering
Fax - (303)949-4054
RNL Oesign... .....(303)29s-t7r7
Bill Gibbs - P.E.
Electrical Engineering
RNL Design... .....(303)29s-t7r7
Doug Engcl P.E.
Equipment Consultant
Maintenance Design Group.... ........(303)820-5270
216 l6th Street, Suite 1600
Denver, Colorado 80202
Don Leidy
Contractor
Jl Vie1e.............. ....(303)476-3082
1000 South Frontage Rd. Suite 202
Vail, Colorado E1657
Craig A. Bruntz
Fax(303Y76-3423
l -7554.01 Directory - I
t
l
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
VAIL PTJBLIC WORKS FACILITY
PHASE I. ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
TABLE OI'CONTENTS
PROJECT DIRECTORY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONDITIONS
General Conditions (Reference StatemenQ
Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
01020
0r030
01035
01040
01045
01050
01075
01090
0t 100
0l120
01200
01300
01400
01500
01580
01600
01631
01700
01710
01720
01730
DIVISION2.SITEWORK
02010
02070
021l0
02200
025t3
02520
02580
027r0
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300
03560
DIVISION 4. MASONRY
Summary of Work
Allowances
Alternates
Modifi cation Procedures
Coordination
Cutting and Patching
Field Engineering
Specification System
Reference Standards
Special Project Procedures
Alteration Project Procedures
Project Meetings
Submittals
Quality Control
Temporary Facilities and Conrols
Project Identifi cation Sign
Material and Equipment
Product Substitutions
Contract Closeout
Final Cleaning
Project Record Documents
Operation & Maintenance Data
Subsurface Exploration
Selective Demolition
Site Clearing
Earthwork
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Portland Cement Concrete Paving
Pavement Marking
Subdrainage Systems
Concrete Work
Cementitious Floor Patching
r-7554.01
NOT USED
TOC-l
DIVISION 5 . METALS
05500 Metal Fabrications
DTVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rougb Carpentry06200 FinishCarpentry
DIVISION 7 - TI{ERMALAND MOISTURE PROTECTION
I
I
T
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
071l0
07160
07210
07270
07510
0751I
0760007900 Joint Sealers
DryISION 8 . DOORS AND MNDOWS
Sheet Membrane Waterproofi ng
B ituminous Dampproofi ng
Building Insulation
Firestopping
Built-Up Bituminous Roofing
Built-Up Bituminous Roofing/Cutting and Patching
Sheet Metal and Flashing
08100
08210
0830s
0861I
08710
08800
09250
09510
09650
09665
09666
09678
09680
09900
DIVISION 9 - FIMSHES
Metal Doors & Frames
Wood Doors
Access Doors
WoodWindows
Finish Hardware
Glazing
Gypsun Board
Acoustical Ceilings
Resilient Tile Flooring
Resilient Sheet Flooring
Seamless Resilient Flooring
Resilient Wall Base and Accessories
Carpeting
Painting
DIVISION IO . SPECIALTIES
10150
10522
10650
10655
10800
Toilet Compartnents
File Extinguisher/Cabinets
Operable Partitions
Accordion Folding Partitions
Toilet and Bath Accessories
DIVISION II -EQUIPMENT
NOT USED
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
NOT USED
DIVISION 13 - SPECTAL CONSTRUCTION
TOC-2
NOT USED
l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
DIVISION 14. CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOTUSED
DIVISION 15 -MECHAMCAL
15010
15060
15100
1s250
15400
15440
15800
r5850
15990
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Valves and Specialties
Mechanical Insulation
Plumbing
Plumbing Equipment
Air Distibution
Air Distribution Equipment
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of SystemsI
I
I
16100
16485
16515
Electrical Materials and Methods
Motors
Lighting Fixtures
END OF TOC
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 TOC-3
r GENERAL CONDITIONS
I The Fourteenth Editioru dated 1987, of "The General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction", AIA Document 4201, as published by the American Institute of Architects is
;| hereby made a part of these specifications.
I
Each Conhactor shall be obligated to and shall specifically consent to the provisions ofthese
r General Conditions, as modified by the Supplementary Conditions and Division l, to the extent
I of the work to be perforured under the Conkact.
I
I
I
t-7ss4.0r
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
GC-l
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contact for Construction,"
AIA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987. Where a portion of the General Conditions is
modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General
Conditions shall remain in effect.
ARTICLE l; GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.2 ExecutiorL Conelation and Intent
Add the following subparagraph 1.2.3.1to 1.2.3:
1.2.3.1 In the event of conflicts or discrepaneies among the Contract Documents, interpretations
will be based on the following priorities.
l. The Agreement.
2. Addenda, with those oflater date having precedence over those ofearlier date.
3. The Supplementary Conditions.
4. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
5. Drawings and Specifications.
In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either
Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall
be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
ARTICLE3; CONTRACTOR
3.4 Labor and Materials
Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.3 and 3 .4.4 to 3 .4:
3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal
request for the substitution of products in the General Requirements (Division I of the
Specifications).
3.4.4 By making requests for substitution based on Subparagraph 3.4.3 above, the Contractor:
.l Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute
product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;
.2 Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution
that the Contractor would for that specified;
1-7554.01 1987 SC - r
o
Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs
under this Contact except the fuchitect's redesigr costs, and waives all claims for
additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently became apparent;
and
.4 Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitution, making such changes
as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
3.6 Taxes
Add the following Subparagraphs 3.6.1.1 through 3.6.1.3 to 3.6.1:
3.6.1.1As a municipal govemment project the Project is exempt from Sales Tax and the any
"USE TAX'.
3.6.r.2 Ta:r ExemptNo. is
3.6.1.3 The Contractor and subcontactors shall apply to the Colorado Deparfinent of Revenue
for a Certificate of Exemption indicating that their purchase of constuction or building
materials is for a public project. Complete copies of Applications for Exemption
Certificates with the approval of the Colorado Department of Revenue noted thereon shall
be delivered to the Owner prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Secure copies of
approved Application from each subcontractor and fumish one to the Owner. Bidder
shall not include the exempt Sales and Use Taxes in the Bid.
ARTICLE 5; SLJBCONTRACTORS
5.2. Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of Work
Add the following Subparagraph 5.2.1.1to 5.2.1
5.2.1.1Not laterthan 30 days afterthe date of commencement, the Contractor shall furnish in
writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities proposed as
manufacturers for each ofthe specified products proposed for installation on this project,
and, where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor.
ARTICLE 9; PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.3 Applications for Payment
9.3.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.3.1:
The form of application for Payment shall be a notarized AIA Document G702,
Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA Document G703,
Continuation Sheet.
Add the following Clause 9.3.1.3 to 9.3.1:
9.3.1.3 Until the Work is 50 percent complete, the Owner shall pay _ percent of the amount
due the Contractor on account of progress payments. At the time the Work is 50 percent
l
I
T
I
t
I
T
T
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
It987 SC -2 l-7554.01
I
I
l
t
T
t
T
t
complete and thereafter, the Architect will authorize remaining partial payments to be
paid in tull.
9.8 Substantial Completion
9.8,3 Add the following sentence:
The payment shall be sufficient to increase the total pa_yments to 95 percent of the
Coniait Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete
Work and unsettled claims.
ARTICLE l0: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
l0.l Safety Precautions and Programs
Add the following Subparagraphs 10.1.5 and 10.1.6 to Paragraph l0.l
10.1.5 Ifreasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable,bodily-injury or death
to persons r6sdting from a material- or substance encountered on-.the- site by_-the
Coritactog the Contractor shall, upon recogrrizing the condition, immediately stop Work
in the affected area and report the-condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The
Owner, Contractor and Aichitect shall then proceed in the same manner described in
Subparagraph 10.1.2.
10.1.6 The Owner shall be responsible for obtaining the services of a licensed laboratory to
veriff the presence.or absence of the material or substance reported by thg Contractor
and, in thaevent such material or substance is found to be present, to verifu that it has
been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the
Owner shall fumish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and
qualifications of persons or entiiies who are to perform test veriffing the presence or
absence ofsuch riaterial or substance or who are-to perform the task ofremoval or safe
containment of such material or substance. The Contactor and the Architect will
promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not.either has reasonable
objeciions to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. Ifeither the Contractor or
Architect has an objection to a person oi entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall
propose another to whom the Contractor and Architect have no reasonable objection.
ARTICLE I 1;'INSURANCE AND BONDS
I l.l Contractor's Liability Insurance
ll.l.l.l Delete the semicolon at the end ofClause ll.l.1.l and add:
, including private entities performing Work at the site and exempt from the
coverage on account of number of employees or occupation, which entities shall
maintain voluntary compensation coverage at the same limits specified for
mandatory coverage for the duration ofthe Project;
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
l-7554.01 1987 SC - 3
o
semicolon
o
and add:at the end of Clause I I . I .l .3
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
or persorn or entities excluded by statute from the requirements of Clause I l.l.1.l
but requir€d by the Contract Documents to provide the insurance required by that
Clause;
Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a
comprehensive basis including:
l. Premises Operations (including X, C and U coverages as applicable).
2. IndependentContractors'Protective.
3. Products and Completed Operations.
4. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted.
5. Contractual, including specified provision for Contactor's obligation
under Paragraph 3.18.
6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles.
7. Broad Form Prop,erty Damage including Complete Operations.
If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability
Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Data shall predate
the Contract; tlre temrination darc of the policy or applicable extended reporting
period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be
maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2.
Add the following Clause I 1.1.2.I to I I .l.2
ll.l.l.2 Delete the
I l.l.l.8
ll.l.l.9
tt.t.2.l
l. Workers'Compensation:
a. State:
b. Applicable Federal
(e. g., Longshoremen's):
c. Employer'sLiability
Statutory
Statutory
per Accident
Disease, Policy Limit
Disease, Each Employee
The insurance required by Subparagraph I l.l .I shall be written for not less than
the following limits, or greater if required by law:
1987 SC - 4 l-7554.01
4.
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
Comprehensive or Commercial Liability (including-Premises'Operations;
Indeiendent Contactors' Protective; Products and Competed Operations;
Broad Form Property Damage):
a. Bodily Injury:
$Each Occurrence
Aggregate$
b. Property Damage:
$Each Occurrence
Aggregate$
c. Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for
years after final payment.
$Aggregate
d. Property Damage Liability lnsurance shall provide X, C and U
coverage.
e. Broad Form Properfy Damage Coverage shall include Completed
Operations.
3. ContactualLiability:
a. Bodily Injury:
b. Properry Damage:
$
$
$
$
$
$
Each Occurrence
Aggregate
Each'Occurrence
Aggregate
Each Person
Each Occurrence
Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted:
$Aggregate
5. Business Auto Liability (including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles):
a. Bodily Injury:
I
I
I
!
T
t-7554.01 1987 SC - 5
Damage:
Each Occurrence
If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial Liability
policy, the:
a. General Aggregate shall be not less than $
shall apply, in total to this Project only.
b. Fire Damage Limit shall be not less than $
one Fire.
c. Medical Expense Limit shall be not less than $
any one person.
Umbrella Excess Liability:
over pnmary [Nluftmce.
retention for self-insured hazards each occurrence"
I I . l'3 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph I I .l .3 :
If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form,
the Certificates shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. If the
insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD
form 25S will be acceptable.
ll.2 Owney's Liability Insurance
I1.2.1 Delete the last two sentences of Subparagraph I1.2.1 and substitute the following:
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner's
contingent liability for claims which may arise from operations under the Contact.
ll.3 Propertylnsurance
o
Property
$
l
I
I
t
l
I
I
and it
on any
on
7.
$
$
ll.3.l.l
I 1.3.1.3
Add the following sentence to Clause I I .3. I . I :
The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value.
Add the following sentence to Clause 11.3.1.3:
I
I
T
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
The property insurance is written with a deductible of $
occrurerlce with a deductible aggregate of $
Delete Clause I I.3, L4 and substitute the following:
I I .3. I .4 The Contractor shall provide insurance coverage for portions of the Work stored
off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the
approval, and also for portions of the Work in transit.
1987 SC - 6 r-7554.01
I
I
l
t
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
Add the following sentences:
The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. If the Owner is
damaged by'the failure of the Co-ntractor to maintain such insurance, then the
Contactor 3hall bear all reasonable costs properly athibutable thereto.
11.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond
Delete Subparagraph I I .4.1 and substitute the following:
11.4.1 The Contractor shall fumish bonds coverine faithful performance of the Contract and
payment of obligations arising thenurdei Bondi may be obtained thr_ough _.!re
Cdntractor's usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The
amount ofeach bond shall be equal to percent ofthe Contract Sum.
I l.4.l.l The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three
days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the Work is to be
commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, t}te Contractor shall,
prior to the commencement of the Work submit evidence satisfactory to the
Owner that such bonds will be furnished.
11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attomey-in-fact who executes the required bonds
on behalfofthe surety to affix thereto a certified and cunent copy ofthe power of
attorney.
Add the following Paragraph 13.8 to Article l3:
13.8 Equal Opportunity
13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows:
l3.l.l The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any
employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex or
national origin. The Contactor shall take affrrmative action to insure that
applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment
without regard to their race, religion, color, sex or national origin. Such action
shall include, but not be limited to, the following : employment, upgrading,
demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or
termination; rates of pay or otlrer forms of compensation; and selection for
training, including apprenticeship. The Confractor agrees to post in conspicuous
places, available employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth
the policies of nondiscrimination.
13.8.1.2 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall. in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all
qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to
race, religion, color, sex or national origin.
ARTICLE 14; TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
Add the following Paragraph 14.4 to Article 14:
1-7554.01 1987 SC - 7
14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience
14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contact for the Owney's convenience and
without cause.
14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's
convenience, the Contractor shall:
.l Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection
and prcservation of the Work; and
.3 Except for work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of
termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing Subcontracts and
purchase orders and enter into no further Subcontracts and purchase
orders.
14.4.3 ln case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled
to receive payment from the Owner on the same basis provided in Subparagrcph14.l.2.
ARTICLE 15; OTHERCONDITIONS AND SERVICES
l5.l Contactor Review
l5.l.l Prior to the execution of a contact between the Owner and Contractor, Owner shall cause
the Contractor to make a thorough and detailed review of the Contract Documents,
including but not limited to the construction dra'wrings, specifications and any addenda or
amendments thereto. Following such review, the Contractor shall represent and warrant
in writing that the Project may be constnrcted in accordance with such Construction
Documents. If the Contactor finds any alleged erors or deficiencies in the Contract
Documents during its review, the Contractor shall specifically list in writing all of the
alleged errors or deficiencies. The Owner shall promptly provide the Architect with the
Contractor's Listing ("Listing") before any constuction work is commenced by the
Contractor.
. Upon being presented with the Contractor's Listing, the Architect shall at no
additional cost or expens€ to the Owner, promptly revise Contract Documents or,
in its discretiorq iszue addenda, in order to remedy any alleged erro6 or
deficiencies which are found by the Architect to be meritorious. The sole and
only right of the Owner against the Architect regarding the Contractor's Listing
shall be the prompt correction of the alleged errors or omissions by the Architect.
At the time of execution of a general construction contract between the Owner and
Contractor, the Owner shall cause the Contractor to represent and Warrant that the
Project is "buildable" within the established budget and time schedule set forth
within the general contract, using normal construction techniques.
15.4 The Owner shall also cause the Contractor to represent and warrant that:
.1 The construction schedule and budget include reasonable contingencies
and reserves for design and plan revision, modifications, coordination,
clarification or interpretation which may reasonably be anticipated on a
Project ofthis type.
l
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I1987 SC - 8 t-7554.01
I '2 3,:f#i:llr:H#'#f'*11il"',fri,r",**"';ff3"'tPr':,li',"11
I ffiF*::i*"".1f'ffi:'#t JnTl'.f,H1*,:'",T:,$fr"1i:n"of,o,?ll#
I END oF SUPPLEMENTARY coNDITIoNS
T
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
l-7554.01 1987 SC - 9
I
. sEcrIoN 01010
STJMMARYOFWORI(
I' PART I.GENERAL
I I.O1 SI.JMMARYtA. Section Includes:
t l. Title of Work, and type of Contract.
2. Work by Others.
| 3. Work Sequence.
I 4. Use of Premises.
-5. OwnerOccupancy.
-I 6. Pre-Ordered Products.
B. Owner-Furnishedltems.
I I.O2 DESCRIMON
I A. The Project consists of a building addition and rcnovation of existing building for the
I Vail Public Works, Town of Vail, Colorado.
I 1. Project Location: Vail Public Works
r
vail, colorado 81657
| 2. owner: Town of vail
1309 Vail Valley Drive
Vail, Colorado 81657r3. Contractor: J. L. Viele Construction, Inc.
I 1000 South Frontage Roadt Vail, Colorado 81657
I B. Design Requirements:
I l. The intent of this Section is to generally summari.ze the nature and extent of work
I to be performed without in any way limiting the specific requirements of the
t Contract Documents.
2. The Contractor shall provide all labor, plant, supplies, equipment, services,
I facilities and appurtenances which are indicated or reasonably implied by thet Drawings, or as specified, or that are required for the work described in the
Contract Documents.
F t-75s4.01 ololo-l
!
CONTRACT
o
METHOD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
1.03
A.
l.M
A.
Constnrct the work under a single lump-sum, fixed price contract.
WORKBYOTHERS
Work of the Project which will be executed subsequent to completion of work of this
Contact, and which is specifically excluded from this Contract except as noted below:
L Furniture and firmishings.
2. Exterior and interior signage.
I.O5 OWNER.FURNISHEDPRODUCTS
A. The Owner will fumish the kitchen appliances for installation by the Contactor. The
Work includes providing support systems to rcceive Owner's equipment, and
mechanical and electrical connections.
l. The Owner will arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data,
and samples to the Contractor.
2. The Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-fumished items according
to the Contracto/s Constnrction Schedule.
3: Following delivery, the Owner will inspect items delivered for damage.
4. If Owner-fumished items are damaged, defective, or missing, the Owner will
arrange for replacement.
1.06 woRK SEQUENCE
A. Project Development Schedule including the various phases of construction is available
for reviewing in the offices of the Owner, Architect and Contactor.
B. Schematic outline of project phasing is summarized as follows:
C. Projected phases ofoccupancy are outlined as follows:
l. Phase l: Construction of building addition.
2. Phase 2: Renovation of existing facility.
D. Constuction Work in stages to provide for continuous public access. Do not close off
public usage of facilities until use of one stage of Work will provide altemate access
route.
I.O7 CONTRACTORUSE OF PREMISES
A. Contractor shall limit use of premises for Work, for storage, and for access, to allow:
l. Work by other contractors.
01010-2 l-7554.01
loo
I 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public.
t B. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entances serving the premises clear
t and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all
times.
I Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.I- 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
- C. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight
I
condition throughout the construction period.
' l. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
| 2.
il1,;;|#"T::H;"fcessary
to protect the building and its occupants during
I 1.08 oWNEROCCUPANCY'!
A. Full Ovmer Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during a
I portion of the construction period and then occupy the building addition during
' renovation ofthe existing building.
I l. Cooperate with the Owner dr.uing construction operations to minimize conflicts! and facilitate owner usage.
I 2. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations.a
B. Schedule and substantially complete designated portions of Work for Owner's
I occupancy prior to Substantial Coripletion of-entire Work.
C. Projected phases ofoccupancy are outlined as follows:
I l. lllifol, Construction of building addition while Owner occupies existing
I 2'
Hffiil"?,Hfl#ll,"ff?f,Ulisting
facilitv and occupv new addition' contractor
I D. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for each designated portion of work prior
I to Owner occupancy. Contractor shall allow:
I l. Access for Owner personnel.
t 2. Use of parking facilities.
I 3. Operation of HVAC and electrical syst€ms.t
I r-7ss4.ol
I
01010-3
O
E. On occupancy, Owner will provide, for occupied areas:
l. Operation of HVAC and electical systems.
2. Maintenance.
3. Seuuity.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
NotUsed
PART3.E)(ECUTION
NotUsed
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
01010-4 l-7554.01
I
. SECTION01020
ALLOWAI{CES
T PARTI-GENERAL
- I.OI SUMMARY
' A. Section Includes:
I l. lnclude in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the contract documents.t
2. Designate in the construction progress schedule the delivery dates for Products
I specified under each allowance.
I 3. Designate in the Schedule of Values the quantities of materials required under
I eachunitcostallowance.
! I.O2 ALLOWANCES FORPRODUCTS
I A. The amount of each allowance includes:
l l. The cost ofthe Product to the Contractor, less any applicable trade discounts,
t 2. Delivery to the site.
I 3. Handling at the site; including unloading, uncrating, and storage.
t 4. Protection from the elements and from damage.
I 5. Labor for installation and finishing.
I 6. Contractods and Subcontractoy's overhead and profiL
I B. In addition to the amount of each allowance, include in the Contract Sum the= Contractods costs for:
I l. Other expenses required to complete the installation.I C. The amount of each allowance for work specified in the respective specificationI sections.
I.O3 SELECTION OF PRODUCTS UNDERALLOWANCES
I A. Contractor's Duties:!
l. Assist Owner in determining qualified suppliers or installers.
t 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect.
a 3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of the Architect.
I
!
r-7ss4.01 01020-1
I
oo
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR PURCHASE, DELIVERY1.04
I
I
t
I
INSTALLATION
A. On notification of selection, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier.
B. Arrange for the process Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, as required.
C. Make all arrangements for delivery.
D. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects.
E. Submit claims for tansportation damage.
F. Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of referenced specification
sections.
I.O5 ADruSTMENT OF COSTS
A. Should the net cost be more or less than the specified amount of the allowance, the
Contract Sum will be adjused accordingly by Change Order.
l. The amount of the Change Order will recognize any changes in handling costs at
the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses caused by
the selection under the allowance.
2. For products specified under a unit cost allowance, the unit cost shall apply to the
quantities actually used with a nominal allowance for waste, as determined by
receipted invoices, or by field measurcment.
B. Submit any claims for anticipated additional costs at the site, or other expenses caused
by the selection under the allowance, prior to execution of work.
C. Failure to submit claims within the designated time will constitute a waiver of claims
for additional costs.
D. At contract close-out reflect all approved changes in contract amounts in the final
statemelrt of accounting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.OI SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Section 09665 - Resilient Sheet Flooring: Allow the sum of $per square
foot.
B. Section 09680 - Carpeting: Allow the sum of $17.00 per square yard.
END OF SECTION
l
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
0t020-2 l-7554.01
B.
B.
C.
D.
F.
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcrroN 01030
ALTERNATES
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
r.02 PROCEDURES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Section Includes:
l. Identification and description of Alternate work.
Related Sections:
L Bid Documents: Quotation of cost of each Altemate'
2. Owner-Contractor Agreemenf Altemates accepted by Owner for
incorporation into the Work.
3. Sections of Specifications identified in each Altemate.
Bids on all alternates specified hereunder shall be submitted as indicated on the
Bid Form. The Ownerreserves the right to accept or reject any or all altemates.
The additive or deductive amormt of each altemate shall represent the true value
of the part of the work covered by that altemate, including all general,
mechani-cal and.electrical work unless specifically noted otherwise.
Bid amount shall include any residual work to be done in lieu of the alternate as
defined for a complete installation. Such residual work may involve other
general, stnrctural, mechanical or electrical work.
State the arnount to be added or deducted from the Base Bid for the difference in
cost between the work described under each Alternate and the corresponding
work specified under the Base Bid.
Alternate bids shall reflect the increase or decrease in cost of all work of every
nature which may be affected thereby, and no subsequent claims for extras by
reason of the Conhactor's failure to observe this requirement will be considered.
Except as otherwise described or approved, material and workmalship required
by.the Alternate shall conform to the requirements specified under the various
Sections of the specifications for similar items of work.
The methods of construction, materials, finishes or details of installation
required by the Altemates differ from the requirements shown on drawings or
specified for corresponding items, the altemative materials and workmanship
shall have the approval ofthe Architect.
l-7554.01
Not Used
01030-l
PART 3 . DGCUTION
3.01 SCIIEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. AddAltemateNo. l: Folding Partitions.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
|. Base Bid: Provide accordion folding partitions as specified in Section 10655.
2. Alternate Bid: Provide Operable Partitions as specified in Section 10650.
Add Altemate No. 2: Exteriss $iding.
L Base Bid: Existing exterior wood siding.
2. Alternate Bid: Remove existing wood siding, provide new infiltration barrier
and wood siding as specified in Section 06200.
AddAltemateNo. 3: Mechanical I{VAC Swamp Cooler.
l. Base Bid: No swamp cooler.
2. Altemate Bid: Provide swamp cooler as specified in Division 15 and associated
ductwork, water piping and electrical connections
END OF SECTION
01030-2 t-7554.01
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 0103s
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART I - GENERAL
I.O1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Procedures for:
a- Change Orders.b. Instructions.c. Field Orders.d. Directives.
B. Related Sections:
l. General Conditions ofthe Contract.
2. Section 01300 - Submittals.
I.O2 PROCEDUREDESCRIPTIONS
A. Modifications shall be processed by written process only in conformance to the General
Conditions.
B. Change Orders:
l. ConstructionChangeAuthorization.
2. Contractor'sProposalRequests.
3. Instnrctions, Field Orders, Directives.
I.O3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the
Work, not involving adjusnnent to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, on AIA
Form G7 I 0, Architect's Supplemental Instructions.
1.04 CHANGEORDERPROPOSALREQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustnent to the Contract Sum or
Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised
Drawings and Specifi cations.
l. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not
consider them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the
proposed change.
l-7554.01 01035-1
B.
2. Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost
necessary to execute the change to the Architect for the Owner's review.
3. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total
amount of pnrchases to be made. Where requested, fumish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
4. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
5. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will
have on the Contact Time.
Contractor-lnitiated Proposals: Wben latent or unforseen conditions require
modifications to the Contract the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a
request for a change to the Architect.
l. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the
change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change.
Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract
Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total
arnount of purchases to be made. Where requested, fumish survey data to
subst4ntiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable tru(es; delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts
4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system
specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal
Requests.
CONSTRUCTION CHANCE DIRECTIVE
Constnrction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contactor disagree on the
terms of a Proposal Request the Architect may issue a Constmction Change Directive
on AIA Form G714. The Construction Change Directive instnrcts the Contractor to
proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
l. The Constnrction Change Directive contains a complete description of the
change in the Work. It also designates the method to be followed to determine
change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
I
I
I
t
l
t
T
I
I
T
I
T
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
c.
1.05
A.
l-7554.01 01035-2
I B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work
I required by the Constmction Change Directive.
l. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
I 1.06 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
I A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change
I Order for signtures of the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form G701.
I
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION
01035-3
Not Used
PART3 -E)GCUTION
Not Used
I
r-7ss4.01
I
r SECTION 01040
COORDINATION
I PARTI -GENERAL
I l.0l SLJMMARY
t A. Section Includes:
I l. Coordination of Work of Contact.I B. Related Sections:
I 1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
t Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.Ir 3. SectionOl7OO - ContactClose-out.
I t.oz DEscRrPTroNIA. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of Specifications
I to assure efficient anil orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with
I provisions for accommodating items to be installed later.
I B. Coordinate sequence of Work to accommodate Owner occupancy as specified.
I l.o3 MEETTNGS
I A. Hold Coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences with personnel and
I subcontractors to assure coordination of Work.
. I.O4 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
tt! A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01300.
I B. Coordinate work of vafious sections having interdependent responsibilities for
I installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
I C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating
I elements, and effect on work of other sections.
I r,05 COoRDTNATION OF SPACE
t A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for
Substantial Completion of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract
I Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
I B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for
I correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to
I minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
C. Assemble and coordinate close-out submittals specified in Section 01700.
I
|
1-7ss4.01 01040-l
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
oo
PART2. PRODUCTS
NotUsed
PART3.DGCUTION
NotUsed
ENDOFSECTION
l-7554;0101040-2
I
I sEcrloNoto4s
CUTTING AND PATCHING
I PARTI.GENERAL
I
l.0l SLJMMARY
! A. Section Includes: Cutting, fitting, and patching of the work required to:
I l. Make the several parts fit properly.
2. Uncover work to provide for installation, inspection, or both, of ill-timed work.
I 3. $:Tg:rfd replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract
t 4.
:flH""TffiH#lons
of non-structural components for installation of piping and
I B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or separate Contractors.
I 2. Section O2O7O -Selective Demolition.
I.O2 DEFINITIONS
I A. Cutting and Patching:
I l. Defined as referenced herein to include cutting and patching of previously
I existing or recently completed work.
I 2. Also defined to exclude cutting and patching during the fabrication and
I installation of manufactured units.
B. SelectiveDemolition:
I l. Defined as a related, but separate category of work, which may also require
cutting and patching.
I l.o3
''BMITTALS
I A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
I l. Structural integrity ofany element ofProject.
I
2. Integrrty of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
I 4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or sepaxate contractor.
I
1-7s54.0t 01045-lr
B. Submittals shall comply with Section 01300.
1.04 QUALTTYASSTJRANCE
A. Perform all cutting and patching in strict accordance with pertinent requirements of the
Specifications anil, in tlie evenf no such requirements are determined, in conformance
. with the written direction of the Architect.
l. Use skilled workmen to perform all cutting and patching work.
2. Use methods least likely to damage existing surfaces and materials to remain,
while providing proper surfaces to receive installation ofrepair, patching, and/or
new work.
3. In addition to requirements specified, upon the Architect's request, uncover work
to provide inspection of covered work and remove samples of installed materials
for testing.
4. Do not cut or alter work performed under s€,parate contract without the written
pemrission of the Architect.
B. Visual Quality:
1. Do not cut and patch work exposed to public view, on the exterior and interior of
the building in a maoner that will result in an unacceptable appearance as
determined by the Architect.
2. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that will result in obvious appearance that
cutting and patching work was done.
3. When cutting existing structural concrete, do not extend saw cuts beyond the
comenl of the required opening on either side of the opening.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Provide materials which:
l. Are equal or better than work being cut or patched.
2. Possess performance characteristics and visual effect similar to original material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Before proceeding, inspect conditions, including elements subject to movement or
damage during cutting, excavating, backfilling, and patching.
B. After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new work.
C. Ifuncovered conditions are not as anticipated or ifconstruction is not as indicated on
the Drawings, immediately notiff the Architect for further instructions.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
01045-2
I
I
I
Il-7554.01
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Take all necessary action required to protect adjacent existing surfaces from damage
due to the work of this section.
B. Take all precautions necessary to proteot surfaces and materials, new work, and the
work of diis section from damage due to adverse weather conditions.
C. Provide temporary support of work to be cut and adjacent work to prevent failure or
damage due to the work of this Section.
D. Properly prepare substrate surfaces exposed during cutting as required to_receive the
wort df -tis or other sections of these specifications in strict compliance with
manufacturef s recommendations and these specifications.
3.03 CUTTINGANDPATCHING
A. Perform all required cutting and patching as required or reasonably implied under
pertinent sections of these specifications.
B. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to. other
portions of the-work and will provide proper finished installation complying with the '
specified tolerances and finishes.
C. Comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 2 where cutting-and-
patcliing required excavating and b-ackfilling. Execute excavating and backfilling by
methods which will prevent settlement or damage or other work.
D. Employ original Installer or Fabricator to perform cutting-anil-patching except where
work is pre-existing.
E. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide
completed Work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents.
F. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through
surfaces.
G. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with
specified tolerances of the work,
H. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary extend finish-
restoration onto retained work adjoining, in a manner which will eliminate evidence of
patching.
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01 01045-3
I
I
I
sEcrroN 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART I . GENERAL
t l.ol sUMMARY
I A. General; This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field't engineering services including, but not limited to, the following:
I l. Land survey work.t
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
I Section:
l. Division I Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field
r Division I Section "Submittals" for submitting Project record surveys.It 3. Division I Section "Project Closeout" for submitting final property survey with
IlTi:*}il::.-1T#;:"andrecordingofowner-accepteddeviationsfrom
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
r A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the land surveyor or professional engineer
I certifuing the location and elevation of improvements.
t B. Final Property Survey: Submit l0 copies of the final propefty survey.
I C. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey! data as required under provisions of "Submittals" and "Project Closeout" Sections.
I l.o3 euALTTYASSURANcE
A. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in the state where the
I Project is located, to perform tlqoit"a hnd-surveying services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)I
I
t
l-7554.01 01050 - l
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. VeriS layout information shonm on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey
and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work.
B. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other
utilities and constuction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning
sitework, investigate and verifr the existence and location ofunderground utilities and
other constnrction.
l. Prior to constnrction, verifr the location and invert elevation at points of
connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping.
3.02 PERFORMANCE
A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks
and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as
needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required
dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to
determine dimensions.
l. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels
provided for their use.
2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb.
B. Surveyods Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other suvey work. Make this
log available for reference.
l. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when
deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On
Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.
2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field+ngineering services, preparc a certified survey showing
dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of constuction and sitework.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,
stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placemenl utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building
foundations, column gdds and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels
required for mechanical and electrical work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I01050 - 2 l-7554.01
F.
Existing Utilities: Furnish infomration necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing
structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by
construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final properly survey showing significant features
(real properly) for the Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by the
suweyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of the Project are accurately
positioned as shown on the survey.
L Recording; At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded
by or with local goveming authorities as the offrcial "property survey."
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 01050 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
SECTION 01075
SPECIFICATION SYSTEM
PART I . GENERAL
I.OI WORKINCLUDED
A. Specification system fonnat.
B. Languagedescription.
I,O2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
I.O3 DESCRIPTION
A. These specifications have been derived from automated specification systems, and
include minor deviations from format and traditional writing forms. Such deviations
must be recognized as a normal result of this production technique, and no other
meaning will be implied or permitted.
B. Imperative language of the technical sections is directed to the Contractor. The term
"prbvide" used repeatedly in the text is defined to mean..."furnish and install, complete,
in place and ready for operation and use unless specifically indicated otherwise."
C. Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined- type and include
incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall"
"in conformity thetewith," "shall be," "as noted on the Drawings", "A", "The", are
intentional. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are
when "Note" ocCurs on Drawings. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference when
"as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used
END OF SECTION
r-7554.01 01075-l
a.
b.
I
II
T
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcrroN 01090
REFERENCE STAIIDARDS
PART I.GENERAL
I.OI SI.JMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Applicability of Reference Standards.
2. Acronyms used in Contract Documents for Reference Standards. Source of
Reference Standards.
I.O2 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies requirements for the compliance with golerning regulations. and
imposed codes and standards, including tlre obtaining of permits, licenses, inspections,
releases and similar documentation, and including the furnishing of notices,
certifications associated with regulations, codes and standards. "Regulations". is
defined to include those rules, conventions and agreements within the construction
indusry which effectively control the performance of the work, regardless of whether
lawfully imposed and enforced or obeyed.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For- products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards,
comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are
specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with sandards in effect at the date of these contract
documents, except where a standard of a specific date or edition is indicated.
C. Codes and Governing Regulations;
l. General: Compliance with federal, state, county, city or local codes and
governing regulations, as applicable to the work, is either required by law or
imposed hereby.
2. Uniform Building Code; by ICBO, (latest edition) as adopted by Municipal
Ordinance.
3. National Fire Codes; by NFPA (latest edition).
4. Regulations by utility companies supplying utilities to the project, both
temporarily and permanently.
5. William-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970; Public Law 9l-
596.
Part l9l0 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XVII of
Title29, Code of Federal Regulations.
Part l5l8 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Chapter XIII
of Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations.
l-7554.01 01090-l
6.
7.
State Energy Conservation Code.
State Planning and Design Criteria to Prcvent Architectural Banien for the Aged
and Physically Handicapped.
Uniform Mechanical Code (Latest edition); by ICBO, as adopted by Municipal
Ordinance.
I
I
I
I
t
t
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
9. National Electic Code (Latest edition) as adopted by Municipal Ordinance.
10. Uniform Plumbing Code (Latest edition) as adopted by Municipal Ordinance.
I.O4 REFERENCES
A. Standards
l.The industry standards applicable to the work are indicated in appropriate
individual sections of these specifications, either by their names and the names of
the trade associations, government agencies or other producers of standards, or
by well-rccogrized abbreviations thereof. Refer questions on the meaning of
abbreviated designations to the Architect for clarification before proceeding with
work affected thereby.
Explanation of Application: It is a requirement that each entity or person
perfomring t}re work be expert in that portion of work" and be completely
familiar with the industry standards applicable to that portion of the work.
Therefore, copies of applicable standards have not been bound with these
contract documents; but are, nevertheless in full force and effect. Obtain copies
from the publication source, where needed for proper performance of the work.
AISC: American Institute of Steel Constnrction. Inc.
l22l Avenue of the Americas
New York, N.Y. 10020
AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute
150 Ea* 42nd Street
New York, N.Y. 10017
AITC: American Institute of Timber Constnrction
333 West Hampden Avenue
Englewood, CO 801l0
ANSI: American National Standards Institute
(Successor to USASI and ASA)
1430 Broadway
New York, N.Y. 10018
(212)3s4-3300
APA: American Plywood Association - The Engineered
Wood Association
I l9 A Steet
Tacoma, WA 98401
ASAHC: American Society of Architechral Hardware Consultants
See Door and Hardware Institute
01090-2 t-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
ASHRAE:
AWI:
AWPB:
AWPI:
AWS:
BIA:
CSRSI:
DHI:
FGMA:
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating &
Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
345 East 47th Steet
NewYork,N.Y. 10017
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
345 East 47th Street
NewYork,N.Y, 10017
American Society for Testing and Materials
l9l6 Pace Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
Architectural Woodwork Institute
5055 South Chesterfield Road
Arlington, VA 22206
American Wood Preservers Bureau
27 7 2 South Randolph Street
Arlington, VA 22206
American Wood Preservers Institute
2? 7 2 South Randolph Street
Arlington, VA 22206
American Welding Society, Inc.
2501 NW 7th Stneet
Mianri, FL.33125
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
60 East 42nd Street
New York, N.Y. 10017
Brick Institute of America (Formerly SCPI)
1750 Old Meadow Road
Mclean, VA 22101
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
228 North LaSalle Street
Chicago,IL 60601
Door & Hardware Institute
l8l5 N. Ft. Meyer Drive
Arlington, VA22209
Flat Glass Marketing Association
1325 Topeka Avenue
Topeka, KS 66612
Factory Mutual Engineering Corp.
I l5l Boston-Providence Tumpike
Norwood. PA 02062
t-7554.01
FM:
01090-3
o
Services AdministrationFS:
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
NAAMM:
NBHA:
NBS:
NCMA:
NEC:
NEMA:
NFPA:
PCA:
SDI:
PS:
Federal Specification (General
Building 197
WashingtonNavy Yard SE
Washington, DC 20407
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
221 North LaSalle Sbeet
Chicago, Illinois 60601
National Builders Hardware Association
See Door & Hardware Institute.
National Bureau of Standards
(U.S. Dept. of Commerce)
Gaithersbnrg, MD 20234
National Concrete Masonry Association
6845 Elm Street
Mclean, VA 22101
National Electrical Code by NFPA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
155 East 44th Steet
NewYorhN.Y. 10017
National Fire Protection Association
470 Atlantic Avenue
Boston, MA 02210
National Woodwork Manufactruers Assoc., Inc.
400 West Madison Street
Chicago,Il 60606
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
(U.S. Dept. of Labor)
Govemment Printing Offrce
Washingtoru DC 20102
Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie,lL 60076
Product Standard of NBS
(U.S. Dept. of Commerce)
Government Printing Oflice
Washington, DC 20402
Steel Deck Institute
135 Addison Avenue
Elmhurst,lL 60125
Steel Door Institute
2130 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH zgl 15
01090-4
SDI:
1-7554.01
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SJI: Steel Joist Institute
2001 Jeffenon Davis Highway
Arlington, VA 22202
SMACNA: Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning
Contractor's National Association, Inc.
8224 Old Courthouse Road; Tysons Comer
Vienn4 VA 22180
TCA: Tile Council of America, Inc.
P.O. Box 326
Princeton, N.J. 08540
UL: Underwrite/s Laboratories, Inc.
207 East Ohio Street
Chicago, OH 60611
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association
(Grading Rules)
1500 Yeon Building
Portland, OR 97204
3. Trade Associations, Standards and Abbreviations:
References in the Contract Documents to publications and recommendations, by
either name or abbreviation thereof, include but are not limited to the following
trade associations, technical societies, gov€rnment agencies, recognized
authorities and standards :
AAMA: AmericanArchitecturalManufacturersAssociation
2700 River Road, Suite I l8
Des Plaines, IL 60018
(312)699-73t0
AAN: American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.
230 Southern Building
Washington, D.C. 20005
AASHTO: American Assoc. of State Highway & Transportation Officials
ACI:
(Also AASHO)
341 National Press Building
Washington, D.C. 20004
American Concrete Institute
Box 19150 Redford Station
Detroit, MI 48219
AGC: The Associated General Contractors of America
1957 East Street, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006
AI: The Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Park, MD 20740
r-7554.01 01090-5
lI
IAIA: The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue
Washington, D.C. 20006
NSPE: The National Society of Professional Engineers
2029K SteetNW. Washington, D.C. 20006
B. Trade Regulations:
l. General: The manner in which standards and tade association recommendations
have been specified, and the manner in which the contract documents have been
zuMivided ind organized, are not necessarily for the purpose of accommodating
trade regulation and jurisdictional agreements among trade unions and councils,
nor is this intended to interfere with the Contactor's proper handling of
assigments, conflicts and rulings. Comply with trade regulations in the manner
which will avoid delays and claims, and which will ensure that the work is
performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Reconcile conflicts promptly as they arise.
2. Losses, delays, claims and additional costs which result from inadequate or
improper handling (by the Contractor) of conflicts with trade regulations will not
be considered as basis for change orders.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
NotUsed
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
END OF SECTION
01090-6 l-7554.01
T
I
r
sEcrIoN 01100
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
P.ART I . GENERAL
I l.0l SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
f l. An essential condition ofthis Contact shall be the scheduling and conduct ofall
phases of construction operations in such a manner that the Owner's operati-onq
I within the building shall be unintemrpted at all times, except for such limited
I intemrption as is required.
a 2. Conhactor shall repair at his own expense all damage done to Owner's property,
I ffiH,";*jit""l and adjoining public property as a result of Contractor's
I B. Related Sections:v l. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
I r.o2 PRoJEcr/sITE coNDrrroNs
1 A. Access and use of site:rllrt' l. Contactor shall use the designated site access for construction offices and
r\ *xi1i$nt"Yffi"**JtrLr3" that access to existing building remains
D 2. Confine operations to as limited a use of the existing building as possible. A
il route of access to and from the work for employees shall be agreed upon and itI iPiiH,i: ??3y.-rJ"ffifi1tr"'l'.;yffff"*&*;ffiT"$,i:xh",#""Tff,fi9
building.
? B. OwnerNotice and Approval:
I l. All arrangements and scheduling in connection with the work of this Contract
t shall be made with and subject to the approval of the Architect and the Owner.
j 2. All work under this Contact which will require intemrption of service of the
3 existing building shall be scheduled to suit the need and convenience of the
Owney's operation, and arrangements shall be made with the Owner. and the
J[ Architect at least two (2) days in advance of the start of such work.
tll PART2-PRODUCTS
I Not Used
I
rta
I 1-7554.01 0l100-l
PART 3 . DGCUTION
3.OI RENOVATION
A. Constuction activities of all areas to be constnrcted in existing facilities shall be
completely separated from rest of the building by dust-proof enclosures erected by
Contractor.
B. All surfaces in existing facilities not indicated to be remodeled, or removal of existing
items by any Contractor, shall be repaired by the responsible Contractor to match
existing adjoining similar surfaces.
3.02 CLEA}IING
A. All areas within existing facilities, which are not within enclosed areas to be
constucted used for access to work areas shall be completely cleaned of all debris
and made "broom-cleanu at the end of each day's work.
B. Dust which permeates areas of existing facilities because of improperly constructed
dust-proof baniers shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Completely clean all
such areas to the satisfaction ofthe Owner at no additional cost.
3.03 CONSTRUCTIONSEQLJENCE
A. In order to accommodate the unintemrpted operation of the existing building during
the various phases ofconstruction, the sequence ofconstruction operations shall be as
follows:
l. Basically, the sequence concept is to: (1) prepare the existing facility to
function during the building addition through substantial completion; (2)
thence occupy the newly built portion; and (3) upon completion, finally
reoccupy the renovated portion.
2. Some overlapping benveen the several constmction operations will occur, and
where possible, permission maybe granted to start certain portions of the work
before the previous operations were completed in their entirety. Such detail
scheduling shall be done as the work progl€sses, provided that the Owney's
operations remain unintemtpted.
3. Where it may not be possible to complete certain mechanical and electrical
services in connection with making the work complete and ready for
occupancy, temporary services as directed and as approved shall be installed
to permit occupancy by the Owner at the earliest possible date.
4. The constnrction sequence and related Drawings are intended to aid the
Contractor in bidding and in scheduling his work. Deviations of sequence
may be made upon approval of the Owner and the Architect.
END OF SECTION
il
I
t
I
,L
I
I
I
t
U
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
It-7554.01 01r00-e
I
-l' sEcrIoN otl2oI
I ALTERATIONPROJECTPROCEDURES
\' PARTI.GENERAL
I I.OI SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
L
! l. Renovationcoordination.
r 2. Cutting and patching.
I
t 3. Protection.
I B. Related Sections:
I l. Section 01010 - Surnmary of Work.
I 2. Section 01040 - Coordination.a
^ 3. Section 01100 - Special Project Procedrues.
l\
| 4. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
i 5. Section O2O7O - Selective Demolition.
t' r.o2 PRoJEcr/sITEcoNDITIoNS
I A. Refer to Section 01100.t
PART 2 - PRODUCTS/:r
'l!E NotUsed
- PART3-EXECUTION
? 3.ol ALTERATIoNS
! A. Coordinate work of trades:
I
l. Schedule elements of alterations and renovation work.
^if 2. Cut, move, and remove items as necessary to provide access or to allowt alteiations and new work to proceed.
i[i 3. Patch, repair, and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified conditions for|| each material.
t 4. Coordinate power outages and major intemrptions of progress of consfiuction
t work with the Owner.
l
t r-7s54.0r 01120-l
T
I
I
B.Alterations, Cutting and Protection:
l. Assign to trades qualified to perform the work.
2. Cut and remove minimum necessary, and in a manner to avoid damage to
adjacent work.
3. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, flooring or metals by methods to
terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division.
4. Protect existing finishes, equipment and adjacent work.
Coordinate with Owneds use of the facility:
l. Coordinateconstnrctionphasing.
2. Schedule intemrptions of building utilities for hours when building is closed to
normal operations, i.e., weekends, evenings, etc.
3. Sequence of Constnrction and Remodeling: See Drawings and Section 01010
Summary of Work.
Products for patching, extending and matching:
l. Provide same products or types of constnrction as that in existing stnrcture, as
needed to patch, exten4 or match existing work.
2. Presence ofa product finish, or type ofconstruction, requires that patching and
extending shall match.
Patching existing facilities:
l. Facilities damaged or removed due to required construction work, shall be
patched, repaired, or replaced.
Transition from existing to new work:
l. Make a smooth and workmanlike transition.
2. Patch work shall match existing adjacent work.
Dust Contol:
L Control dust created as a result ofconstnrction operations.
Fire Protection:
l. Maintain good housekeeping practices.
2. Suitable storage space.
i. Provide fire extinguisher at each location where cutting or welding is being
performed.
c.
t
il
I
I
t
I
U
I
f
I
a
I
T
a
I
I
D.
F.
G.
01120-2 l-7554.01
I
I
0
I
!
I
T
I
I
t,
I
!
t
I
t
t
t
I
I
3.02 CLEA}{ING
A. All areas within existing facilities, which are not within enclosed areas to be
constucted used for access to work areas shall be completely cleaned ofall debris and
made "broom-clean" at the end of each day's work.
B. Dust which permeates areas of existing facilities because of improperly conslructed
dust-proof baniers shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Completely clean all
such areas to the satisfaction ofthe Owner at no additional cost.
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01 0l120-3
T
I
'\!
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
t
I
t
I
I
4.
J.
6.
sEcrIoN 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GEMRAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Pre-constructionmeeting.
2. Progress and Coordination meetings.
3. Specially called meetings.
I.O2 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. General Procedure:
l. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
Preside at meeting.
Record the minutes; include ,ignifr"*, proceedings and decisions
Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within two days after each meeting
and send to:
Participants in the meeting.
Parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
Consultant (2 copies).
7. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors, and supplies attending meetings
shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalfofthe entity each represents.
B. Pre-constructionMeeting:
l. Schedule within ten days after date of Notice to Proceed.
2. Location designated by the Owner and convenient for all parties.
3. Attendance:
a. Owner'sRepresentative.b. Architect'sRepresentative.c. Consultants, as applicable.d. Contractor'sProjectSuperintendent.c. Major Subcontractor(s).f. Others as appropriate.
a.
b.
c.
t-7554.01 01200-1
4. SuggestedAgenda:
a- Distibution and Discussion of:l) List of major subcontactors and suppliers.2) Projectedconstructionschedules.3) Critical work sequencing.4) Major equipment deliveries and priorities.5) ProjectCoordination.6) Desigration of responsible personnel.b. Procedures and processing of:l) Field decisions.2) Proposal requests.3) Submiuals.4) Change Orden.5) Applications for payment.c. Adequacy of Distribution of Contract Documents.d. Procedures for Maintaining Record Documents.e. Use of Premises:l) Office, work, staging, and storage areas.2) Ovmer'srequirements.f. Temporary construction Facilities, Utilities, Controls, and Construction
Aids.
C. Safety, First-aid, Security, and Housekeeping Procedures.h. Administrative hocedures and Documents as Required by Owner.
C. Progress and coordination meetings:
l: Progress meetings shall be held weekly for the duration of the project. Meetings
shall be scheduled for a minimum of two hours and extended as required. The
Owney's Representatives will attend all meetings.
2. Attendance:
Owner's Representative.
Architect's Representative.
Consultants, as applicable.
Contractor's Project Superintendent.
Subcontactor as appropriate to the agenda.
Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
Others as appropriate.
I
I
.t
3. SuggestedAgenda:
a. Review of work progress since previous meeting.b. Field observations, problems, and conflicts.c. Problems which impede Construction Schedule.d. Review ofoff-site fabrication and delivery schedules.e. Corrective measur€s and procedures to regain projected schedule.f. Revisions to Construction Schedule.g. Coordination of schedules.h. hogress and schedule during succeeding work period.i. Review submittal schedules and expedite as required.j. Maintenance of quality standards.k. Pending changes and substitutions.
I
I
I
r
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
c.
I
I
t
I
'lI
I
t
I
I
I
I
01200-2 l-7554.01
t '
1""'"H#*Ti"$i*ffi#1."i*'itrj*:comp'Ietiondate
I PARr2-PRoDUcrs
Not Used
I PARr3-DGcurIoN
I
Notused
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
t
I
$
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l-7ss4.01 ol2oo-3
I
t sEcrIoN or3oo
SUBMITTALS
l-
T PARTI-GENERAL
I I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
t l. Submittal Requirements.
2. Shop Drawings.f,^11 3. Product Data
11 4. Samples.Itt 5. Manufacturers Instructions.
t B. Related Sections:
Y l. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
| 2. Section 01370 - Schedule ofValues.
I 3. Section 01400 - Quality Control.
t 4. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
I 5. Section0l63l -ProductSubstitutions.
v- 6. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.It 7. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
I
C. Work Not Included:
t' l. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents, nor required by
l, H:il",L".1.."difications
to the Contract Documents, will not be reviewed by the
I- 2. It is understood that the Contractor may require his subcontractors to provide
d drawings, setting diagrans, and other information exclusively for the purposes ofI 3XT$trfliliiirHh","**o*Ti**,:"#ffiff;f,:'[H bretween the
I I,O2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
-'A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence
I as to cause no delay in the work.It
t
I
r-7ss4.01 01300-1
o
submittals
t
I
f,
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
t
B. Numberof required:
1. Shop Drawings: Submit one reproducible tansparency and two opaque
reproductions.
2. Product Data: Submit two copies; one will be retained by the Architect.
3. Samples: Submit number stated in each specification section.
C. Submittals shall include, but not necessarily limited to the following:
I . Date of submittal and dates of any previous submittals.
2. Project title and number.
3, Contactidentification.
4. Names of:
a. Contractor.b. Subconhactors.c. Suppliers.d. Manufacturers.
5. Identification ofproduct, with the Specification Section, Article, and Paragraph
Numbers.
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
7. Relation to adjacent or critical featurts of the work or materials.
8. Identification of deviations from Contract Drocuments.
9. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.
10. Contracto/s review and approval.
11. An 8 inches x 3 inches blank space in lower right-hand comer for Contractor and
Architpct stamps.
D. Timing of Submittals:
1. As specified in Section 01310, the Progress Schedule, prepared for the work shall
include an itemized listing of the required submittals with submission dates.
2. Schedule shall allow not less than 5 working days for Architect's review, and an
additional 5 days each for the Owner's or Architect's consultant's review, not
including time necessary for delivery or mailing, and shall cause no delay in the
work or the work of any other Contractor.
3. Extension of Contract Time will not be granted because of the Contractor's
failure to make timely and correctly prepared and presented submiuals with
allowance for the checking and review periods.
01300-2 l-7554.01
E,
F.
G.
I.
J.
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
il
0
i
l
t
I
I
Submittal Log:
l. Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the work, showing current
status of all submittals at all times.
2. Make the submittal log available to the Architect for review, upon request.
Schedule of Submittals :
1. Prior to the first Davment request submit to the Architect a schedule of
submittals identiffiirg each submittal by material or product, specification
section, and anticipated date of submittal.
2. Submittal dates shall be identical to those entered in the Construction Schedule.
3. This schedule shall be kept cunent and reissued on a periodic basis.
Grouping of Submittals: Unless otherwise specified, make submittal in. groups
containing all associated items to ensure that information is available for checking each
item when it is received.
Deviations:
L At time of submission, give notice in writing in the submittal of any deviation
from the requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Indicate or describe deviations including other changes required to conelate the
work.
3. Stat€ in writing variations in costs caused by the deviations and assumption of
the cost of the deviation and related changes if deviation is accepted.
4. Tabulate deviations by Specifrcation number and title.
Contactor's Review and Approval: Each submittal shall bear Contractor's review and
approval stamp certiffing that the Contractor:
l. Has reviewed, checked, and approved the submittal and has coordinated the
contents with requirements of the work and the Contract Documents including
related work.
2. Has determined and verified quantities, field measurements and construction
criteria, materials, equipment, catalog numbers, and similar data, or will do so.
3. States that the work covered by the submittal is recommended by Contractor.
4. That the Contractor's warranty will fully apply.
5. The Contractor's stamp shall be dated and signed by the Contractor in every case.
Corrections:
1. Make all required corrections and resubmit required number of conected
submittals until accepted.
t-7554.01 01300-3
o.
1.03
A.
t
I
I
I
I
il
I
t
I
T
I
I
t
f,
I
I
I
I
I
L.
N.
B.
2. Direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called
for on the previous submittals, and state in writing all variations in costs and
assumption of cost of related changes the same as is required for deviations in
paragraph "Deviations. "
Check of Retumed Submittals:
l. Check the submittals returned for correction and ascertain if the Conections
result in extra cost above that included under the Contact Documents, and give
written notice within 5 working days if, in Contractot's opinion, such extra cost
results from corrections.
2. By failing to so notiff or by starting any work covered by a submittal Contractor
waives all claims for exha costs resulting from rcquired Corrections.
Review and Acceptance:
l. Submittals will be reviewed with reasonable promptness, but only for
conformance with the desigrr intent of the project and with the information given
in the Contact Documents.
2. The acceptance of a separate item as such will not indicate acceptance of the
assembly in which the item functions.
3. Acceptance of submittals shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any
deviation from requirements of the Contract Documents or for any revision in
resubmittals unless the Contractor has given notice in writing of the deviation or
revision at the time of submission or resubmission and written acceptance has
been given to the specific deviation or revision, nor shall any acceptance relieve
the Contactor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submittals or for
accuracy of dimensions and quantities, the adequacy of connections, and the
proper and acceptable fitting, execution, functioning and completion of the work.
Incomplete Submittals: Incomplete submittals, including those not correctly
transmitted, not correctly titled and identified, or not bearing Contractor's review and
approval stamp, will be returned to the Contractor without review.
Interrelated Submittals: Except where preparation of a submittal is dependent upon the
approval of a prior submittal all submittals pertaining to the same class or portion of
the work shall be submitted simultaneously.
Expense: Costs for the preparation, correction, delivery, and retum of the submittals
shall be bome by Contractor.
DISTRIBUTION
Distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data which carry the
Architect stamp of review to:
l. Project site file.
2. AffectedContractors.
Distribute samples which carry the Architect's stamp of review as directed.
01300-4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
T
I
t
I
C. Provide additional distibution to governing authorities and others as necessary for the
proper performance of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Scale and Measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to:
1. A scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method
of connection to the work.
2. Include technical and performance data as necessary to illustate the Drawings.
3. Copies of Drawings marked to show Shop Drawing information are not
acceptable.
B. Correction and Acceptance of Shop Drawings:
l. The Architect will indicate the corrections, notations, or acceptance and return
them to Contractor.
2. Resubmit in same manner if Shop Drawings are not accepted.
C. Composite Shop Drawings and Field Layouts:
l. Prepare and submit composite Shop lhawings and Field Layouts as required to
solve tight field conditiohs and when required to coordinate the work of several
B.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
T
2.02
A.
2. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details and given complete
information particularly as to kinds and types of materials and equipment, size
and location of sleeves, inserts, attachments, chases, openings, conduits, ducts,
boxes, and structural interferences.
3. Coordinate these composite Shop Drawings and Field Layouts in the field for
proper relationship to work ofapplicable trades based on field conditions.
4. Contractor shall have competent personnel readily available for coordinating,
checking, and supervision ofField Layouts.
5. The procedures for submittals and resubmittal, and final Distribution shall be as
specified for Shop Drawings.
MANUFACTUREFUS DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Where contents of submitted literature from manu cturers includes data not pertinent
to the submitial clearly show which portions of the contents are being submitted for
revlew.
Submit product data to verifu conformance with the Specification complete with
material lisl catalogs, brochtres, technical performance data and manufacturers
installation ir.structions when required by a Section of this Specification.
For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product
r-7554.0r 01300-5
L Name and address of manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturet's data
a. Referencestandards.b. Performance test data-
D. Where work is required to be installed in accordance with the product manufacturer's
directions, submit and distibute the necessary copies of such instuctions.
2.03 CERTIFICATES
A. Deliver all certificates to the Architect.
B. Each certificate required under the Contract Documents shall be signed by the
individual officer, or the agent lawfully authorized to execute the certificate by title,
descriptioq or other acceptable evidence.
C. All certificates shall be swom and notarized as to the correctness and vdidity of the
contents, and duplicate copies shall be notarized to be true copies.
2.04 SAMPLES
A. Provide samples, when required by technical sections of this Specification or requested.. by the Architect, identical to the precise article proposed to be provided.
B. Number of Sarnples Required:
l. Unless otherwise specifie4 submit samples in the quantity which is required to
be retnmed, plus one which will be retained by the Architect.
2. By.prearrangement in specified cTgs:.a single sample may be submitted for
review and, when accepted, be installed in the work at a location agreed upon by
the Owner and the Architect.
C. Office Samples: Sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and
attachment devices.
2. Full range ofcolor, texture and pattern.
3. Identi$ each sample, giving full information.
D, Field Samples and Mock-ups:
I . Provide material for erection at job site, FOB job site.
2. Size or area: That specified in the respective specification section.
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
Ii
t
I
I
I
I
t01300-6 r-7554.01
o
, 2.05 COLORS AND PATTERNS
I A. Unless the precise color and pattern is specificalty stipulated iq th" Contact
Docurnents, and whenever a choice of col6r or pattem is available in specified
I products, stibmit accurate color and paffern charts to the Architect for selection.rt
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
I Not used.
END OF SECTIONI
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
r-75s4.0r 01300-7
I
I
t
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
l
SECTION O14OO
QUALITYCONTROL
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
L Testing required ofContractors.
2. Contactor's quality control systems.
3. Manufacturet's Field Service.
4. Independent Testing Agency Services.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01300 - Submittals.
2. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
3. Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving
4. Sectiod 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.02 TESTING.GENERAL
A. The term "testing" as used herein is defined as testing and/or inspection.
B. The Contractor shall provide such equipment and facilities as the Testing Agency may
require for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. The
Contractor shall not use any materials or equipment represented by samples until tests,
if required, have been made and the materials or equipment found to be acceptable.
Any product which becomes unfit for use after accepknce shall not be incorporated
into the work.
C. All materials or equipment proposed to be used may be tested at any time during their
preparation or use. The Contactor shall furnish the required samples without charge
and shall coordinate testing with the Architecg Engineer and Testing Agency to allow
sufficient time for testing before placing orders or starting work. Products may be
tested either prior to shipment or after being received at the job site.
D. Tests shall be made by an accredited testing agency with a minimum of 5 years
experience in the specific type of testing to be performed. Except as otherwise
provided, sampling and testing of all materials and the laboratory methods and testing
equipment shall be in accordance with the latest standards and tentative methods of the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
E. Where additional or specific information concerning testing methods, samples sizes,
etc., is required, such information is included under this section of the Specifications.
t-7554.01 01400-l
o
REQUIRED
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
1.03
A.
TESTING OF CONTRACTORS
The following testing shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor installing the
material being tested:
l. Material or Method Substitution: Any tests of basic material, fabrication
equipment or method offered as a zubstitute for specified items or methods on
which a test may be required in order to prove its compliance with the
specifications.
2. Product Performance Verification: The supplier of pnrducts specified based on
performance criteria shall, at the request of the Architect, inspect the installed
product and certiff conformance of the product to specified criteria under the
installed conditions.
Corrective measurres resulting from any test that fails shall be paid for by the installing
Contractor/Subcontractor and shall be subject to the following conditions:
l. Quantity and nature of additional testing, if required, will be determined by the
responsible consultant.
2. All additional tests shall be taken in the presence of the rcsponsible consultant or
his representative.
3. Proof of noncompliance will make the installing Conhactor/Subcontractor liable
for any corrective action which the responsible consultant feels is prudent,
including complete removal and replacement of defective materials.
4. Nothing contained herein is intended to imply that the installing
Confactor/Subcontactor does not have the right to have tests performed on any
material at any time for his own information and job control so long as the
Owner does not assume responsibility for costs or for giving them consideration
when appraising quality of materials.
I.O4 TESTREPORTS
A. Reports of all tests shall be distributed by the testing agency as follows:
l. Copy - Contractor's Project Manager.
2. Copy - Contracto/s Field Superintendent.
3. Copy - Applicable supplier or Subcontractor.
4. Copy - Owner.
5. Copy - Applicable Engineer.
6, Copy - Architect.
7. Other copies - as directed.
1.05 CONTRACTORS QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. General: The General Contractor shall establish a quality control system and shall
B.
I
I
I
I
t01400-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of. his
Subcontactors, to ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials,
workmanship,' construction, finistr, functional performance and identification.
Contractor's-quality control iystem is the means by-which he assures himself that his
construction iomplies with [\e requirements of the Contract Documents. Contols
shall be adequate to cover all construction operations.
B. Pre-ConstructionConference:
l. Contactor shall schedule and conduct a pre-construction conference to review
the detailed Ouality control and construction requirements for each of the
materials and/br syitems listed below, not less than l0 working days prior to
commencement of the applicable portion ofthe work.
a. Foundations.b. Cast-in-placeconcrete.c. Soil compaction.
2. The Contractor shall require responsible representatives ofeach party concerned
with tlnt portion of the work to attend the conference, including but not limited
to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Contractor superintendents.
Materials supplier(s) or fabricator.
lnstallation Subcontractor(s).
Agency responsible for Contractor-furnished testing.
C.
B.
t
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
t
1.06
A.
3. The fuchitect, responsible Engineer and Owne/s Testing Agency will be present
and shall be notifibd by the Contractor at least 5 days prior to the scheduled date
of each such conference.
4. Minutes of each conference shall be recorded by the Contractor and shall be
distibuted by him in typed form to each party in attendance within 5 days of the
meeting. One copy of these minutes shall also be transmitted to the Owner's
representative and to tlre Architect for information.
Records: Contractor shall maintain correct records on an appropriate form for all
inspections and tests performed, instructions received from the Architect,.responqible
Engineer or Testing Agency, and actions taken as a result of those instructions. These
records shall include lhe required inspections or tests, nature of defect, and corrective
action taken. Contractor shall document inspections and tests as required by each
section of the Specifi cations.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
When specified in respective Specification sections, Contractor shall require supplier or
manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, testing, and to make appropriate
re commendations.
Manufacturer's representative shall submit written report to the Architect and
responsible Engineer listing observations and recommendations.
I -7554.01 01400-3
INDEPENDENT
o
TESTIN G AGENCY SERVICES
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
!
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
T
for
for
1.07
A.General: The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent Testing
Agency to perform the following inspections, tests and other services. Services shall
be perfomred in accordance with requirements of goveming authorities and with
specified standards.
L Contractor shall cooperate with Testing Agency personnel and shall fumish tools,
sanrple of materials, design mixes, equipment and assistance as requested.
2. Contractor shall provide and maintain, for the sole use of the Testing Agency,
adequate facilities for the safe storage and proper curing of concrete testing
cylinders on the project site for the first 24 hours after casting as required by
ASTM C 31, Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
field.
3. .Contractor shall notiff Testing Agency 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring testing or inspection services.
4. ConFactor shall make arangements with the Testing Agency and pay
additional sarrples and tests made for the Contractot's convenience or
retesting of failed samples.
5. Retention of an independent Testing Agency by the Owner shall in no way
relieve the Conhactor of responsibility for performing all work in accordance
with contract requirements.
6. The Testing Agency inspector shall familiarize himself with dl applicable
portions of the Contact Documents pertaining to his area of investigation prior to
performing his services.
B. Soil Material and Soil Compaction:
L The Testing Agency will prepare one optimum moisture-maximum density curve
for each type of soil encountercd in subgrades under.paved areas or areas to
receive compacted fill. Maximum densities are to be determined in accordance
withASTM D 698.
2. Each type of bonowmaterial will receive:
a. Mechanicalanalysis.b. Moisturedensitycurvedetermination.c. Plasticityindexdetermination.
3. Compacted fill under stnrctural slabs and subgrades under compacted fill or
paved areas shall be tested as indicated below. General site testing frequency
shall be determined by the Owner's Soil Engineer,
a. The top 12 inches of subgrade resulting from excavation shall have the
maximum density at optimum moisture. Make at least one field test per
500 square feet ofare4 but in no case less than three tests.b. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every
overlaying 500 square feet of area' but in no case less than three tests.
Perform field densiw tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D
2167.
01400-4 l-7554.01
a-
b.
c.
d.
c.
d.
I
I
I
l
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
4. The relative density of a cohesionless, free-draining soil, expressed as a
percentage, is defineb as its state of compactness with respect to the most loose
and most compact states at which it can be placed by latoratory procedures. The
relative density will be based on the follo'wing fomrul4 wherein the maximum
densrty is the lighest dry unit weight of the soll, minimum density is-lowest dry
unit weight of tf,e soil, lnd in-place density is the dry unit weight of the soil in
place:
a. Relative Density (percent) =
Ma,r. Den. x (in-place den. - min. den.) x 100
In-place den. x (ma:<. den. - min. den.)
C. Concrete Work:
l.
2.Test Specimens:
Concrete inspection and testing will be made in accordance with building code
requirements, and Contract Documents, and will include the following:
Testing concrete for strength, slump, air content, temperature, and weight-
Making and testing concrete cylinders, including fumishing cylinder
containers for specimens.
Inspection at the batching plant.
Transporting and storing of all specimens involved in testing 1nd
inspeCtion. Test cylinders are to be transported to laboratory not later than
24 hours after casting.
Inspection of mixing and placing of concrete at the site, including
recording of: amourr-t and location of concrete placement, truck -numberand amount of water added to each load of concrete tested, time of transit,
time mixed on job, time placement was completed, and any other pertinent
information.
Slump Test: Test each trrckload of concrete delivered to ttre Site. If slump
is greater than the upper limits specified in tJre Schedule of Concrete Mixes
in Section 03300, the concrete in that tnrckload will be rejected.
Air Contenl Test each truckload of concrete delivered to the Site. If air
content is less than the lower limits or greater than the upper limits
specified in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes in Section 03300, the concrete
in that truckload will be rejected.
The Testing Laboratory will take specimens of each class of concrete from
different locations on the job as following: At least one set of four
cylinders for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof of all concrete, but not
less than one set for any one day's operations.
For concrete placed by pumping, test specimens and concrete used for
determination of slump, air content, and weight are to be taken at the point
of placement of concrete into the forms.
Samples will be obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172.
Making, curing and subsequent handling of test cylinders, except as
modified herein, shall be in accordance with ASTM C 31. Testing shall be
in accordance with ASTM C 39.
01400-51-7554.01
J.
e. The cylinders shall be plqced in laboqalor1 ,sPrage under moisl curing
Jonaitions at approximitely 70oF within 24 hours after molding, and
maintained therein until tested. Tests will be as follows:
l) One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days for information.
2i Two lylinders shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance' The' acceptahce test results shall be the average strength of these two
cylinders.3) dne cylinder shall be tested at 56 days for information.
Test Reports: Reports of cylinder tests shdl be submitted as specified in-Article
1.04 above within five diys of laboratory testing. Test reports shall, as a
minimum, include:
a. Project data including prgjecl game. -and address, concrete supplier's
deliverv ticket numbei and
-mix identification number, Testing Agency's
test or iylinder identification number, and location- of pour.
b. Results bf freld testing at time of sampling including date and time of
sampling, amount of water added at site prior to sampling, ambient air
and concrete temperaftire, concrete slump and air content, and
concrEte wet unit weight.
c. Results of laboratory testing including date test specimens were transported
to laboratory, date-and age of concrete at time of testing, compressive
strength of -each cylinder-tested, average compressive strength of tested
cyHnders, and speciflred design strength ofconcrete represented by the test.
Additional Testing: Contactor shall bear the cost of testing and inspection
resulting asi a cotrsequence of the following:
a. Work not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
b. Testing requested by the ConEactor or Subcontractor such as additional
cylinders for early breaks, etc.
c. Testing to veriff-the adequacy of worlc done without prior notice, without
proper supervision, or contary to standard construction practice.
Reinforcing Steel Inspection: Consrete reinforcing shall be inspected prior to
closing ofEoncrete foim work or placing ofconcrete. Inspect all reinforcing for
confofuiance with contract reqirirements. Submit written reports of all
inspections such in accordance with Article 1.04 on a weekly basis. Such reports
shdll included a description of eash area inspected, deficiencies noted, and
corrective action undertaken to resolve such deficiencies. Deficiencies observed
shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Contractor's Field
Superintendent and Reinforcing Placers Foreman. In the event deficiencies are
noi conected, or if an interpretation of the contact documents is required, the
Structual Engineer shall be immediately notified.
Monitoring of Batch Plant Quality Contol: The Testing Agency will maintain a
continuouJ record for each class of concrete showing the results of each 28-day
acceptance test, the moving coefficient of variation of the last 30 acceptance
tests, and the moving average sbength of the last three (3) recorded. Records
will be maintained at the job site and will be submined to the Architect and
Structural Engineer on a biweekly basis and within three working days of the
close of the ieporting period. Coefficient of variation shall be computed in
accordance with ACI 301 equation (3-1).
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
).
6.
I
t01400-6 l-7554.01
to
I PARr2-PRoDUcrs
Not Used
o
I PARr3 -ExEcurIoN
I
Notused
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
t r-7ss4.01
END OF SECTION
01400-7
I
I sEcrIoN orsoo
f TEMPORARY FACTLITIES AI\D CONTROLS
' PART I -GENERAL
I l.o1 sT.JMMARYI
A. Section Includes:
I l. Electicity, Lighting.
- 2. Heat, Ventilation.
r 3. Telephoi're Service.
| 4. water.
5. SanitaryFacilities.
t 6. Barriers.
- 7. Enclosures.
It 8. Protection of installed work.
a 9. Security.a 10. Water control.
-I Il. Clganingduring construction.
- 12. Field offices and sheds.I
I B. Related Sections:
I l. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
-2. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
t r.o2 sYSTEM DEscRrPTroN
A. Provide temporary facilities and services at the time first needed at the site and
I maintairu expand, and modifi the facilities as needed throughout the construction
t period and do not remove until no longer needed.
I B. Palrment for Utilities:
' l. Utilities provided by City (electricity, water, sewer) will be at ne cost to
I Contractor.
rr 2. !:,|i|fr#l provided by City (portable heater tuel, telephone) will be paid by
t-7554.0r
I
t 01500-t
1.03 QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
A. All temporary facilities and contols relating to protection of life, health,_ qnd publlc
welfare shdl conform to applicable provisions of all local, state and federal laws, with
latest asrendments.
B. Use qualified tradesmen for the installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities
where they will serve the total project constuction work adequately and result in
minimum interference with performance of the work.
C. Relocate, modifr, and extend facilities as required during the course of the work to
properly accommodate the entire work of the project
I.M POWERANDLIGTITING
A. Provide all temporary power distibution, devices and lighting.
B. Provide necessary personnel, on overtime if necessary, to tum lights on and off at
beginning and end of day's work.
C. All temporary electrical work shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical
Code.
D. Provide 208 V. outlets and I l0 V. 60 cycle outlets in each building. Locate outlets on
movable panelboards for relocation from time to time. Protect each outlet by
individual GFI breakers.
E. Preliminary lighting of any enclosed area must be'accomplished prior to installation of
tempomry lighting. Prellninary light must be a minimum of 5 footcandles per square
foot ofenclosed space.
F. After enclosure of the building, provide temporary lighting for finish work in each
room as the work progresses.
G. Permanent lighting system shall be used for temporary lighting as quickly as possible.
H. Maintain lighting and make routine repairs.
I.O5 HEAT, VENTILATION
A. Provide as required to maintain specified conditions for constmction operations, to
protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity.
B. The permanent heating system in whole, or in part, shall not be used for temporary heat
without the written permission of the Owner. If permission is granted, replace all
filters before Owner accepts building. Any operation of any part of the new pennanent
heating system shall not constitute acceptance of the system.
C. Provide ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials, to disperse humidity, and to
prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
D. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls.
E. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, operation and removal, and for fuel consumed
by portable heaters.
l
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t01500-2 r-7554.01
I
I 1.06 TELEPHONE SERVTCE
t A. Provide telephone service to field office.
| 1. Standardtetephone.I 2. Cordless telephone.II 3. Facsimile telecopy machine with dedicated line.
' Provide bell on exterior offield offices.r 'r'
I B. Pay costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges for local calls.
I C. Toll charges shall be paid by the party who places the call.I I.O7 WATER
t A. Extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is available by use of hoses.
- B. Provide adequate supply of potable drinking water.
Ir I.O8 SANITARY FACILITIES
I A. Comply with goveming regulations, including safety and health codes for the type,
I number, Iocation, operation, and maintenance of fixhues and facilities.
r B. Install sanitary facilities in available locations which will serve the needs of personnel
I attleprojectsite.
C. Toilet rooms in existing buildings or in new construction will not be available for use
I by construction personn-el.a I.O9 BARRIERS
I A. Barricades, Warning and Lights:
rt l. Provide taffrc barriers where required to control vehicular and pedestrian traffrc
I aroundthe site.
2. Comply with recognized standards and code requirements for tJrc erection of
adequate barricades wherever needed to prevent accidents and losses.
t 3. Paint and provide illumination and flashing lights as appropriate to conditions.
I B. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas and to protect existing!" facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
I C. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel at theI site ofthe general public where exposure exists ofthe hazard being protected.
f D. Provide lighting where appropriate and needed for the recognition of the facility,
I including flashing red lights where appropriate.
- E. Provide barriers around trees and plants designatedto remain.
I
- t-7554.01 01500-3
I
I.10 ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather-tight closures of openings in exterior surfaces:
l. To provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials.
2. To allow for temporary heating.
3. To prevent entry ofunauthorized persons.
4. Provide doors with self+losing hardware and locks.
I.II TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire hoses and other equipment as necessaxy
for proper fue protection during constuction. Such equipment is to be used for fire
protection only.
B. Comply with the applicable recommendations of NFPA No. l0 "Portable Fire
Extinguishen" for each area of each constnrction activity wherever combustible
materials, flammable liquids, and similar exposrues to possible fires are present.
C. Locate extinguishers where most convenient and effective for the intended purposes.
Store combustible materials in recognized fire-safe locations and containers.
I.I2 SCAFFOLDS AND RIINWAYS
A. Provide scaffolds, runways, guard rails, platforms, and similar temporary construction,
as may be necessary for the perfomrance of the Contract.
B. Facilities shall be oftype and arrangements as required for their specific use; shall be
subsantially constructed, and well secured, shall comply with applicable rules,
regulations and State and local codes.
I.I3 LADDERS, RAMPS AND STAIRS
A. Provide ladders, ramps, and temporary stairs for access to all levels of the construction
for general access by all trades.
B, Individual contractors and subcontractors shall furnish their own stepladders, scaffolds,
staging, work platforms, and other facilities for use of their workmen and as necessary
to the expeditious completion of their work.
C. Provide required railings, closures, temporary partitions, safety protections, and waste
chutes as required by applicable safety laws and regulations and as necessary for safety
ofall personnel.
D. Permanent stairways may be used for such purposes if adequately protected against
damage.
E. Open wells and shafts shall be enclosed as required by the Department of Public
Safety.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I01500-4 r-7554.0r
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control taffrc in immediate area
to minimize damage.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffrts of-openings.
Protect finished floors anditairs from taffic, movement of heavy objects, and storage.
C. Prohibit taffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces, on lawn and
landscape areas.
I.I5 SECURITY
A. Provide security program and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft.
I.16 WATERCONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping
equipment.
I.I7 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site.
B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
1.I8 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical out-lets, heating, cooling, and
ventilating equipmeni, and equipped with fumiture. Provide, in addition, space for
project meetings, with tables and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
B. Storage Sheds for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Weathertight, with heat and
ventilation for Products requiring controlled conditions, with adequate space for
organized storage and access, and lighting for inspection of stored materials.
1.19 OPERATIONS AND TERMINANONS
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in the use of temporary facilities at the project
site. Limit availability of facilities to essential and intended uses, so as to minimize
waste and possibility of abuses and the resulting unsanitary and hazardous or
dangerous conditions.
B. Maintenance: Operate and maintain temporary facilities in good operating conditions
through the time of use and until removal is authorized. Protect from damage by
freezing temperatures and similar elements at the site.
C. Termination and Removal: At the time the need has ended for each temporary facility,
or when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or at the time of
Substantial Completion, promptly remove the facility unless requested by the
Consultant to be retained for a longer period of time, Completion or restore permanent
work which may have been delayed or otherwise affected by the temporary facility.
Replace work which cannot be satisfactorily restored. Except as otherwise indicated,
I r-7554.01 01500-5
the materials
Contractor.
o
and equipment of temporary facilities remain the property of the
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI CONSTRUCTIONFENCE
A. Provide 8'-0' high chainJink fence. around entire perimeter of the building addition
project.
l. Fabric: 2'x9 gagediarnond mesh.
2. Posts: Set at l0'-0" maximum spacing, set in concrete.
B. Gates:
l. 2-leaf swinging vehicle gate, l2'-0" wide.
2. Single leaf pedestrian gate, 3'-0" wide.
C. Provide emergency exiting through the construction baricade of new and existing
building druing duration of the project.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I01500-6 l-7554.01
t
I SECTION01580
r PROJECT TDENTIFTCATTON SIGN
II PART I -GENERAL
I r.o1 ST.JMMARY
I
A. Section Includes:
I l. Projectldentification Sign.
2. Maintenance.
a 3. Removal.
I B. Related Sections:
t l. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
I
| 2.
*:Xi:u?lt00
- Constnrction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Field offices
I t.oz euALTTYASSURANCEI
A. Design sigrr and structure to withstand 100 miles /hr wind velocity.
t B. Sign Painter: Engaged as professional sign painter for not less than three years.
I C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for
I duration ofconstruction.
I.O3 SUBMITTALSl'I A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
I B. Show content, layout, lettering, colors foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of
I members.
I PART2-PRODUCT
I 2.or sIGN MATERIALS
I A. Structure and Framing: New or used, wood, structurally adequate.
!B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4
I inch thick, standard large sizes to minimize adequate joints.
f C. Rough Hardware: Galvanize4 aluminum, or brass.
t D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quallty, two coats. Colors designated by Architect.
E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors designated by Architect.
1-7554.01
I
I 01580-r
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Owner-Contractor
Agreement.
B. Erect at desig;nated location.
C. Erect supports and framing on secu€ foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist
wind loadings.
D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.
E. Paint sight-exposed surfaces ofsign" supports, and frarning.
3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A. One painted sign of constuction, design, and content shown on drawings, locations
designated.
B. Content:
l. Project title, logo and name of Owner as shown on Contact Documents.
2. Names and titles of Authorities.
3. Names and titles of Architect and consultants.
4. Name of Prime Contactor and major subcontactors.
C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Designated by Architect.
3.03 MAINTENA}.ICE
A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damages.
3.04 REMOVAL
A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of project and restore
the area.
END OF SECTION
l
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t01580-2 l-7554.01
t
I
,I MATERIALANDEQTIIPMENT
I PARTI -GENERAL
. I.OI SUMMARY
- A. Section Includes:
l. Products.
2. Transportation and Handling.
3. Storage and Protection.
4. Manufacturer'slnstructions.
5. ProductOptions.
6. Products List.
7. Substitutions.
8. Systems Demonstration.
I B. Related Sections:
I l. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
I 2. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
3. Section 01400 - Quality Control.
I 4. Section0l63l-ProductSubstitutions.
5. Section 01730 - Operations and Maintenance.
I I.o2 PRoDUCTS
I
A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writ-
I ing by the Architect.
J C. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
I l. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shopI practices.
I D. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be inter-
I changeable.
SECTION 01600
t
I
I
I
t
I 1-7ss4.or
I
01600-l
1. Two or more items of the same kind shall be i
o
dentical,by the same manufac-
turer.
2. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
3. Equipment capa.cities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered
to unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
E. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that ftir which it is de-
signed or is specified.
I.O3 TRANSPORTATIONA}.IDHANDLING
A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with constnrction schedules, coordinate to
avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.
B. Transport products by methods to avoid product darnage; deliver in undamaged condi-
tion in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry.
C. hovide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or
damage.
D. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quanti-
ties are corect, and products are undamaged.
I.O4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store products in accordance with manufacnuer's instruction, witlr seals and labels in-
tact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within
temperatu€ and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instnrction.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide venti-
lation to avoid condensation.
C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a welldrained area; prevent mixing
with foreign matter.
D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodicalty inspect to assure products
are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.
I.O5 MANUFACTURER'STNSTRUCTIONS
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufac-
turer's printed instnrctions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties
involved in the installation, including one copy to Architect and one copy to the Con-
tractor.
l. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and
until completion.
B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such
instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
t
01600-2 l -7554.01
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's in-
stnrctions, consult with Architect for further instructions.
2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory
step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract
Documents.
I.06 PRODUCTOPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference
meeting those standards.
Standards or by Description Only: Any product
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substi-
tutions: Request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named may be
submitted only at the time specified.
C. Products Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers: Products of named manufactur-
ers meeting specifications: No options, no substitutions allowed.
D. Products Specified by naming Only One Manufacturer: No options, no substitutions
allowed.
I.O7 PRODUCT LIST
A. Within l5 days after sigrring of Subcontractor Agreement, submit complete list of major
products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number
ofeach product.
I.O8 SYSTEMSDEMONSTRATION
A. Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Architect and Owner.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjusfrnenl and maintenance of equipment and
systems, using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 01600-3
B.
B.
l.0l
1.02
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
sEcrroN 01631
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
PART I -GENERAL
1.03
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
L Administative and procedural requirements for handling requests for
substitutions made afrer award of the Contract.
Related Sections:
l. Section 01090 - Reference Standards: Applicability of industry standards to
products specified.
2. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment Procedural requirements goveming
the Contractor's selection ofproducts and product options.
DEFINITIONS
Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modiff the meaning of
other terms used in the Contract Documents.
Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
constuction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award
of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not
considered substitutions :
l. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior
to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and
are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.
2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
3. Specified options of products and construction metlods included in Contract
Documents.
4. The Contractoy's determination of and compliance with goveming regulations
and orders issued by goveming authorities.
SUBMITTALS
Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in
the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals.
Identifu the product, or the fabricatioh or installation method to be replaced in each
request. Include related Specification Section and Drawings numbers. Provide
complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions,
and the following information, as appropriate:
1-7554.01 01631-1
o
description of
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
l. Product Data, including Drawings and
installation procedures.
2. Samples, where applicable or requested.
products, fabrication and
3. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with
those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as
size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect.
4. Coordinate information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and
sepante Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed
substitution.
5. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction
Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution.
Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.
6. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Conhact
Sum.
7. Certification by theContractor that the substitution proposed is equal to or better
in every significant respect to that rcquired by the Contract Documents, and that
it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's
waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become
necessary because ofthe failure ofthe substitution to perform adequately.
Architect's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the- Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for
evaluation of the request. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of
receipt of the additional information or documentation, which ever is later, the
Architect will notifr the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed
substitution. Ifa decision on use ofa proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained
within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in
the form of a Change Order, when time or.change in Contract amounts are involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: The Contractot's substitution request will be received and considered by
the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as
determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be retumed without action except
to record noncompliance with these requirements.
l. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely; firlly documented and properly submitted.
4- The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the
Contract Documents.
C.
0r63r-2 l-7554.01
7.
9.
10.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the
Contrict Time-. The request will not be considered if the Product or method
caffiot be provided as
-a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or
coordinate activities properly.
6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary
approval by a-governing authority, and the requested substitution can be
approved.
A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time,--energy
conservation or othei considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting
responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in amanner
that ii compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that
the substihrtion will overcome the incompatibility.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with
other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution
can be coordinated.
The specified product or method of constnrction cannot provide a wal:ranty
required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the
proposed substitution provide the required warranty.
B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data
or Samples that relate to constructien activities not complying with the Contract
Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does
it constitute approval.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01 01631-3
I
. SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
' PARTI.GENERAL
I r.ol sUMMARYtA. Section Includes:
I l. Substantial Completion.
'r Final Inspection.Ir 3. Closeout Submittals.
I 4. Final Adjustment Costs.I 5. Warranties.
I 6. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
r L Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
I 2. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
t 3. Section 01710 - Final Cleaning.
I 4. Section 01720- ProjectRecordDocuments.
5. Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance Data.
I I.O2 SI.JBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
I A. The Contractor shall submit written certification that project, or designated portion of
f project, is substantially complete and shall request, in writing, a final inspection.
r B. Should the Architect determine that the work is substantidly complete, a punch-list
I will be prepared listing deficiencies that need to be conected before final acceptance.. A notice of substantial completion with the deficiencies noted will be issued.
I C. Should the Architect determine that the work is not substantially complete, the
I Contractor will immediately be notified, in writing, stating reasons. After Contractor
completes work, a certification and request for final inspection shall be resubmitted.
I D. Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the Contract for issuance of'r' Certificate of Substantial Completion.
I E. Owner may occupy designated portions of the Project of the purpose of installation of! equipment, under provision stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion.
r
I
t-7ss4.01 01700-l
o
ANCE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
t
l
I
I
I
I
1.03 FINAL ACCEPT
A. Contactor shall submit written certification that:
l. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Project has been inspected for compliance with Conhact Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contact Documents.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of Owner's
Representatives and are operational.
I.O4 CLOSEOUTSUBMITTALS
A. . Submit before final paymeNrt request.
B. Project Record Drawings: Refer to Section 01720.
C. Maintenance Manuals: Refer to Section 01730.
D. Evidence of Payments, and Release of Claims: The Contractor is required to submit
the following before his final Application of Payment:
l. Contractor's Affidavit of Payments of Debts and Claims: AIA G706.
2. Contractot's Affidavit of Release of Liens (Claims): AIA G706A, with:
a. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: AIA G707.b. Contracto/s release of waivers of claims.c. Separate release of waivers of claims for subcontractors, suppliers, and
other with claim rights, against property of Owner, together with list of
those parties.d. Project Record Documents, and certification as to accuracy.
3. All subminals shall be duly executed before delivery.
E. Warranties and Bonds: As specifred in individual sections.
F. Spare Parts and Materials: As specified in individual sections.
G. Keys and Keying Schedule.
H. Spare Parts and Materials.
I. Evidence of Payments and Release of Claims.
I.O5 FINAL ADruSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit final statement of accounting to the Owner.
B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments:
1. Orieinal Contract Sum.
01700-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
a. Previous change orders,b. Unit prices.c. Other adjustments.d. Deductions for uncorrected work.e. Deductions for reinspection payments.
I 1.06 PREPARATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
A. Issuance of a Certificate of Final Payment is subject, but not limited, to the following
I conditions:
l. The Contractor's Project Superintendent shall remain in attendance,-fiIl time on
I site, on the project until 'all punch list items have been completed to the
I satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect.
r 2. Project Superintendent as referenced herein is defined as the Contractor's General
I Suferinteri,fent who has served on site, on a full-time basis dwing the duration of
the project.
I r.07 posr-coNSTRUCTIoN INSpEcTIoNIA. Priorto expiration ofone year from date offinal acceptance, the Architect will conduct
I 6-month aid I t-month inipections to determine whet'her corrective work is required.
t B. Contractor will be notified in writing of all deficiencies.
I C. Corrective work must start on noted deficiencies within l0 days of receipt of
' notification to Contractor.
I 1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSIA. Refer to Section 01720 - Proiect Record Documents.
I B. Store documents separate from those used for construction.
- C. Keep documents curenq do not permanently conceal any work until required
t information has been recorded.
D. At contract closeout, submit documents with transmittal letter to the Architeet
I containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and
t signature ofContractor.
. I.O9 MISCELLANEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES, ETC.
Ir A. At the completion of the project, all loose keys and wrenches shall be accounted for
and tumed over to the Owner, including:
I l. Hose bibb keys.
11 2. Adjustnent keys and wrenches for door closers and panic hardware.
a 3. Keys for electrical switches, electrical panels, etc.
r
oo
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
I
1-7554.01 01700-3
I.1O WARRA}.ITIES
A. All warranties for all equipment shall be included in the O & M Manual.
B. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall remedy any defects due to faulty materials
or workmanship and pay for any dqnqg" to other- work resulting-therefrom, which shall
appear in his work within a period of one year from the {ate of Notice. ofAcceptance. ana in accordance with the terms of any special warranties provided in the contract. '
The Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
C. Upon completion of his work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect in duplicate,
a written warranty based on the provision of this Article properly signed and notarized.
Warranty shall be addressed to the Owner.
D. Execute Contractor's submittals and assemble documents executed by subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with
durable plastic cover.
E. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For equipment put into use with
Owner's permission during construction, submit within l0 days after first operation.
For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide
updated submiual within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of
warranty period.
1.I I OPERATION AND MAINTENA}{CE DATA
A. Refer to Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance.
B. Mechanical . By Mechanical Subcontractor: See Division 15.
C. Electrical - By Electrical Subcontractor: See Division 16.
I.I2 DEMONSTRATIONS
A. Refer to Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance.
B. Mechanical - By Mechanical Subcontactor: See Division 15.
C. Electrical - By Electical Subcontactbr: See Division 16.
1.I3 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each
Section, in addition to that used for construction of work. Coordinate with Owner,
deliver to Project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3. EXECUTION
Not Used
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I017004
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
I
I
t
I
SECTION 01710
FINAL CLEANING
PART I . GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Clean-up during constuction.
2. Final clean-up procedures.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
2. Section 01700 - Contract Close-out.
I.O2 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Clean-up during construction:
l. The project shall be kept free from all surplus material, waste material, dirt and
rubbish caused by constnrction operations.
2. Leave the work clean and spotless, unless more exact requirements are required.
3. In case of dispute, the Owner may remove all such items and charge the cost of
such removal to the Contractor.
B. Subcontractorclean-up:
l. Each subcontactor shall perform daily clean-up for that respective trade.
2. Transport rubbish to an on-site location designated by the Contractor who will
arrange for its removal.
C. Cleaners: With the exception of clean-up of the site and cleaning specifically assigned
under various sections ofthe specifications, all final clean-up ofexterior and interior of
the building shall be done by professional cleaners.
l. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, any new surfaces on exterior,
concrete, metal, etc., shall be carefully and thoroughly cleaned.
2. Glass: Both sides of all glass in work areas shall be carefully and thoroughly
cleaned by professional window cleaners and left absolutely clean and free from
paint, grease, dirt, etc.
3. Hardware: Clean and polish all hardware and leave clean and free from paint,
grease, dirt, etc.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 01710-l
4. Plumbing: Clean and polish all plumbing fixtures, fittings, and exposed plated
piping. Leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Remove all labels.
5. Electical: Clean and polish all electic fixtures, fittings, including glassware,
switchplates, etc., and leave clean and free ftom paint, grease, dirt etc.
6. Equipment Carefully and thoroughly clean dl items of equipment mechanical,
electrical, cabinets, ductwork, etc.
7. Floors: Thoroughly clean all floors. Mop resilient floor coverings with warm
water and mild detergent as recommended by manufacturer of the tile, then
thoroughly machine buff. Vacuum and clean carpeting. Danp mop or scrub
concrete floors as required to leave them thoroughly clean when site or building
is turned over to the Owner.
D. Completion: The entire work inside and out, and the entire premises shall be in first-
class, clean condition upon completion before being accepted by Owner.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
NotUsed
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NotUsed
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I0r7r0-2 l-7554.01
I
T sEcTroN 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCI]MENTS
I' PART I.GENERAL
I r.ol SUMMARYIA. Section Includes:
I 1. Record document definition.
I 2. Recordingandcontenl.
t 3. Maintenance requirements.
I
4. Submittal requirements.
B. Related Sections
I l. Section 0l700-ConfiactCloseout.
2. Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance Data
I I.O2 DEFINITIONS
I A. Project Record Documents are intended 1o indicate all changes and deviation! ftom-
I original contact documents and permanently record the "As-Built" condition of
material, equipment and structure.
I B. Project Record Documents include the following:
l. Contract Drawinss.
I 2. Project Manual.
r 3. Addenda.
r 4. Change orders.
I 5. Modifications and Clarifications.r
6. Approved Shop Drawings.
t 7. Approved Product Data.
.r 8. Manufacturer's Certifications.
! 9. Project Test Results.
I l.o3 SUBMITTALS
!A. Submit project record documents in conformance with Section 01700.
I
I
1-7ss4.01 01720-l
o
final payment.
I
I
I
I
B. "As-Built" drawing submittal shall be approved prior to
1.04 QUALITYASSUMIICE
A. RecordingRequirements:
l. Use different colored pencil or pen for each system.
2. Provide color legend.
3. Provide symbol technique identical to contract drawings.
4. Record data prior to permanently concealing work.
B. MaintenanceRequirements:
l. Record docurnents shall b€ available for inspection by the Ovmer, Architect and
Consultants.
2. Update rccord documents weekly.
3. Maintain separate set of documents for record use.
4. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.
C. Record Drawing Content:
l. Record detail and dimension changes.
2. Locate concealed work including:
a. Interiorandexteriorutilities.b. Valves.c. Dampers.d. Controls.e. Jrmction boxes.f. Cleanouts.
E. Access doors.
D. Record Specification Content:
l. Manufacturer, calalog number and tade name of product installed.
2. Changes.
3. Pertinent data not originally sp,ecified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
I
Iot720-2 l-7554.01
I
I SECTION 01730
OPERATION AI\D MAINTENAITCE DATA
I' PART I.GENERAL
I I.OI SUMMARYIA. Section Includes:
I l. Format and content of manuals.
I 2. Instnrction of Owner's personnel.
I 3. Schedule of submittals.
I B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01300 - Submittals; Submittals procedures.
I 2. Section 01300 - Submittals: Shop drawings, product data" and samples.
3. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.
fl 4. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Systems demonstration.
I 5. Section0l700-ContractCloseout: CloseoutProcedures.
ll 6. Section01700-ContractCloseout: Projectrecorddocuments.
I 1. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Warranties and bonds.I
8. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and
maintenance data
I 1.02 QUALITYASSLTRANCE
I A. Prepare instnrctions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation
- ofdescribed products.
I l.o3 FoRMA'TtA. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
I B. Binders; Commercial quality, 8-ll2 x ll inches, three-ring binders with hardback,
cleanable, plastic covers; one inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are
I used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.
! C. Cover: Identiff each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project identify subject matter ofI contents.r D. Arrange content by systems, under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents
I of this Project Manual.
I
t
l-7s54.0r 01730-l
Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
Text Manufacturer's printed dat4 or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.
. Drawings:
1. Provide with reinforced punched binder tabs.
2. Bind in with text.
3. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
I.O4 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME
A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; narnes addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of
products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of
subcontractors and zuppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identiff specific products and component
parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of
equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record
Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of
instnrctions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturels instnrctions.
F. Waranties and Bonds: bind in copy of each.
I.O5 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog
number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for
re-ordering custom manufactured products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturet's recommendations for
cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: Include product data listing
applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation.
Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional Requirements: As Specified in individual Specifications sections.
E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design dat4 with tabbed fly sheet and space
for insertion ofdata.
F.
G
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I01730-2 t-7554.01
I o
I 1.06 MANUALFOREQUPMENTANDSYSTEMS
I A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description o{unit or systern, and
component partis.' Give function,-nomnl operating characteristics, an4 limiting
I conditions. include performance curyes, with eigineering data and tests, and complete
I nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
I B, Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electical service characteristics, contols, and
t communications.
I C. Include as-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
I D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal -
operating
initructioins and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and
I emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating
I instructions.
I E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble-
I shooting; disasserirbly, repair, and reassembly initructions; and alignment, adjusting,: balancing, and checking instructions.
I F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list oflubricants required.I G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
I H. Include sequence ofoperation by controls manufacturer.
r I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
t diagrams required for maintenance.
J. Provide as-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer'
t K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as-installed color coded piping
diagrams.
I L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and contol diagrams.
I M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, cunent prices, and recommendedI quantities to be maintained in storage.
I N. Include test and balancing reports.
I O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections.
I P. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data with tabbed fly sheet and spacer for insertion ofdata.
I r.o7 rNsrRucrroN oF owNER pERSoNNEL
I
I
I
A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment,
and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. For
equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within
six months.
I
l-7s54.01 0l 730-3
B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instuction. Review contents of
manuil with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
C. Prepar€ and insert additional data in Operalion and Maintenance Manual when need for
such data becomes apparent during instnrction.
I.O8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. Architect will review draft and retum one copy with comments.
B. For equipmenl or component pqts of equipment put into service during construction
and oferited by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C. Submit on copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection.
Copy will be riturned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content
of iiocuments as required prior to final submittal.
D. Submit two copies of revised volumes of data in final fomr within ten days after final
inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 . DGCUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I01730-4 l-7554.01
I
r SECTION 02010
SI,BSTTRFACE EXPLORATION
! PART I.GENERAL
I l.or SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I l. Reference to Owner-provided Soil and Foundation Investigation.
| 2. Interpretationanduse.
I 3. Examination of site.
I
B. Related Documents:
l. Geotechnical Data: Owney's Soils Report.
I 2. Section 01400 - Qualrty Control.
1 Section 02200 - Earthwork: Soils engineering services requirements.IT I.O2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
I A. Owner-provided soils investigation.
t l. The Owney's Soil Engineer,
It 2. Responsibility and payment for soils engineering services for quality control, and
earthwork shall be included in the respective sections.
I B. Design Requirements:
I
I
I
I
l. The Soils Report was prepared for design purposes in accordance with generally
accepted soil and foundation engineering practices.
2. No other walTanty expressed or implied is made as to the professional advice
included in the report.
C. PerformanceRequirements;
l. The exploratory borings were spaced in order to obtain a comprehensive picture
of the subsoil condition.
2. Erratic soil conditions mav occur between test holes. If such conditions are
found during construction operations, the Architect and Owner shall be notified.
I l.o3 PRoJEcr coNDrrroNsrA. The Contractor shall examine the site before submitting Bid to determine character ofI materials to be encountered and all conditions which will effect work, time and cost.r
r l-7554.01 02010-l
t
oo
B. Bench marks, monuments, and other reference points, shall be provided and maintained
by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 . DGCUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
02010-2 l-7554.0r
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
sEcTroN 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
I.OI SIJMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Extent of selective demolition work is indicated on Drawings'
B. Types of Selective Demolition Work:
L Demolition requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the
following:
Portions of building structure indicated on Drawings and as required to
accommodate new construction.
Removal of interior partitions as indicated on Drawings.
Removal of doors and frames indicated "remove."
Removal of built-in casework indicated "remove."
Removal and protection of existing material, fixtures and equipment items
indicated "salvage" or reused.
t.02
A.
L03
A.
t-7554.0r
SUBMITTALS
Schedule:
l. Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for
selective demolition work to the Owner for review prior to commencement of
work. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility
services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection.
a. Provide detailed sequenc€ of demolition and removal work to ensure
unintemrpted progress of Owner's on-site operations.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Occupancy:
1. Owner's personnel will be continuously occupying areas of the building
immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective
demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's
normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of
demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's normal operations.
Secure Owner's approval of all activities which will impact normal operations.
Condition of Structures:
l. The Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures
to be demolished.
02070-l
c.
D.
a. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be
maintained by the Owner insofar as practical. However, variations within
stnrcture may occur by the Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to
start of selective demolition.
Partial Removal:
l. ltetns indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to the Owner may be
removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site
as they are removed.
a. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
Protection of Persons and Property:
l. Provide tempomry banicades and other forms of protection as required to protect
Owner personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition
work. Remove protective devices at completion of work.
a. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of
Owner personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of
building.
Traffrc:
l. Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities.
a. Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct steets, walks or other occupied
or used facilities without written permission from authorities having
jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffrc
ways if required by goveming regulations.
Explosives:
l. Use of explosives will not be permitted.
Utility Services:
l. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect
against damage druing demolition operations.
a. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except
when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction, Provide
temporary services dwing intemrptions to existing utilities as acceptable to
the Owner. Pay special attention not to disturb computer power systems or
associated grounds.
Environmental Controls :
l. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit
dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with
governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
T
F.
G.
02070-2 l-7554.01
I
I
t
T
T
I
T
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
II
I
t
I
I
o
hazardous ora. Do not use water when it may create obj ectionable conditions
such as ice, flooding and pollution.b. Refer to other sections of Division-2 for asbestos-containing materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Prior to cornmencement of selective demolition worlg inspect areas in which work will
be perfomred. Photograph existing damage to structure surfaces, equipment or to
sunbunding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from
selective demolition work; file with the Owner prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement,
settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
l. Notifu the Owner immediately if safety of structure is endangered. Take due
precautions to properly support stucture.
B. Cover and protect fumiture, equipment and fixtures to rernain from soiling or damage
when demolition work is performed in rooms or axeas from which such items have not
been removed.
C. Erect and maintain dust-proofpartitions and closures as required to prevent spread of
dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building.
1. Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of
the building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 4 inch studs, 5/8 inch
&ywall (oints taped) on occupied side, lD inch fire-retardant plywood on
demolition side, and fill partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation.
2. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition
work.
D.Locate, identify, stub-offand disconnect utility services that are not to remain.
1. Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to
occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to the
Owner if shut-down of service is necessary during change-over.
DEMOLITION
Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as
required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition
schedule and governing regulations.
3.03
A.
1-7554.01 02070-3
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
T
I
B.
l. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at
junctures with construction to remain using powerdriven masonry saw or hand
tools; do not use power-driven impact tools in buildings.
2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris
to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing.
a- Do not throw any debris or salvaged material from above grade floors of
building to grade. Construct chutes as required to conduct debris safely to
gade disposal areas of refuse containers.
3. Do not cut or alter any structural member without the Owner's authorization.
If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with
intended function or design are encountercd, investigate and measure both natue and
extent of the conflict. Submit report in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of
directive, rearange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job
progress without delay.
REUSED MATERIALS
Reused Items:
l. Where indicated on Drawings or in Specifications, carefully remove indicated
items, clean and store until ready to preparc for reinstallation.
2. Items to be reused for reinstallation as follows:
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISI{ED MATERJALS
Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from
building site. Transport and dispose of materials off site in legal manner.
l. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply
with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances.conceming removal, handling
and protection against exposure or environmental pollution.
2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
CLEANINGA}ID REPAIR
Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished
materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.
Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Retum stuctures and surfaces
to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work.
Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition
work.
02070-4
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01
II ff:':ffi:
I PARr l -cENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
1 Clear siG of plant life and grass.I! 2. Remove rcot system of trees and sbrubs.
I 3. Remove surface debris.
4. Stripping and storage of existing topsoil.
I B. Related Sections:
1 Section 02200 - Earthwork.I! 1.02 REGULATORYREQUIFEMENTS
I A. Conform to applicable code for disposal of debris.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I z.or roPsor
r A. Material sripped from site consisting of loose friable loam reasonably free of
I admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, rocks, brush, weeds, or other material
' detimental to proper development of vegetative growth,
I PARr3-DccurroN
3.OI CLEARING
I A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.
I B. Remove trees and shrubs within marked areas.
t l. Grub out stumps, roots, and surface rock.
t C. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil.
3.02 TOPSOLEXCAVATION
I A. Remove all sod, topsoil, organic earth to 6 inch depth, stock pile topsoil as designated
on Drawings or directed by Architect.
I 3.03 PRorEcrroN
A. Protect plant growth and features remaining as final landscaping.I
I r-7ss4.or o2uo-l
B. Protect bench marks and existing work from damage or displacement.
C. ldaintain designated site access for vehicle and pedestrian traffic.
3.04 REMOVAL
A. Remove debris from site.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
02t10-2 t-7554.0r
t
SECTION 02200
I EARTHWORK
T PART I -GENERAL
r l.0l SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
I l. Extent of earthwork is indicated on Drawings.I
2. Removal, stockpiling and placement of topsoil.
I 3. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements.
I 4. Removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated.
t 5. Disposal of materials removed.
I B. Related Sections:T
1. Section 02010 - Subsurface Exploration: For Contractor's information and
reference.I 2. Section 021l0 - Site Clearing.
I r.02 QUALITYASSURANCE
r A. Prior to the start of constuctiorL meet with a representative of Soils Engineer and the
I Contractor to discuss site preparation, grading specifications, equipment to be used,r and any unusual soil conditions or special requirements.
I B. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicablet requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
I l. Uniform Building Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the
I Uniform Building Code pertaining to grading excavation.
11 2. Geotechnical Report Compliance: Perform excavation, backfill, and fill work in
I compliance with recommendations of Geotechnical Report.
C. Testing and Inspection Service:
I L A testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality
control testing during earthwork operations shall be employed by the Contractor,
not the Subcontractor.
1.03 PROJECTCONDITIONS
I A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities
' are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during
earthwork operations.
I
t :-7ss4.or 02200-r
l. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, consult utility Owner immediately for directions. Cooperate
with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in
operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility Owner.
B. Protection ofPersons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of
this work and post with waming lights.
I . Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from
damage caused by settlements, lateral movement, undermining, washout and
other hazards sreatd by earthwork operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI SOIL MATERIALS
A. Definitions:
l. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487
soil classification group GW' GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM and SC.
2. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487
soil classification groups ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH and PT.
3. Backfrll and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel
larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable
and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.OI TOPSOL
A. Topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled for use after grading has been completed. The
stockpile areas shall be within 1,000 feet of the center of the construction area
Stockpile areas shall be desigrrated by the Contractor.
B. Excess topsoil shall be on site in an area designated by the Owner. Waste areas shall
be within 1500 feet of the center of the constmction ar€a
C. Topsoil shall be placed to a depth of4 inches in all areas not to receive surfacing or
suuchrres.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation is unclassified, and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated,
regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architecl shall be at Conhactor's
exp€nse.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
t
t02200-2 l-7554.01
F.
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Additional Excavation: If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required
subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as
directed by Architect.
l. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on
basis ofcontact conditions relative to changes in work.
Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and
ordinances havingjruisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because
of space restrictions or siability of material excavated.
l. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into
excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
l. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent
softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes
detimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain
pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering
system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to
collecting or run-off areas.
Material Storage: Stockpile excavated materials until required for backfill. Place,
grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
l. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store
within drip line of trees indicated to remain.
Excavation for structural fill shall be to the limits indicated on Drawing.
Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-
sections, elevations and grades as shown.
3.03 COMPACTION
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage
ofdensity specified for each area classification indicated below.
B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D
1557.
l. Roads and Paved Areas: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of
backfill or fill material to a minimum of 95 percent ma:<imum density.
2. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of
backfill or fill material to a minimum of 85 percent ma:<imum density.
3. Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material to a minimum of 90 percent maximum density.
D.
G.
H.
t-7554.01 02200-3
c.
4. Structrual Fill: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or
fill material to a minimum of 95 percent maximum densrty.
Moisture Control: Soils shall be placed with moisnre content of plu-Or-minw 2
percent of optimunr moisture. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
moisture conditioned before compaction, unifomrly apply water to surface of subgrade,
or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surfacp during or
subsequent to compaction operations.
1. Remove and rcplace, or scariff and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified density.
a. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit
compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying
by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moistue content is reduced to a
satisfactory value.
BACKFILL AI{D FILL
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for
each area classification listed below.
L In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
2, Under grass atreras, lxie satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
3. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits.
Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, deb'ris, rmsatisfactory soil materials,
obstmctions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills.
Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that
fill material will bond with existing surface.
l. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under
"Compaction" for particular area classificatio& break up ground surface,
pulverize, moisture-condition to optirnum moisture content, and compact to
required depth and percentage of maximum density.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including
adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact
with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated, or
between such points and existing grades.
Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away
form stnrctures and to prevent ponding.
l. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:
2. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than
0.10' above or below required subgrade elevations.
T
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
3.M
A.
3.05
A.
B.
c.
B.
02200-4 l-7554.01
J.
4.
l.
)
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with
finish surface not more than 0.10' above or below required subgrade elevation.
Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-
sectiorq with finish surface not more t}rrn ll2 inch above or below required
subgrade elevation.
C. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the'depth and indicated
percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Contol Testing During Constuction: Allow testing service to inspect and
approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is perfomred.
Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone
method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method) or ASTM D 2922 (nuclear
method), as applicable. When ASTM D 2922 is used, the calibration curves shall
be checked and adjusted using only the sand cone method as described in ASTM
D 1556. ASTM D 2922 results in wet unit weight of soil and when using this
method, ASTM D 3017. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture
gages shall be made at the beginning of a job, on each different type of material
encountered, at intervals as directed by the Architect.
Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field density test of
subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. ofpaved area or building slab, but in no case less
than 3 tests. ln each compacted frll layer, make one field density tests for every
2000 sq. ft.ofoverlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3
tests.
B. If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or
fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional
compaction and testing at no additional expense.
3.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded from haffrc and erosion. Keep free
ofbash and debris.
l. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified
tolerances.
B, Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent constnrction operations or adverse weather, scarifu surface, re-shape, and
compact to required densrty prior to further construction.
C. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general
project walranty period, add backfill material and compact. Restore appearance,
quality, and condition of swface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate
evidence ofrestoration to greatest extent possible.
3.08 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal to Designated Areas on Owner's Property: Transport acceptable excess
excavated material to designated soil storage are:s on Owner's property. Stockpile soil
1-7554.01 02200-5
or spr€ad as directed by Owner. Waste area.hall be within 1500 feet of the center of
the construction arcar in an area designarcd by the Owner. Waste areas shall be
covered with a minimum of 4 inches of topsoil.
END OF SECTION
02200-6 t-7554.01
I
I
I PARrI -cENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
I A. Section lncludes:
sEcTroN 02513
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
l. Full-depth asphaltic concrete paving surface course and base course for all onsite
work.I
I.O2 RELATED SECTIONS
t A. Section 01400 - Quality Control.
I B. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
I C. Section 02580 - Pavement Markings.
I r.o3 REFERENcEStA. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction: Department of
I Transportati6n, State of Colorado, l99l (CDOT Specs).
l. Section 401 - Plant Mix Pavements - General.
a,
t 2. Section 702 - Bituminous Material.
I 3. Section 703 - Aggregates.
I B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Standaxds in Building Codes:
I l. ASTM D 3549 - Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted BituminousI Paving Mixture Specimens.
ll 2. ASTM D 3203 - Percent Air Voids in compacted, Dense and Open Bituminous
I Paving Mixture Specimens.
-\ ? ASTM D 2172 - Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving
I Mixtures.
I.O4 OUALITYASSTIRANCE
.r A. Perform work in accordance with CDOT Specs.
I B. Mixing Plant: Conform to CDOT Specs.
I C. Obtain materials from the same source throughout project construction.
I
I
I r75s4.or 02513-l
I.O5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Asphalt Mix Design for CDOT Grading C and Grading CX.
B. Submit certification for Class 6, ABC.
1.06 EMIRONMENTALREQUIREMENTS
A. Do not place asphalt when subgrade surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or
surface is wet or frozen.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Asphaltic Cement Comply with Subsection 702.01, CDOT Specifications, Viscosity
Grade AC-10.
B. Aggregates:
l. Use locally available materials and gradations exhibiting satisfactory record of
previous installations.
2. Bituminous Base Course Aggregate: Crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed
slag, and sharp-edged natural sand, Subsection 703.04, Grade C, CDOT Specs.
3. Bituminous Surface Course Aggregate: Grade CX, CDOT Specs.
4. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, Portland Cement or other
inert material complying with Subsection 703.06, CDOT Specs.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalq Grade CSS-lh complying with Subsection 702.04,
CDOT Specs.
B. Reclaimed asphalt will not be allowed.
C. Equipment used for paving shall comply with Section 401, CDOT Specs.
2.03 SOT.JRCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Submit proposed mix design for approval prior to commencement of work.
2.04 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Class 6, Aggregate Base course per Section 703, CDOT Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A, Verifr that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Veriff gradients and elevations ofsubgrade are correct.
I
I
I
!
I
I
i
I
t
I
I
T
I
n
I
I
I
I
I02513-2 1-7554.01
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
C. Surface
o
Preparation:
3.02
A.
B.
c.
l. Provide grade and location stakes under this Section as required for asphaltic
concr€te paving work.
2. Fine Grading: For areas covered by this Section, finish fine grade to accurate
levels so specified miqimum thickness of paving can be maintained with accurate
and uniform finish levels as indicated.
3. Scarifr subgrade to eight (8) inches minimum, moisten subgmde to optimum
moisture content and re-compact to 95 percent of the ma:rimum standard Proctor
density within 2 percent of the optimum moisture conknt as determined by
ASTM D 698.
4. Proof Rolling: Operate heavy, rubber tired front loader or dirt-filled tandem
wheeled dump truck over subgrade of paved areas. Where soft spots occur,
remove loose materials and replace with road base aggregate compacted to level
of subgrade at Contractor's expense.
5. Changes in weather such as freezing or precipitation occurring after subgrade is
proof rolled and before asphalt paving operations begin will require re-proof
rolling prior to paving.
6. Asphalt paving operations will begin within 24 hours after proof rolling.
Coordination:
l. Cooperate with other trades; arrange timing to avoid damage to the work
including exterior concrete, gmding, utilities, and seeding.
2. Before starting paving, ascertain utility lines, lighting, wiring, piping, curb work,
general grading, and heavy trucking are complete so such operations will not
damage paving work.
PREPARATION - TACK COAT
Apply tack coat on asphalt or concr€te surfaces over subgrade surface at a uniform rate
between 0.05 gallons per square yard to 0.15 gallons per sqrnre yard ofsurface.
Apply to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and previously constructed asphalt
pavements.
Coat surfaces of manholes and inlets frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt
pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces.
v
I
I
I
I
D. Allow tack coat to dry until tacky to touch prior to paving.
3.03 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT
A. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying tack coat.
B. Place to ma:rimum of three (3) inches compacted thickness lifts.
l-7554.01 02513-3
Placing:
l. Deliver job mix with temperature above 235 degrees F.
2. Place inaccessible and small areas by hand.
3. Paver Placing: Place in stips not less than ten (10) feet wide, unless otherwise
acceptable to the ArchitectlEngineer. After fust strip is placed and rolled, place
succeeding stips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips.
4. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive
days'work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints
to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of asphalt
concrete course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
Rolling:
l. Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
2. Compact mixture wittr hot hand tanpers or vibrating plate compactors in areas
inaccessible to rollen.
3. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately
following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdorryir
rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot
material.
4. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling rN soon as possible, while mixture is
hot. Continue second rolling until mixture thoroughly compacted.
5. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for
removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until all roller marks are eliminated
and course has attained maximum densiw allowed.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Flatress: Morimum variation of 0.1875 inches measured with ten (10) foot seaight
edge.
B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 0.125 inches.
C. VariationfromTrueElevation: Within0.l0 inches.
3.05 FrELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will_ b€ performed under provisions of Section 01400 by
the Owner as directed by the Architect.
B. Asphalt Pavements: Check compaction and compliance with design mix by cutting test
plugs where directed in accordance with ASTM D 979. Patch core holes. Test for
compaction minimum of 95 percent of Marshall design density, aggrcgate gradation
voids, and percent asphalt.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
t
I
c.
D.
02513-4 t-7554.01
c.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
F.
3.06
A.
3.07
A.
One (1) test for density ASTM D I 188, ASTM D 2726, or D 2950 thickness ASTM D
3549, and air voids ASTM D 3203 per 300 tons of asphaltic material placed.
One (l ) test for asphalt content ASTM D 2172 and aggregate gradation per I 500 tons
of asphaltic material placed.
All reports shall include densities to the nearest 0.1 lb. per ft and compaction to nearest
0.1 percent. If a nuclear device is used, the report shall contain the method used @ack
scatter or direct transmission geometry), results of the daily standardization checks and
the adjusted manufacturers calibration curve. The manufacturers calibration curve shall
be adjusted as required by ASTM D 2950 whenever a change in either the material to
be tested or the testing equipment is made.
Subgrade: Compaction tests shall be taken every 2000 square feet and/or as directed by
the Owner.
PROTECTION
Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury until cooled
and hardened
AGGREGATE BASE COI.JRSE
Place Class 6, ABC in lifts and compact to project specifications.
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01 02513-5
SECTION 02520
t poRTLAI\tD .EMENT coNcRETE pAvING
I PARTI -GENERAL
- I.OI SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
I
l. Concretepaving.
2. Curbs and gutters.
-I 3. Sidewalks.
;_r 4. Cross-pans.
I B. Related Sections:
I
l. Section 01400 - Qualrty Contol.
2. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
I r.o2 euALTTYASSURANcE
'\ A. Record of Work Contactor shall keep record of time and date of placement,
I mflrgr;;y",
and weather conditions. ndtain until completion and turnisi copy to
I B. Conform to lines, grades, and typical cross sections shown on the Drawings.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
I A. Shop Drawings: Reinforcement, prefabricated sections.
a B. Manufacturer's Data: Additives, joint materials, curing compounds.
I C. Mix Design: Proportions of fine and coarse aggregate, water, cement, air content,
admixtures.tI D. Placement Method proposed, if requested.
I I.O4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
t A. Cold Weather: Except by specific written authorization" cease concreting when
- descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35
I degrees F., and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during coldI weather, temperature mix at delivery shall not exceed 80 degrees F. Fog sprayers or
special wetting agents will be required for protection.
t-7554.01
I
I
I 02520-1
PART2. PRODUCTS
2.OI READY MDGD CONCRETE
A. AASHTO MI57
2.02 CEMENT
A. AASIITO M85, Type II, 555 pouds/cubic yard.
2.03 AGGREGATES
A. Fine Aggregate: AASHTO M 6, 33 to 39 percent total.
B. Coarse Aggregate: AASIITO M 80, Size 67 ,357 , or 467 .
2.04 WATER
A. AASHTO T 26
B. Slump I'to 4u.
l. Water cement ratio: 0.48 maximum.
2.05 ADMXTURES
A. AirEntrainingAgent AASTITO M 154, plus orminus l-l/2 percent.
B. Aggregate Size Air Content - percent
I
I
t
I
I
I
a
I
I
l
t
t
I
1
I
I
t
I
I
3/8 inch
l/2nch
3/4 inch
l inchandlarger
8
7
6
5
C. Chemical-Admixtures: AASHTO M 194.
2.06 QUALTTY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 01400 for additional requirements.
B. Follow approved mix design.
C. Confomr to applicable requirements of ACI 301.
D. Field cylinders shall produce 28 day minimum compressive strength of 3750 psi.
Cement content 565 lb/cy minimum.
2.07 JOINT MATERIAL
A. AASHTO M I73.
2.08 CURING MATERIALS
A. Burlap cloth from jute orkenaf - AASHTO M 182.
l-7554.01 02520-2
to
I B. White liquid membrane - AASHTO M 148, I gaV150 sf.
I C. Sheet Materials - AASHTO M 171.4 mil.
I PARr3-ExEcurroN
3.OI PREPARATION
I A. Check for soft spots by proof-rolling or other means prior to setting forms. Remove
soft yielding material and replace. Compact to specifications. Wet to optimum
- moisture to 6 inches deep, not more than 12 hours prior to placement so subgrade will
t not absorb moistue from concrete.
B. Test for crown and/or elevation by subgrade planer to assure specified thickness. If
I additional material used to bring iubgide to correct elevation, compact to all looseI materials. No disturbance inside forms after fine grading subgrade.
f C. Forms shall be capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment:r 1. Maximum deflection of l/4 inch.
| 2. Staight and free from warp, with ma:rimum deviation of surface li8 inch.!
r, 3. Good condition, clearL and stong enough to resist pressure of concrete when
I phced.
- 4. Joined neatly and accurately to line and grade, and mechanically tamped to
assure firm placement.
I 5. Oil prior to concrete placement.
I
| 6. Form construction joints and blockouts in accordance with Drawings.
D. Set dowels, expansion joints, preformed construction joints, and header boards in
I accordance with drawings. Securely stake preformed baskets to prevent movement.I Grease dowels on one side ofjoints with caps on greased end.
I E. Backfill behind fonns as required to prevent water from entering subgrade.
I, 3.02 PLACEMENT
I A. Deposit concrete near final position on grade with minimum segregation and without! damage of subgrade. Operate tansit mixer outside forms at all times, except in
locations approved by the Architect.fI]f B. Place concrete on subgrade in successive batches for full width between forms in
manner requiring as little rehandling as possible.
I C. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials.
I D. Deposit excess concrete to provide roll ahead of strike off screed for firll length of
I screed.
,:- E. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms. Final surfaces shall not
t haveholesorhoneycombs.t
I blss4.or ozs2o-3
I
3.03 FIMSHING
A. Use equipment designed to sprea{, consolidate, screed and float freshly.placed concrete^
in one pass, providing well consolidated, homogeneous mixture, requiring minimum of
hand finishing to meet surface tolerances. Stike hand finished surfaces t tolerances by
methods agreed to by Architect.
B. Finished surfaces will b€ tested with a l0 foot staight edge parallel to center line
immediately following first floating of surface. Staight edge will be advanced 5 feet
and space under staight edge shall not exceed 3/16 inch.
C. Final finish pavements after floating and staight edging with canvas belt, other suitable
belting 12 inches wide, or rubbing. Work belt longitudinally with crosswise motion.
Curbs, gutter, cross pens, and sidewalks finished with burlap drag, wood float, or brush
to match existing adjacent concrete finish.
3.04 JOINTS
A. Contaction joints, minimum depth l/4 thickness of concrete.
l. Hand formed with tool, header board or towel pushed into surface to move all
aggxegate from joint.
2. Saw joins as soon as concrete can support equipment without marring, no later
than 12 hours after placement. First joints sawed approximately 60 feet apart,
intermediate joints sawed after initial joints. Joints to be staight, tnre and
perpendicular to centerline.
B. Longitudinal joints in conformance with Drawings.
l. Fabricated steel or pla*ic strip held rigidly in place with adequate pins driven
into subgrade.
2. Joints constructed by forms with recess and tie bars.
3. Sawed joints, with suitable guidelines to ensure joint is true to line. Saw ffi soon
as possible to prevent enatic or unconholled cracking.
C. Construction joints perpendicular to centerline at end of each day's work. Use dowels,
bars or load tansfer devices in all constntction joints in accordance with Drawings.
D. Expansion joints with preformed joint filler in a vertical position, deviating not more
than 1/4 inch from a straight line. Install at all existing and proposed stuctures
projecting through, into, or against pavement, in accordance with Drawings.
E. Install joint sealant at temperatures above 50 degrees F. in accordance with
manufacturefs recommendations. Clean all dust, debris, and water from joints.
3.05 CURING
A. Apply curing compounds, sheets, or burlap immediately after finishing and water film
has evaporated from surface.
B. Do not mark or mar finished surface.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
It-7554.01 02520-4
I C. Coat sides within one hour after fomr removal.
r 3.06 PRorEcrIoN
I A. il:"#*ft*Oc sheeting or other approved material to protect fresh uncured surfaces
I B. Cold Weather:
v l. Maintain temperature of concrete above 50 degrees F. for minimum five (5) days
I fromplacement.
- 2. Cover surface with plastic sheeting, staw, burlap and/or canvas if temperature
-. drops below 25 degrees F., within five (5) days of placement.
| 3. Remove and replace concrete damaged by freezing at Contactor's expense.
|
4. Calcium chloride shall notbeused.
C. After completing concrete operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess materials, and
t clean work area.
I D. After 7 days or concrete has attained 550 psi flexural strength. No vehicle loads
t ;ffigit design loading. No equipment permitted on new pavement until strength
r
END oF sEcrIoNI
I
t
raJ
?
t
t-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I 02520-5
I
I SECTION 02580
PAVEMENT MARKING
I PARrI-cENERAL
I.O1 SUMMARY
I A. Section lncludes:
I
l
I
- 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE
I A. Mock-Up:
2 l. Provide samples ofthe following:
'' a Traffic lane stripe, l0 linear feet.
t b. One parking stall stipe.
B. Approved sarrples may remain as part of the final work. Rejected samples shall be
-, removed from the substrate.I. PART2.PRoDUCTS
| 2.0r MATERTALS
A. Lane Marking Material:AI I i!t:l:3;ffi":t1ffiffi*,'"if#*?TxitiH##:.l;r,X24eorM
t B. Thickness:
l. Not less than 60 mills.
I c. cotors:
I l. Opaque White.
- PART3-EXECUrIoN
I 3.ol rNsrALLArroN
_- A. Provide 4 inch wide sEipes at all parking lanes as indicated.I
I r-zss4.or
l. Handicapped symbol marking.
2. Lane marking.
3. Parking stall identification.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 02513 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
02580-l
Provide handicap symbols, lane marking stipes and taffic contol symbols as
indicated and required.
END OF SECTION
02580-2 l-7554.01
I
Il lT''*"Jffi
I A. Section Includes:
SECTION 02710
SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEMS
a- AvanEDGE; Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
b. Cnrmpler Plastic Pipe,Inc.
c. Fomr-A-Drain; CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
2. Fab'ric Drainage Panels:
a. Plastinet 6261; ABTlMaynard Plastics.
b. Enkadrain 9120; Akzo Industial Systems Co.
c. Gun&req Gundle Lining Systems, Inc.
d. JDRain-I00; JDR Enterprises, Inc.
e. STRATADRAIN 50-l; Strata Systems,Inc.
1' Foundation drainage tile systern" complete with required couplings and
I accessones.
' 2. Aggregate setting bed and cover.
I B. Related Sections:|'
l . Section 02200 - Earthwork Excavation for drainage tile.
I r.o2 REFEREN.ES
I A. ASTM F 405- Comrgated Polyethylene @E) Tubing and Fittings.
I PART2-PR.DUCTS
I 2.or MANUFAcTuRERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:Ir l. Drainage Conduits:
I
I
t
I
t 2.02 MATERTAL'
r. A. Drainage Piping: Perforated, polyvinylchloride type ASTM F 405, comrgated, for
I coupled joints; 4 inch inside diameier; complete with required couplings and fittings.
L Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.Ir B. Coarse Filter Aggregate: Clean well .graded natural gravel or crushed stone; free from
shale, clay, organic materials and debris.I
I t-lss4.ol 027tD-l
o
sand; free
I
I
t
I
I
from silt, clay, loam,
D. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile fab'ric of polypropylene (PP) or polyester fibers, or
combination of both.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Install foundation drainag€ system with course and fine filter aggregate stone.
B. Hand tim excavations to required elevations. Do not over excavate. Remove large
stones or other hard matter which could damage drainage tile.
C. Place drainage piping on minimum 2 inch deep bed of couse fine filter aggregate.
D. Install piping beginning at low points of system, tue to grades and alignment
indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with fulIbearing, solidly in
filtering material. Install gaskets, s€als, sleeves, and couplings according to
manufacturet's written instnrctions and other requireurents indicated.
l. InstaU piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of I percent
(l:100) and with a minimum cover of 36 inches, except wherc otherwise
indicated.
2. Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's uritten instuctions.
3. Place with perforations facing downward.
E. Wrap drain lines with filter fabric or graded granular material to prevent intrusion of
fines.
Ensure complete connection to stonn sewer system using unperformated pipe.
Prior to placing filter aggregate cover, allow Architect to make visual inspection of
installed drainage tile.
H. Place filter aggregate cover in ma:cimum 6 inch lifts, consolidating each lift. Increase
compaction of each successive lift. Do not displace or damage drainage tile when
compacting.
3.02 DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
Install according to manufacturer's written instmctions and as indicated. Coordinate
placement with other foundation drainage materials.
Comply with manufactue/s written instnrctions for securing drainage panels to
substate. Use adhesives and mechenical fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
Lap edges of fabric and extend fabric around foundation drainage pipe according to
manufacturefs recommendations. Protect installed panels during bacldlling.
C. Fine Filter Aggregate: Clean well graded naturd
organic matters and soluble material.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
T
F.
G.
B.
l-7554.01 02710-2
t
3.03 FrELD QUALTTYCONTROL
- A. Testing: Test drain piping with water or visually check piping to ensure free flow
I before backfilling.
I B. Remove obstnrctions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are
I
satisfactory.
ENDOF SECTIONI
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I rlss4.or 02710-3
t
I
I
I
I
l
t
l
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
SECTION 03300
CONCRETE WORK
PART I -GENERAL
1.OI SI.JMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Work consists of fumishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for
completion of the following work:
a. Fomrwork, complete with required shoring, bracing and anchorage.b. Reinforcing, complete with required supports, spacers and related
accessones.c. Cast-in-place concrete including footings, grade beams, walls, slabs-on-
grade, and stairs.d. Finish and crue for floor slabs and topping.e. Special finishes for architectural concrete.f. Installation of embedded items furnished by others.
C. Miscellaneous concr€te work such as equipment bases, and splash pads.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Concrete Testing.
2. Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
3. Section 03560 - Cementitious Floor Patching.
I.O2 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURMSHED BY OTIIERS
A. Anchor Bolts, Weld Plates, and Bearing Plates and Angles Cast into Concrete:
Furnished under Section 05500 Metal Fabrications.
B. Railing Sleeves: Fumished under Section 05500 Metal Fabrications.
1.03 QUALITYASSURAI.TCE
A. Reference Standards: Perform all cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with
"Specifications for Stuctrual Concrete for buildings,u ACI 301, rtnlss5 amended or
superseded by requirements of this Section or General Notes on the structural
drawings. Copy of ACI 301 will be available for review at Architect's office during
bidding period. Keep copy of ACI 301 in Contractor's field office for duration of
proJect.
B. Design Criteria:
l. Concrete: See General Notes on Stuctural Drawings and ACI 301, Chapter 3.
2. Formwork Design: The General Contractor shall assrune all responsibility for
the safety of the formwork and shall provide all necessary design, construction,
materials and maintenance to produce the required concrete work safely.
r-7554.01 03300-1
D.
Testing Agency: All testing shall be done by an approved testing laboratory selected
and paid by the Owner. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work,
facilities, and incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the
Owner of an independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for performing all work in accordance with the contract requirements.
Source Quality Control: The Architect, Stuchrral Engineer and Testing Agency shall
be offered unintemrpted access to the ready-mix batching plant at all times that the
work is in progress.
Record of Work A record strall be kept by the General Contactor listing the time and
date ofplacement ofall concrete for the structure. Such record shall be kept until the
completion of the project and shall be available to the Architect and Structural
Engineer for examination at any time.
Approval: All fomrwork surfaces that will provide the finish surface of exposed
concrete must be approved by Architect before depositing concrete.
SUBMITTALS
Mix Designs:
L Submit substantiating data for each concrete mix desigr contemplated for use to
the Architect and Stuctural Engineer not less than two weeks prior to first
concrete placement. Data for each mix shall, as 6, minimum, include the
following:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
l
F.
1.04
A.
Mix identification designation (unique for each mix submitted).
Statement of intended use for mix.
Mix proportions, including all admixtures used.
Manufacturer's data and/or certifications veri$ing confomance of all mix
materials, including admixtures, with specified requirements.e. Wet and dry unit weight.f. Entrained air content.g. Design slump.h. Required average strength qualification data per ACI 301 3.9.1 and 3.9.2.
Submit separate qualification data for each production facility which will
supply concrete to the prcject.i. Average strength qualification data (tial mix data or field test data per ACI
301 3.9.3). When field test data is used to quatry average strength, submit
separate qualification data for each production facility which will supply
concrete to the project.j. Field test data submitted under h and i above shall include copies of the
Concrete Testing Agency's report from which the data was compiled.
2. Separate design mixes are required for each shengttr and class of concrete, each
change in type and/or quantity of mix materials including admixfi.ues, each
change in slump limits, and each change in entained air content.
B. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing specified under Section 01300.
Indicate bar sizes, spacing, locations, and quantities ofreinforcing steel and wire fabric,
bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. Indicate exact
locations of all openings, framing or special conditions affecting the work. Provide
l/4 in. scale elevations of all walls with reinforcing shown.
a,
b.
c.
d.
03300-2 t-7554.0r
l.
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
RAGE, AND HANDLING1.05 DELTVERY, STO
A. Concrete:
1.06
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Requirements :
Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete tansmitt€d in a truck mixer, agitator, or
other transportation device not later than l-ll2 hours, or 300 revolutions ofthe
drum after the mixing water has been added, whichever is earliest.
Extra Water: Deliver concrete to the job in exact quantities required by the
desigrr mix. Should exta water be required before depositing the concrete, the
Contactor's Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize the addition of
water. Any additional water added to the mix after leaving the batch plant shall
be indicated on the tuck ticket and signed by the person responsible. Where
extra water is added to the concrete, it shall be mixed thorougNy for 30
revolutions of the drum at mixing speed. Water may be added at the site only
once to each batch.
1.
B. Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Protect finished slabs from
mortar leakage from pouring of concrete above. Cover masoffy walls, glazing, and
other finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to
pouring ofconcrete.
Cold Weather Placemenil When depositing concrete after the first frost or when
the mean daily temperatures are below 40 degrees F., follow recommendations of
ACI 306. Maintain concrete temperature at a minimum of 55 degrees F. for
sections having a minimum dimension of 12 in., or 50 degrees F. for sections
having a minimum dimension of 12 in. or greater, for not less than 72 hours after
depositing. The concrete may not contain calcium chloride or admixtures
containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions or thiocyanates. The specified
non-chloride accelerator or high-early stength Type III cement may be used
when approved by the Structural Engineer. Do not place concrete without
approval of the Structural Engineer on days when temperature at 9:00 AM is
below 30 degrees F. Job cured cylinders for verification of strength and/or the
adequacy of the Contractor's protective methods may be required by the
Structural Engineer.
Hot Weather Placement: When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow
recommendations of ACI 305. The temperature of concrete at time of placernent
shall not exceed 90 degrees F. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing
and curing ari soon as possible. When the air temperature is expected to exceed
90 degrees F., the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Stuctural Engineer
of the procedures to be used in protecting, depositing, finishing, and cruing the
concrete. The specified water reducing retarding admixture may be used upon
approval ofthe Structural Engineer. The use ofcontinuous wetting or fog sprays
may be required by the Structural Engineer for 24 hours after depositing or the
work may be restricted to evenings or nights, especially in times of low humidity.
t-7554.01 03300-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI GENERAL
A. All materials in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as listed, unless amended or
superseded by requirements of following articles or General Notes on the stnrctural
drawings.
2.02 CEMENTITTOUS MATERIALS (ACI30l 2.1)
A. General: Unless otherwise specifie4 us€ one brand and type of cement throughout the
project.
B. Portland Cemenil ASTM C 150 Type L
C. FlyAsh: ASTMC618ClassForC.
2.03 ADMTXTURES (ACI 30r 2.2)
A. General: Unless specified, no admixtures may be used without specific approval of the
Architect and Structural Engineer.
B. Air Entraining Agent Conform to ASTM C 260. Add air entaining agent when
required as indicted in ACI 301 3.4.1. and as required herein.
C. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C 494, Type A: Euclid Chemical
Company Eucon WR-75; Master Builders Pozzolith l22I#; Protex PDA; or
equivalent. The admixture shall not contain more chloride ions than are present in
municipal drinking water.
D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): Confomr to ASTM C 494,
Type F or G: Euclid Chemical Company Eucon 37; Sika Chemical Corporation
Sikament; or equivalent. The admixture shall not contain more chloride ions than are
present in municipal drinking water.
E. Non-Chloride Accelerator: Conform to ASTM C 494, Type C or E: Euclid Chemical
Company, Accelgnard 80; W.R Grace & Co. Darex Set Accelerator; or equivalent.
The admixture shall not contain more chloride ions than arc present in muicipal
drinking water. The admixture shall have. long tep test data proving
non-corrosive effect on reinforcing steel using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test
method.
F. Calcitrm Chloride: Calcium chloride or admixtnres containing more than 0.05 percent
chloride ions or thiocyanates are Dotr-pelmitted.
G. Certification: Written conformance to above mentioned requirements and the chloride
ion content of the admixture will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to
mix design review by the Stmctural Engineer.
2.04 AGGREGATES (ACI 30r 2.4)
A. Continuously obtain each type aggregate from same source tbroughout the project.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
l033004r-75s4.0r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
STRENGTH (ACr 301 2.3)2.05
A. See General Notes on structural drawings.
2.06 DURABTLTTY (ACr 301 3.4)
A. Concrete exposed to weather such as paving, site work, loading docks, and exterior
slabs shall meet the requirements of ACI 301 3.4.1. All concrete subject to d9-i9ers
shall meet the requirements of ACI30l 3.4.3 except that lightweight concrete shall be
proportioned for a compressive stength ofat least 5000 psi.
2.07 SLUMP (ACr 30l 3.5)
A. Concrete with HRWR Admixture (Superplasticizer): 8 inches maximum less otherwise
directed by Structural Engineer.
B. All Other Structural concrete: 4 inches maximum.
2.08 ADMTXTURES (ACr 30l 3.7)
A. All concrete required to be air entrained shall contain an approved air entraining
admixtrue. All concrete shall contain the specified water reducing admixture and/or
high range water reducing admixmre (Superplasticizer). All concrete slabs placed at air
temperatures below 50 degrees F. shall contain the specified non-corrosive accelerator.
2.09 SELECTION OF PROPORTIONS (ACI 301 3.8, 3.9 A]\rD 3.1l)
A. Mix Design: Cost of concrete mix design by Contractor.
B. Selection of Proportions: Use method of ACI 301 3.9. Proportioning based on method
of ACI301 3.10 not allowed.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
l. Field test records used for documentation ofthe average strength produced by a
proposed mix in accordance with ACI 301 3.9.3.2 shall, in addition to the
requirements there listed, comply with the following:
a. The test record shall represent production concrete from a single design
mix, produced during the past year, and may be composed of 30 or more
consecutlve tests.b. The test record shall represent concrete made witJr identical materials and
proportions (including admixtures) to the proposed mix.c. The test record shall represent concrete proportioned to produce the
ma:rimum slump allowed by these specifications, and for air entained
concrete, within plus or minus 0.5 percent of the maximum air content
allowed.
2. Mixes proportioned on the basis of trial mixtures shall meet the provisions of
ACI30l 3.9.3.3.
3. Fly ash" in proportions not greater than 25 percent by weight of the total amount
of cementitious materials, may be used when accepted by the Structwal
Engineer. Cement content and/or water-cement ratio for mixes containing fly ash
shall be based on the total weight of cementitious materials (Portland Cement
plus fly ash).
l-7s54.01 03300-5
l
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
C.
D.
F.
4. Punped light\ileight concrete mixes sball contain fly ash in proportions of not
less than 8 percent nor gleater ttran 20 percent by weight ofthe total anrount of
cementitious materials and the specified air entaining agent in quantities
sufficient for 5 percent to 8 percent total air content by volume. Such mixes may
contain the specified water reducing admi:rture and/or approved pumping aids.
Minimum Cement Content Concrete for slabs-on-grade shall contain a minimum of
520 lbs. of cement per cubic yard of concrete. Concrete for city sidewalks shall contain
a minimum of 560 lbs. of cement per cubic yard. All other stuctural concrete shall
contain a minimum of 470 lbs. per cubic yard.
Mix Type A:
L Location:
2. CementType:
3. lvla<. Aggregate Size:
4. AirEnFainment:
5. Slump:
6. CompressiveStenglh:
Mix Type B:
l. Location:
2. Cementtype:
3. Ma;c Aggregate Size:
4. Air Entrainment:
5. Slump:
6. CompressiveStrength:
Mix Type E:
1. Location:
2. Cement type:
3. Ma"x. Aggregate Size:
4. Air Entainment:
5. Slump:
6. Compessive Stength:
7. Mu< WC Ratio:
Footings and Grade Beams
Type I
3i4 inch
4percentplus I percent
4 inchmaximum
3,000 psi
Interior Slabs on Grade
Type I
3/4 inch
6 percent plus I percent
4 inchma:rimum
3,500 psi
Exterior Slabs on Grade
Type I
3/4 inch
6 percent plus I percent
4 inchmaximum
4,000 psi
0.45
03300-6 t-7554.0r
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
TEEL2.IO REINFORCING S
A. See General Notes on the structural drawings for types, grades or yield strengths. Use
60,000 psi yield strength if not otherwise specified. Conform to ASTM A 615 plus
(SI), Deformed Billet Steel Bars or ASTM A 706, Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars
unless indicated otherwise. Epoxy coated reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A775.
All reinforcing bars in topping slabs over precast, including dowel bars, shall be epoxy
coated. Finish: Plain.
2.1r WELDED WIRE FABRIC (ACI 301 5.2.s)
A. Mesh size and gage as indicated on the drawing. Confomr to ASTM A 185, in flat
sheets. Finish: Plain
2.12 E)cAI'rSrON JOINTS (ACI30l 6.2)
A. FiberExpansion Joint: l/2 inchthickness. Conformto ASTM D 1751.
2.13 ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Form Tape: Bear No. 536 vinyl foam or equivalent.
B. Cone Ties: 11116 inch diameter, I inch depttu plastic cone with suitable snap tie.
Provide flush plugs, color as selected.
C. Chamfer Strips: 3/4 inch 45 degree job cut wood, 3/4 inch 45 degree PVC, l/2 inch
diameter PVC , and 3/4 inch diameter PVC.
2.14 EPOXY ADHESIVES
A. With prior approval of the Architect and Structural Engineer as to methods and
procedures, make stuctural repairs with Euclid Chemical Company Euco Epoxy 456,
460,463, or Sika Chemical Corporation Culma Dur Mortar, Sikadur Hi-Mod L.V., or
Sikadur Hi-Mod. Where epoxy injection procedures are used, an approved low
viscosity epoxy, made by the previously specified manufacturers, shall be used.
2.15
A.
BONDING COMPOI.IND FOR RESURFACING OR REPAIR
Euclid Chemical Company Euco Weld; Larsen Products Weldcrete; Sika Chemical
Corp. Sikabond, or equivalent.
2.16 CURINGCOMPOUND(ACr 301 r2.2.r.7)
A. Interior Slabs With Resilient Flooring or Carpet or Left Exposed: "Super Rez" or
"Super Pliocrue" by the Euclid Chemical Company, or "Master Kure" by Master
Builders. The compound shall conform to Federal Specification TT-C-800A, 30
percent solids content minimum, and have test data from an independent laboratory
indicating a maximun moisture loss of 0.030 grams per sq. cm. when applied at a
coverage rate of 300 sq. ft. per gallon. Manufacturer's certification required.
B. All Other Interior slabs: Dissipating resin type, "Kurez DR" by the Euclid Chemical
Company, or equivalent.
C. Exterior Slabs, Sidewalks and Curbs: Clear styrene butadiene curing and sealing
compound.
l-7554.01 03300-7
o l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
PART3 -E)GCUTION
3.01 GENEML
A. Install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as liste4 unless
amended or superseded by following articles or notes on the structural drawings.
B. Use ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C 94; no job mixed concrete allowed.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. All foundation bearing surfaces shall be insp€cted and approved by the Soils Engineer
prior to start of formwork. All formwork surfaces that wiU provide the finish surface of
exposed concrcte must be approved by the fuchitect before depositing concrete.
Completed installation of concrete reinforcement must be approved by the Structural
Engineer/Testing Agency before depositing concrete.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Underslab surfaces shall be fine graded to smooth, level surface prior to installation of
slab forrns.
3.04 FORMWORK(ACI 301, CHAPTER4)
A. Earth Cuts (ACI 301 4.1.3): Earth cuts may not be used as forms.
B. Anchors, Inserts, Blockouts, and Built-In ltems: Anchor bolts, inserts, fomr blockouts,
and other items built into the concrete shall be securely fastened to formwork or held in
place with templates. Insertion into concrete after pouring wilt not be allowed.
3.05 FORM REMOVAL (ACI 301 4.5)
A. Form Facing Material Removal: Fomr facing material which is removable without
disturbing shores may be removed when concrete is at least seven (7) days old. Facing
may be removed earlier if specifically pennitted by the ArchitecVStnrctural Engineer
and acceptable curing compound is applied to all fomred surfaces immediately after
form removal.
3.06 FORM REUSE
A. Clean all form material suitable for reuse before erection. No form material will be
acceptable for reuse if, in the opinion of the Architect, it will not produce a finished
surface required by these Specifications or called for on the drawings.
3.07 WELDINGRETNFORCEMENT(ACI 301 5.3)
A. Welding reinforcing bars not permitted except where specifically indicated. Protect
exposed bars intended for bonding with future construction from corrosion by
providing adequate covering. Use reinforcing conforming to ASTM 706 where
welding of reinforcing is required rurless otherwise specified on the drawings.
3.08 FIELD BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as shown
on the drawings or specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer.
03300-8 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
PLACTNG (ACr 30l 5.5.3)3.9
A. On vertical formwork, use approved bar chairs or spacers as required to maintain
proper concrete cover and bar position.
B. Free fall shall not exceed eight (8) feet in walls and columns, or five (5) feet in other
elements.
C. Guide the flow of concrete in walls and columns for vertical drop between the
reinforcing with a spout down pipe, elephant tuck, or other appropriate method.
3.10 coNsTRUcTroN JorNTs oF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS (ACI30l 6.1)
A. Waterstop: Install continuous waterstops between wall pours whenever exterior grade
is above interior floor level.
3.1l REPATR OF ST.JRTACE DEFECTS (ACI 301 CHAPTER 9)
A. Allow Architect and Structural Engineer to observe concrete surfaces immediately
upon removal of forms.
B. Modi$ or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details, and elevations.
C. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing
and other defects. Patch, repair, or replace exposed architectural finished concrete as
directed by the Architect.
D. Patching of tie holes is required.
E. Repair defects in structural concrete elements as follows:
l. Deep Defects Exposing Reinforcing: Chip to sound concrete and clean
thoroughly to remove all loose concrete and dust. Apply thin coat of specified
epoxy adhesive. Fomr and pour, or dry pack with specified non-metallic, non-
shrink grout, prior to development of tack-free condition of epoxy bonder. Stip
fomrs after grout has bardened and provide specified finish. Moist cure or apply
specified clear curing and sealing compound immediately after finishing.
2. Defects Greater Thanl/2lnch Depth Not Exposing Reinforcing: Chip, clean and
apply specified epoxy adhesive. Dry pack using specified non-metallic, non-
shrink grout prior to development of tack-free condition of epoxy bonder.
Provide specified finish and cure per 3.13.E.1.
3. Defects Less Than ll2lnchDepth and Tie Holes:
a. For concrele having a specified compressive stength of 5,000 psi or less:
chip and clean per 3.13.E.1. Dry pack, finish, and cure per 3.13.E.1.
4. Other equivalent repair procedures may be used subject to review and acceptance
by the Architect and Structural Engineer.
3.12 FORMED SURFACE FINIST{ES (ACI30l, CHAPTER l0)
A. Formed surface finishes per ACI 301 10.4,
t-'7554.01 03300-9
B. Shingles resulting from stop/start of slip-form operation shall be removed to achieve
finishes as specified above.
3.13 SCREEDS (ACI 301 l1.3)
A. Continuous intermediate screed strips set prior to concrete placement are required. For
slabs cast over metal declg place screeds along beam lines. Set screeds and adjust as
necessary to achieve proper slab elevation and thickness.
3.r4 JOTNTING SLABS-ON-GRADE (ACI 301 ll.5)
A. ConsEnction Joints: Form joints as shown on the drawings.
B. Control Joints: Constnrct joints by saw cutting or with specified slab joint form. Make
saw cuts as soon as possible afrer placing concr€te without dislodging aggregate to a
depth of l/4 ofthe slab thickness.
C. Slip Joints: Separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces with non-compressible
bond breaker joint material unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
D. Interior Slabs to Receive Floor Covering: Constnrct slabs in as large a placement area
as practicable. Locate constuction joints on column center lines. Provide control
joints at column center lines and at intervals not mor€ than 30 feet each way.
E. Exposed Interior Slabs: Locate constnrction join* on column lines. Provide contol
joints at column center lines and at intervals not more ttnn 15 feet each way.
3.1s SLAB FTNTSHES (ACI30l ll.8)
A. Floor finishes per ACI 301 I1.8.
3.16 SLAB FTNTSHINGTOLERANCES (ACI 301 ll.9)
A. Slope to Drain: l/4 inch per foot.
B. Trowel Finish: Formed slabs Class AX - 3116 inches in l0 feet. Slabs on metal deck
Class BX - 5/16 inches in l0 feet.
C. Floated Finish: Class BX - 5/16 inches in l0 feet.
D. Scratched Finish: Class CX - 5/16 inches in 2 feet.
3.r7 CURTNG (ACr 301 12.1)
A. General: Apply specified curing compounds immediately after final finishing of slabs.
Apply in quantities recommended by the manufacturer. See Section 2.24 for usage.
B. Slabs to Receive Hardener: Use materials and methods recommended bv
manufacturer.
3.18 FLOOR SEALER
A. Apply a second coat of the specified curing and sealing compound. Apply to finish
concrete floors as indicated on room finish schedule just prior to completion of
construction. Coat surfaces uniformly, leaving no pin- holes or gaps, and at rate not
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
T
03300-10 l-75s4.01
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
o
leave surface clean withoutexceeding 500 sq. ft. per gallon. Upon completion,
discoloration or traces ofexcess sealer.
3.19 FrELD QUALITY CONTROL (ACI301, CTTAPTER 16).
A. Delete. See Section 01400 for testing procedures and requirements.
3.20 EVALUATION AI{D ACCEPTA}{CE CRITERIA (ACI3OI CHAPTER 17 AND 18)
A. Basis of evaluation and acceptance of work under this section shall be in accordance
with the provisions of these chapten.
3..2r MTSCELLANEOUS CONCRETEREQUIREMENTS
A. All other concrete work indicated on the drawings shall be provided and installed, even
though not specifically mentioned herein, to complete the worh including the
following:
B. Anchors: Install anchors fumished under Section 05500 in accordance with shop
drawings for structural or miscellaneous steel.
C. Equipment Bases: lnstall concrete bases for all pumps, boilers, tanks, fans
transformers, floor mounted electical equipment, etc., including anchor bolts and
inserts in accordance with setting diagrams frrmished by the contactor responsible for
installing the equipment. Finish all bases in a workmanlike manner with a toweled
finish. The bases shall be located and sizes deterrrined by the Contractor fumishing
the equipment.
D. Splash Blocks: Install 12 inches by 36 inches precast concrete splash blocks under all
downspouts or roofdrain leaders emptying onto unpaved areas.
E. Light Pole Bases: Form, r€inforce, and pour light pole bases as indicated on electrical
driwings. Coordinate- installati6n of condiit 'and anchor bolts with electrical
contractor.
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01 03300-11
I
I SECTION 03560
CEMENTITIOUS F"LOOR PATCHINGI
' PARTI-GENERAL
I l.ol sTJMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I
I
I
I
I
T
l. Cementitiousfloorunderlavment.
2. Sealant.
3. Preparation.
4. Application.
B. Related Work:
l. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching.
2. Section 09660 - Resilient Tile Flooring.
3. Section 09665 - Resilient Sheet Flooring.
4. Section 09680 - Carpet.
t.02 QUALIFICATIONS
I A. Installation shall be by an approved applicator using approved equipment.
I 1.03 DELTVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLTNG
t A. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and protected from
exDosure to the elements.
I B. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises.
I PARr2-PRoDUcrs
2.OI CEMENTITIOUS PATCHINGSYSTEMS
I A. EUCO Thin Coat, polymer modified patch kit manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co.
I l. Distributed by:
a. Smalley and Company (777-3435).b. Rio Grande Company (875-2211).
I B. Approved substitutions:
I
I
r-7ss4.0r
1. Tamms Thin Patch.
03560-l
o
Grande "Vinyl
I
I
I
I
t
I
2. Rio Patchn.
3. Tamms Floorstone Supreme.
2.02 JOINT SEALER
A. Dow Corning 888 SL (self leveling) one component silicone sealant.
B. Approvedsubstitution.
l. Tremco Spectem 2.
2. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL l.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Clean substate to r€move all dirt, debris, oil, grease or other contaminants.
3.02 JOINTSEALERAPPLICATION
A. Insert back-up material in floor slab joints to an optimum depth recommended by the
sealant manufacturer to p€rmit proper sealant thickness in relation to joint widttr.
B. Apply sealant in joint and tool flush.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. After sealant cure, saturate substate in conformance with manufacture/s
recommendations.
B. Prime substate immediately after saturation pnocess.
C. Place topping by paving, pwnping or towel in a continuous sheam of material for
uniform, level surface.
D. Finish and cure in conformance with the manufactureds instnrctions.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
T
03560-2 t-7ss4.01
t
I
I PARrI-.ENERAL
I l.ol SUMMARY
sEcTroN 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
I
A. Section Includes:tt 1. Refer to schedule at end ofthis Section.
r- B. Related Sections:
' 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
I C. Work Furnished but not Installed:I l. Anchor Bolts and Weld Plates for Anchoring Metal Fabrications: Install under
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Railing Sleeves: Install under Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete
Paving.
- I.O2 REFERENCES
I A. Steel: Meet requirements of AISC "specifications for Architecturally ExposedI Structural Steel", latest edition and AISC "Specification for the Design, Detailing,
Fabrication and Erection ofStructural Steel for Buildings", latest edition.
I B. Welding: Meet requirements of AWS "Structural Welding Code", D1.1, latest edition.
- C. All railings, shall meet requirements of OSHA and UBC.
II I.O3 DEFINITIONS
I A. Metal Fabrications: Synonymous with miscellaneous metals.a B. Architectually Exposed Structural Steel: As used under this section, includes all metal
I fabrications exposed to view.
t' C. Structural Steel: Includes steel columns and beams.
I l.o4 suBMrrrAls
- A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 01300 for allI custbm fabricited items under this sectioi.I
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and
type offasteners and accessories.
2. Include erection drawings, elevations and details where applicable.
3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.
I
r-7ss4.0r
I
I
05500-l
4. Indicate
o
net weld lengths and sizes.
B. Coordinate between fabricator and installer before submission to Architect.
C. hoduct Data: Submit product data as specified under Section 01300 for all
manufacturefs stock items under this section.
1.05 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of miscellaneous steel.
B. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by certified welding op€rators
currently qualified according to AWS Dl.l.
C. Design Criteria: Stair steel handrails shall be capable of withstanding Code required
loads.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGEANDHANDLING
A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices
which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete construction to the project site in time to
be installed before the start ofcast-in-place concrete operations.
B, Provide setting drawings, ternplates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts
and other similar devices.
C. Storage of Materials: Metals which are stored at the project site shall be above ground
on platfomrs, skids, or other supports. Protect steel from conosion. Store other
materials in a weather-tight and dry place until ready for use.
D. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container.
I.O7 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld
spatter or sparks during field welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Shapes, Bars, and Plates: ASTM A 36.
B. Steel Sheets: ASTM A 506.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A l2O,use standardmalleable iron fittings.
D. Tube: Meet requirements of ASTM A 500, Grade B, latest edition.
E. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307 except steel to steel connections shall be ASTM A325,
expansion bolts by approved manufacturer.
F. Welding Electrodes: Conform to AWS Dl.1, 70 Series.
G. Paint: Tnemec Series l0 metal primer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
t05500-2 l-7554.01
to
I
H. Grout: Non-shrink, stiffand sand-cement mixture.
r I. Setting compound: Porok or sulphur.
I 2.02 FABRrcArroN
A. General: Fabricate in accordance with details and reviewed shop drawings, all
I miscellaneous items of metal work indicated or as necessary to complete the work.
I Veriff dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication
I 1. All materials shall be new stock of types and sizes indicated.
t 2. Make all cuts clean and sharp with wire edges ground smooth. On completion,
the work shall be struight rigid and tight, and free from defects ofany nature.
I 3. Close exposed ends of steel pipe or tubing with welded caps.
I 4. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.
'! 5. Fit and shop assemble, in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
| 6. Exposed mechanical fastenings shall be flush, countersunk screrils or bolts,J un6btnrsively located, consiitent with design of structure, except where
I 7. ffiH:il-:ffi'l*-*", hairrine joints where mechanically rastened.
I 8. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications.I htif*:rsxr:,m*",':':$:mi"*6eff[r-e tuateriar and rinish as metar
I B. Welding: Comply with latest American Welding Society standards. Miter and coper inbnections and weld all around. Remove spatter, grind exposed welds to blend, and
contour surfaces to match those adjacent.
I C. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights called for are not available, secure
acceptance of the Architect and Stuctural Engineer for suitable sizes prior to
1| proceeding.
T 2.03 TUBULAR STEEL RAILINGS
I A. Tubular steel railings, shall be fabricate from round steel tubes with steel balusters inIt sizes and locations as detailed.
I l. ::**f 40 or 80 steel tubes as required by loading conditions at locations as
I B. Fabricate to designs indicated on Drawings, all welded constructioq welds ground
I flush and smooth. Close exposed ends.
r C. Railings: Where balusters are set in concrete, provide pipe sleeves 6 inches long and
I l/4 inch clear ofbalusters; set balusters in sleeves, pack with Porok or hot sulphur.
I!
I
l-7s54.01 05500-3
o
G
I
I
I
2.04 SHOP PAINTIN
A. Clean fenous metal of scale, rusl oil, moisture, and dirt in conformance with SSPC
SP-2 or SSPC SP-3 before applying paint.
B. Apply one shop coat of primer to ferrous metal surfaces exc€pt galvanized surfaces,
machined surfaces, surfaces adjacent to field welds, and surfaces to be encased in
concrete. Apply two shop coats to ferrous metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after
erection.
C. Provide smooth and even finish shop coats.
D. Where field painting is require4 apply final shop coat suitable for application of finish
paint.
E. Painting specified here does not comt as a coat for finish painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.OI FABRICATIONANDERECTION
A. Fabricate supplementary parts necessary to complete each item, through work is not
definitely shown or specified.
B. Furnish to appropriate trades all anchors, sockets or fastenings required for securing
work to other construction.
C. Veriff all dimensions and take all measurements necessary at the site before fabrication
of the various items to ensure fit in the construction.
D. Form materials to shapes indicated with sfiaight lines, sharp angles, and smooth curves.
Drill or punch holes with smooth edges.
E. Weld permanent shop connections. Continuously weld and grind smooth welds that
will be exposed. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Punch or drill for temporary
field connections and for attachment of work by other trades.
F. Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as is practicable.
G. Welding shall conform to the requirements for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of the
Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding of the American Welding Society.
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
3.O2
A.
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
l
B.
C.
INSTALLATION
Set metal work level, tnre to a line, plumb, or as indicated. Shim bearing plates with
metal, and grout solid with non-shrink grout.
Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC.
Weld field connections and grind smooth" where practicable. Conceal fastenings where
practicable.
D. Secure metal to masonry with embedded anchors, setting compound, lead calking and
sleeves, or cement-sand grouting. Expansion bolts and screws permitted for light duty
services only.
05500-4 1-7554.01
Iro
I E. Metal work, in place, shall be approved before being covered.
I 3.03 ScHEDULE
I A. This Section includes, but is not specifically limited to metal fabrications andI components listed in the following schedule:
I
1. Refer to tlie Drawings for items not specifically scheduled.
2. Provide anchorage and attachments required for installation.
I B. Stnrctrual steel beams and tube columns.
_ C. Fabricated steel brackets for mill work, lavatories and fixed equipment.
I D. Support angles and embed plates for fixed equipment.
I E. Steel support and b,racing angles as indicated.
'' F. Handrails.
I G. All other miscellaneous anchons, sleeves, bolts, brackets, clips, inserts, tubing, bar
' stock, plates and other items not distinctly specified under other sections, but necessary
to complete each item through such work may not be shown or specified.
I END oF sECrroN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t-7ss4,0r 05500-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
tt
I
I
I
sEcrroN 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART I - GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. Section lncludes:
l. Types of work in this Section include rough carpentry for:
a. Wood framing.
b. Framing with engineered wood products.
c. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking and sleepers.d. Panel sheathing.e. Fasteners and connectors required for the Work.
B. Related Work:
l. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.
I.O2 DEFINITION
A. Rough carpentry includes caryentry work not specified as part of other sections and
which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data for rough carpentry wood treatment in accordance
with Section 01300.
B. Wood teatnent data from chemical teafiient manufacturer. lnclude chemical
treatment manufacture/s instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing
treated material.
l. Presenvation Treatnent: Include certification by teatment plant stating type of
solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservation retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
2. Waterborne Preservative Treatnent lnclude certification that moisture content
of treated wood was reduced to levels specified prior to shipment to Project site.
3. Fire-Retardant Treatrnent: Include certification by treating plant that treated
wood complies with specified requirements.
4. Warranty: Include walranty of chemical heatment manufacturer for each type of
treatment.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Standards: Comply wittr PS20 and with applicable rules of the respective
grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated including moisture
l-7554.01 06100-l
o
actual sizes related to the indicated except as otherwise
o
asminel gizeg,
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
content and
indicated.
1.05
A.
Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PS I or, for products not manufactured
under PS I provisions, with applicable APA PRP-108 Performance Standard for q/pe
of panel indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AI.ID HANDLING
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. hotect against exposure to
weather and contact with d"mF or wet surfaces. Stack h:mber and plywood above
grotrnd level with miformly spaced supports to prevent deformatiorl and provide air
circulation within stacks.
I.06 PROJECT CONDITION
A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for
accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar
supports to allow proper attachment of other Work.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI.IFACTTIRERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
l. Wood-Preseruative-TreatedMaterials:
a. Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co.
b. ChemicalSpecialties,Inc.
c. Continental Wood Preservers. Inc.
d. Hickson Corp.
e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
f. Osmose Wood Preserving, lnc.
2. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, lnterior Type A:
a. Hickson Corp. "Dricon".
b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. "$ro-Guard".c. Osmose Wood Preserving, lnc. "Flame Proof LHC-HTT".
3. Laminated-VeneerLumber:
a. Boise Cascade Corp.
b. Trus Joist MacMillan.
c. Willamette Industries, Inc.
4. Parallel-StrandLumber:
B.
06100-2
a. Trus Joist MacMillan.
l-7554.01
).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
Prefabricated Wood I-Joists:
a- Boise Cascade Corp.
b. Trus Joist MacMillan.
c. Willamette Industries, Inc.
6. Air-InfiltrationBarriers:
a Amoco Foam Products Co.
b. Anthony Industries, Inc.; Simplex Products Division.
c. Celotex Corporation (The); Building Products Division.
d. DuPont Company; Fibers Departnent.
e. Raven Industries, Inc.
f. Sto-Cote Products, Inc.
7. Metal Framing Anchors:
a- Silver Metal Products, Inc.
b. Simpson Stong-Tie Company,Inc.
, 2.02 MATERIALS
t A. Lumber, General: Nominal sizes are indicated except as shown by detail dimensions.
Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
I
I l. Provide dressed lumber, SD4S, unless otherwise indicated.
.- 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of
t dressing.
B. Framing Lumber (2 inches through 4 inches thick): For light framing (less than 6
I inches wide) provide the following grade and species:t l. 'T.{o. 2 or Better" grade.
2. Douglas Fir.I
r C. For structural framing (6 inches and wider and from 2 inches to 4 inches thick), provide
I the following grade and species:
l. "No. 2 or Better" grade.
t z. Douglas Fir.
I D. Boards (less than 2 inches thick).
I L Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide
I i"",ilffJrf"$::"tri#ffif* "s-Dry" moisture content or "KD-le" and the
L Southem Pine "No. I Boards".
I
b. Any species graded "No. 2 Common Boards and Better" per WWPA nrles.
I r7ss4.ol 06100-3
Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide
boards of 19 percent maximum moisture cont€nt (S-Dry or KD-19) and of the
following species and grade:
Redwood "Constuction Common" (RIS).
Southern Pine 'No. 2 Boards" (SPIB).
Miscellaneous Lumber: hovide wood for support or attachment of other work
including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar
members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as
follows:
1. Moisture Content: 15 percent modmum for lumber items not specified to
receive wood preservative teahent.
2. Grade: "No. 2 or Befter" grade light framing size lumber of any species listed by
PS 20 for size lumber as required. Provide "Constnrction", grade boards (RIS or
WCLIB) or "No. 2' boards (SPIB or WWPA).
Plywood:
l. Trademark ldentiff each plywood panel with appropriate APA trademark.
2. Concealed Performance-Rated Plywood: Where plywood will be used for
concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance-Rated Panels
complying with requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating,
exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable) and thickness.
3. Plywood Wall Sheathing: APA rated sheathing. Exposure Durability
Classification: Exterior.
4. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, APA
C-D gnde designation, plugged in with exterior glue and fire-retardant treated, in
thickness indicated, or, if not othenvise indicated, not less than l/2 inch.
ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
General: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
evidence compliance with building code in effect for Project.
L Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable
design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those
indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical
data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive
testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Lumber manufactured by laminating wood veneers in a
continuous press using an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 to
Any species gaded "Construction Boards" or "No. 3 Common" (WCLIB
oTWWPA).
a.
b.
c.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
2.03
A.
B.
06100-4 l-75s4.01
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
o
engths
c.
produce members with gtain of veneers parallel to their I and complying with the
following requirements :
L Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending: 2800 psi for l2-inch nominal- depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity: 2,000,000 psi.
3. Tension Parallel to Grain: 1850 psi.
4. Compression Parallel to Grain: 2800 psi.
5. Compression Perpendicular to Grain: 400 psi perpendicular to and 500 psi and
parallel to glue line.
6. Horizontal Shear: 285 psi perpendicular to and 190 psi parallel to glue line.
Parallel-Strand Lumber: Lumber manufactured by laying up wood strands using an
exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTMD2559, and cured under pressure to
produce members with grain of strands parallel to their lengths and complying with the
following requirements :
L Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending: 2800 psi for l2-inch nominal-depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity: 2,000,000 psi.
3. Tension Parallel to Grain: 1850 psi.
4. Compression Parallel to Grain: 2800 psi.
5. Compression Perpendicular to Grain: 400 psi perpendicular to and 500 psi and
parallel to wide face of shands.
6. Horizontal Shear: 190 psi perpendicular to and 285 psi and parallel to wide face
ofstands.
Prefabricated Wood I-Joists: Units manufactured by bonding stress-graded lumber
flanges to wood-based structural-use panel webs with exterior-type adhesives
complying with ASTMD2559, to produce I-shaped joists complying with the
following requirements :
1. Flange Material: Any material standard with joist manufacturer.
2. Web Material: Oriented-strand board (OSB) complying with DOC PS 2 or
plywood complying with DOC PS 2, as standard with joist manufachuer.
3. Structural Capacities: Establish and monitor structural capacities according to
ASTM D 5055.
D,
t-7554.01 06100-s
o
Depths
width.
o
flanges not
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
4. Sizes:
actual
and widths as indicated, with less than 1-ll2 inches in
2.04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. PreservativeTreatnent:
l. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Treated", or is specified to be treated,
comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards.
2. Mark each teated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements.
3. Wood nailers for roofing shall be preservative teated to comply with roof
manufactruey's standards for Wolmanized or equal teatnent.
4. Creosote and asphaltic preservatives are not acceptable.
5. Pressue-teated Above-ground ltems: Water-bome preservatives complying
with AWPA C2 fot lumber and C22 for plywood. After treatment, air dry or
kiln-dry to a maximum moisttne content of 15 percent. Treat indicated items and
the following:
a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barien and waterproofing.b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stipping and similar concealed
mernbers in contact with masonry or concrete.c. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
6. Complete fabrication of teated items prior to treatnent, where possible. If cut
after teatnent, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used
for treatnent. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard
damaged or defective pieces.
B. Fire-RetardantTreatnent:
l. Where fire-retardant or "non-com" lumber is specified, required by code, or
otherwise indicate4 comply with the AWPA C20 for lumber and C27 for
plywood standards for pressue impregration with fire-retardant chemicals to
achieve a flame-spread rating of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with
UL Test 723 or ASTM E 84.
a. Provide UL label on each piece of fue-retardant lumber.b. Air dry or Kiln-dry treated items to a maximum moisture content of 15
percent.
2. Use chemical fomrulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the
following properties under conditions present after installation:
a. Bending strength, stifftress, and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced
below values published by manufactruer of chemical formulation under
elevated temperature and hunidity conditions simulating installed
conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency.
06100-6 r-7554.01
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes
related to teatment.
c. Contact with heated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2.05 AIR-INFILTRATIONBARRIER
A. Asphalt-satruated organic felt complying with ASTMD226, TypeI (No. 15 asphalt
felt), unperforated.
B. Contractor's Option: Air retarder complying with ASTM E 1677; made from
polyolefins; either cross-laminated films, woven stands, or spunbonded fibers; coated
or uncoated; with or without perforations to tansmit water vapor but not liquid water;
and as follows:
l. MinimumThickness: 3 mils.
2. Minimum Water-Vapor Transmission: l0 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96, Procedure A.
3. Ma:rimum Flame Spread: 25 per ASTM E 84.
4. Minimum Allowable Exposure Time: 3 months.
2.06 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
l. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of
high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per
ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Vy'ood Screws: ASME 818.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.07 METALFRAMINGANCHORS
A. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size
indicated and as follows:
l-7554.01 06100-7
1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code
research or evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for
application indicated with building code in effect for Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as
published by manufacnuer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653, G60 coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming
quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.
C. Joist Hangen: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-ll4-inch-wide
nailing flanges at least 85 percent ofjoist depth.
l. Thickness: 0.052 inch.
D. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangen, full depth of joisq formed from metal
strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.
1. Strap Width: l-l/2 inches.
2. Stap Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 0.052 inch.
E. Joist Ties: Flat staps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.
l. Width: 3/4 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.052 inch.
3. Length: 16 inches.
F. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane Ties): Bent strap tie fe1 f6sf6ning rafters or roof trusses
to wall studs below, l-5l8 inches wide by 0.052 inch thick.
G. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to formdation walls with
anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of 2
bolts placed 7 bolt diameters from reinforced base.
l. Bolt Diameter: 5/8 inch.
2. Width: 2-l/2rnches.
3. Body Thickness: 0.108 inch.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
T
I
I06100-8 t-7554.01
loo
I
4. Base Reinforcement Thickness: 0.180 inch.
H. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw ked 15ll6by 15/16 by
I 0.040 inch thick with hemmed edges.
I 2.08 MISCELLANEOUSMATERIALS
I A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation" fabricated in strip fomr, for use as
a sill sealer; l/4-inch nominal thickness, compressible to l/32 inch; selected from
I manufacturet's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
!
I PART3-E)GCUTTON
r 3.ol INSTALLATIoN
I A. Discard unie of material with defects which might impair quatrty of work, and unitsI which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint
alTangement.
I B. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and
true and accurately cut and fitted.
I C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as
' required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work
and fill holes.II D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
r a. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners.
b. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with
! AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction."
c. "Table 23-I-Q--Nailing Schedule" of the Uniform Building Code.
I E. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finisht work. Select fasteners of size that will not penehate members where opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight corurections between
I memSers. Install fasteners without splitting of wood. Pre-drill-as required.I F. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to
I weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity.
I G. Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated lumber unless acceptable to manufacturer after
I
treatnentofcuts.
H. Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking and Sleepers:
I l. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of othert work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required foi true line and level of
work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
t
t l-7s54.01 06100-9
I.
Attach to subshates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts
and nuts flush wittr surfaces, unless othenrrise shown. Build into masonry during
installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before
concrete placement.
3. Provide permanent gounds of dresse4 preservative teate4 key-beveled lumber
not less ttmn l-l/2 inches wide and of thickness requircd to bring face of ground
to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove ternporary grounds when
no longer required.
Wood Framing:
l. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacing shown, and frame openings as
shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House
Framing" of American Forest and Paper Association. Do not splice strrctural
members betrveen supports.
2. Firestop concealed spaces with wood blocking not less than 2 inches thich if not
blocked by other framing members. Provide blocking at each building story
level and at ends ofjoist spans.
Installation of Plywood:
l. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in form No. E304,
"APA Design/Constnrction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of
plywood products and applications indicated.
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
l. Sheathing: Screwto framing.
2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to suppods.
AIR-INTILTRATION BARRIER
Cover sheathing with air-infiltration barrier as follows:
l. Apply asphalt-saturated organic felt horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6 inch
end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
2. Apply air retarder to comply with manufacturer's writlen instructions.
3. Apply air-infiltration barrier to cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap.
END OF SECTION
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
J.
3.02
A.
06100-10 t-75s4.0r
I
I sncrroN 06200
FIMSHCARPENTRY
- PART I -GENERAL
t l.ol sUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
| 1' Ulfi:ilHi#,ilfl?1,ffifl,tri:tp: exposed wood members commonrv known as
I 2. Exterior wall siding.
3. Interior and exterior trim.
l| 4. Plastic Laminate.
I 5. Custom Casework.
t 6. Countertops including tops required for plastic laminate casework, but not
including tops required for custom casework,
- 7. Installation of wood doon and door hardware.
I B. Related work:
l. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; support brackets for vanities.
I 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
I 3. Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
l! 4. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
I r.o2 REFERENcES
A. Applicable Publications: The publications listed below form a part of the Specification
I h""rtili;;tjffP** The publications are referred to in the text by the basic
I l. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) 'Qualrty Standards".
r B. Quality Standards: For the following types of architectural woodwork, comply with
*L- indicated standards as applicable:It 1. Standing and Running Trim: AWI Section 300.
I
2. Architectural Cabinets: AWI Section 400.
3. Shelving: AWI Section 600.
I 4. Miscellaneous Work: AWI Section 700.
I r7ss4.or 06200-l
o
Installation of
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
t
I
t
I
I
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
1.05
A.
c.
D.
Woodwork AWI Section 1700.
6. Formaldehyde Emission Levels:
a. Particleboad: NPA 8 compliance.b. Medium Density Fiberboard; NPA 9 compliance.c. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE compliance.
SUBMITTALS
Submit manufacturey's shop drawings, product data and samples for finish carpentry
and millwork in accordance with Section 01300.
Shop Drawings: Showing location of each itenq dimensioned plans and elevations,
large scale details, attachment devices and other components including hardware
schedule(s). Submit Shop Drawings for all millwork items required. Key Shop
Drawings to drawing and section number as shown on the Drawings.
Product data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified,
including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual
components, profiles, textur€s, and colors.
Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in form of manufacturet's color
charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors,
textures, and pattems available for each type of material indicated.
l. Samples required include:
a- Wood veneers and solid wood.b. Plastic laminate.
Samples for verification purposes of the following:
l. Lumber and panel products for non-factory-applied finish, 50 square inches for
lumber and 8-l/2 inches by I I inches for panels for each species and cut, finished
one side and one edge, with one-halfofexposed surface finished.
2. Lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 square inches for
lumber and 8-l/2 inches by I I inches for panels for each finish system and color.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to
prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until wet work, grinding and similar
operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in
installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must
be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements
specified for installation areas.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and
Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for
06200-2 l-7554.01
I
- woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these
I conditions have 6een attainEd and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minusI 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of
construction period.
I B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other constructiorl
check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before
I manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
f Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
r l. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guaranteer *trffiH:,'#u."1lxfrlf. #H..Tmffi.""l,il:"#i'*#H:,fflt
correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
I I.06 WARRANTY
I A. Special Project l$/arranty for Siding: Submit a written wananty signed by
I manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or
workmanship within the specified waranty period. Failures include, but are not
I limited to, deformation or leterioration of siding beyond normal weathering. Thisr waranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may
I have against the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
I l. Warranty Period for Siding (Excluding Finish): 25 years after date of Substantial
Completion.
r PART2.PRODUCTS
I 2.or MANUFACTURERSt
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
I the following:I
l. Plywood Siding:
l| a. Abitibi-Price Corp.; Building Products Division.
b. Champion Intemational Corp.r i. lXT,l,l"J';",nccorp.e. K Ply Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
I A. Generat:I
l. Nominal sizes are indicate4 except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide
I dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actualI sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless
otherwise indicated.
I
t r7s54.or 06200-3
B. Panel Products:
l. Plywood Siding: Exterior-type, APA 303 series siding, in panel sizes indicated.
a. Thickness: l/2nch.
b. Type: 303-6-W, cedar faced, rough sawn, plain with no grooves.
2. Particle Board: 4S-lb-density panels for 3/4 inch and less, thicknesses complying
with ANSI A208.1 for Grade l-M-l except that minimums for modulus of
elasticity and screw-holding capacity on face and edge shall be 300,000 psi, 250
lb, and 225lb, respectively.
a. For zl4Jb-density panels for thicknesses of 13/16 inch to l-l/2 nch,
complying with Al.lSI A208.1 for Grade l-M-l except that minimums for
modulus of rupture, modulus of elasticity, intemal bond, linear expansion,
and screw-holding capacity on face and edge shall be 1300 psi, 250,000
psi, 60 psi, 0.50 percent, 250 lb, and 175 lb, respectively.
3. Plywood: APA, A-D Exposure I plywood, thickness(es) as shown.
a. Provide hardwood edges where shown.
4. Hardboard: PS 58, Class I (tempered), smooth one side or both sides where
indicated, l/8 inch thickness unless as otherwise indicated.
C. Exterior Millwork and Trim:
1. Lumber Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings complying with the
following requirements including those of the gading agency listed with species:
a. Species: Western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
b. Grade: A.
c. Texture: One face saw texfirred, the other surfaced (smooth).
d. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Solid lumber stock.
e. Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued-up lumber or solid lumber stock.
D. Interior Millwork and Trim:
l. Quality Standards: Comply with AWI 300, Custom Grade.
2. Wood Species: All interior wood species noted as "Wood Base", "Ha.rdwood" or
"Oak" shall be Red Oak, plain sawn.
Softwood Lumber and Trim: Any species listed in Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards, Custom Grade for painted finish for exterior and transparent
finish for interiors.
Exterior tim is to be solid or finger-joint primed Pine S4S No. I Grade. Back
prime facia boards.
Solid Stock Selected for color and grarning. Unless otherwise shown, provide
solid material of the same species as adjacent or abutting exposed, transparent
finished veneer.
4.
).
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
T
I
I
t06200-4 r-7554.0r
a.
b.
c.
d.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
o
Storage SheE. Closet and lving:
l. Shelving: APA B-D Exposure I plywood with solid wood front edge.
2. Shelving and Rod Supports: K & V No. ll95 supports with maximum spacing
of60 inches o.c. and K & V No. 660 rods.
F. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Provide plastic laminate surfaced countertops for
casework and vanities specified in this Section.
1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 "Architectural Cabinets" and
its Division 400C "Countertops."
2. Selection for Pricing Purposes: Manufactureds standard pattems, wood grains,
solid colon and finishes as selected by Architect.
3. Countertop Core Material: Particle boar4 thickness as noted.
a. For countedops within 5 feet ofsinks or other "wet" area sources, provide
"Exterior" grade plywood or phenolic resin particle board complying with
ASTM D 1037,
4. Countertops: Minimum 3/4 inchthick with l/2 rnch overhang. Finish top, front
and exposed sides with plastic laminate.
5. Backsplashes: Minimum 3/4 inch thick, finished with plastic laminate on front,
top and exposed side edges. Provide top scribe edges where required.
6. Plastic Laminate:
a. Square Edge Nosing: NEMA LD3, Grade GP50, General Purpose high-
pressure decorative plastic laminate.b. Backer Sheel NEMA LD3, Grade BK 20.
7. Nosing: Grade GP50 high-pressure decorative plastic laminate.
8. Aprons: Plastic laminate faced,3/4 inch thick plywood or solid wood, in depth
or profile shown on the Drawings.
G. Plastic Laminate: Provide plastic laminate manufactured by Formica Corporation,
Nevamar, Wilson Art.
l. Finishes:
Plastic Laminate for Horizontal Surfaces: NEMA LD3 Type GP 50, 0.050
inch thich General-Purpose Type (high pressure).
Plastic Laminate for Extemal Vertical Surfaces: NEMA LD3 Type GP 28,
0.028 inch thick, General-Purpose Type (tugh pressure).
Plastic Laminate for Cabinet Linings: NEMA LD3 Type CL 20,0.020
inch thick.
Plastic Laminate for Concealed Panel Backing: NEMA LD3 Type BK 20,
0.020 inch thich Backer-Type (high pressure).
t-75s4.0r 06200-5
o
AJ{D
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
2.03 ACCESSORIES
Anchor bolts. Steel, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers.
Bolts: Lag, Toggle and Miscellaneous Bolts, and Screws. Type, size and finish best
suited for the intended use.
Clip Angles: Steel, 3/16 inch thick, size best suited for intended usie; or zinc-coated
steel or iron commercial clips designed for connecting wood members.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without faihue, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in
concrete as determined by testing pcr ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
l. Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required.
Nails and Staples: Size and type best suited for the purpose, in accordance with Fed.
Spec. FF-N-105 when applicable to type used. In general, 8 penny or larger nails shall
be used for nailing through I inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2 inch thick lumber;
16 penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing through 2 inch thick lumber.
Screws: Select materid, ffpe, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS
FF-S-I I I for applicable requirements.
l. For metal framing and shelf supports, provide screws as recommended by metal
framing manufacturer.
2. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Stainless steel, noncorrosive aluminum
or hot-dip galvanized nails, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of l-l/2
inches into substate unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer.
a. Provide prefinished nails for face nailing of material to receive stain in
color to match where face nailing is unavoidable.b. Countersink nails and fill surface where face nailing is unavoidable.
3. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other
devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to
provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.
a. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is
unavoidable.b. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity,
provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating' complying with ASTM A 153.
Adhesives: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives.
A.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
06200-6 l-7554.01
too
I 2.04 MOTSTURE CONTENT
! A. At the time lumber and other materials are delivered and when installed in the Work
their moisture content shall be as follows:
I L Treated and unteated lumber 2 inches or less in thickness: 19 percent ma:<imum.
I 2.05 CUSTOMCASEWORKIA. Custom (Mill Built) Cabinebry: AWI "Premium" grade, Section 400 "Architectual
I Cabinets" and its Division 400A "Wood Cabinets (Transparent and Opaque Finish)"
I and Division 4008 "Laminate Clad Cabinets."
B. Wood veneered casework shall be surfaced with hardwood veneer on the exposedI surrbce.I l. Interior sides and doors ofhardwood veneer faced cabinets shall be faced with
I
plastic laminate balancing sheets, putty color, with matte finish.
2. Cabinet doors and drawer edges shall be edged with solid hardwood as detailed,
same species to match veneer.
t C. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Natural birch, plain sawn/sliced.
I l. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, andI fixedpanels.
I 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
I 3. VeneerMatchingWithinPanel Face: Runningmatch.
I D. Frarne cabinets and casework in a substantial manner with all necessary blocking,- braces, bottoms, etc. Cross supports under countertops shall be sufficiently heavy to
carry the weight of a man without sagging. Frame shall be pinned, glued, or screwed
I together in aciordance with AWI "Prefriul" Standards.
!E. Cabinet backs not exposed to view shall be hardboard.
I
I 2.06 CASEWORKHARDWARE
I A. Heavy duty, five knuckle 2-ll2 nch institutional type hinge. Mill ground, hospital tip,
I tight pin feature with all edges eased. Hinge to b€ full wrap around type of temperedr steel .093 inch thick. Each hinge to have minimum seven screws No. 8, 5/8 inch
F.H.S. M. to assure positive door action and alignment.
I l. Provide two hinges for doors up to 48 inches high and three hinges for doors over
48 inches high.
I B. Adjustable Shelf Standards (Premium Grade Cabinets): Knape & Vogt No. 255 with
No. 256 supports.
I C. Adjustable Shelf Supports (Custom Grade Cabinets): Drilled holes at l-ll4 inch o.c.;r dual pin, anti-tip clip supports rated at 300 lb/clip.
I
I :rzss4.ol 06200-7
D. Door and Drawer Pulls: Surface mounted solid metal wire type, 4 inches wide, US26D
or US32D finish.
E. Drawer Slides: Kaape & Vogt No. 5 I l.
F. Drawer and Door Locks: Half-mortise type, disc tumbler and cam bolt, round cylinder
only exposed, plated finish, with strike.
l. Provide National Lock "RemovaCore" with a minimum of 50 lock changes.
G. Grommets: l-l/4 inch dianeter, black plastic with grommet cap.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies
and manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry in
relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in
installation areas. Provide finish carpentry with moisture content that is compatible
with Project requirements.
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. Ease edges to
radius indicated for the following:
l. Lumber less than I inch in nominal thickness: l/16 inch.
2. Lumber I inch or more in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting worh examine and determine conditions of preceding work for
suitability and adequacy of perfomrance to ensure compliance with quality of
workmanship of this Section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detimental to application.
B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas before installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning
recommended by manufactr.uer.
C. Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with
requirements for surface preparation and application in Section "Painting".
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Closely fit and accurately set members to required lines and levels, and
rigidly secured in place. Where detailed nailing requirements are not specified, nail
size and nail spacing shall be sufftcient to develop as adequate strength for the
connection without spliuing the members.
I
I
T
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I06200-8 l-7554.01
B.
c.
D.
F.
G.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
3.04
A.
Do not use finish caryentry materials that are unsound, warye4 bowed, twisted,
improperly treated or finishe4 not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with
proper j ointing alrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
Provide blocking as necessary for the application of gypsum board and other materials
or building items. Cut blocking to fit between frarning members and rigidly nail.
Provide nailers and nailing strips as necessary for the attachment of finish materials.
Run strips in lengths as long as practicable, butt jointed, cut into wood framing
members when necessary, and rigidly secured in place.
Provide wood grounds as necessary for attachment of trim, finish, and other work. Run
grounds in lengths as long as practicable, buttjointed, and rigidly secured in place.
Install funing strips as required at 16 inches on center, run in lengths as long as
practicable, butjointed and rigidly secured in place.
Install trim with lengths as long as practicable and closely fitted joints. Blind nail to
the extent practicable; set and fill face nailing with non-staining putty to match finish.
Use screws for fastening to metal; set and fill same as for nails. Stagger and conceal
joints. Cope returns and interior angles and miter at exterior corners. Use scarfjoints
for end-to-end joints. Shoulder flat work to reduce warping.
l. Match color and $ain pattern across joints.
2. Install tim after drywall joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood prior to nailing or fastening to prevent splitting.
Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink nail heads on exposed
carpentry work and fill holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side
exposed to weather.
SIDING INSTALLATION
Plywood Siding: Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Nail at 6-inch
intervals at panel perimeter and l2-inch intervals at intermediate supports, unless
manufacturer recommends other intervals. Leave l/16-inch gap between adjacent
panels, unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. Leave l/8-inch gap at
perimeter and openings, unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.
l. Seal buttjoints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
2. Install continuous metal flashing at horizontal panel joints with l/8-inch
expansion gap.
3. Apply battens and comer trim as indicated.
l-7554.01 06200-9
B.
4. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent by counteninking and filling, by
placing in grooves of siding pattern, or by concealing with applied tim or battens
as detailed. Do not nail through overlapping pieces.
Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on the Drawings and as recommended by
siding manufacturer.
Finish: Apply finish within 2 weeks of installation.
Install siding to comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements.
WOOD DOORINSTALLATION
Install wood doors in accordance with Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
APPLICATION OF HARDWARE
Install door hardware in accordance with Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
Receive, store and be responsible for all finished hardware.
Apply hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instnrctions.
Fit accurately, apply securely and adjust carefully.
Use care not to injue work when applyms hardware.
Remove and replace doors so they may have bottoms painted.
Installation of hardware items selected from the finish hardware allowance is a part of
this work.
The location of hardware in connection with doors shall be as follows (unless otherwise
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
t
T
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
T
c.
D.
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
shown on Drawings):
l. Center door knobs 38 inches above finished floor.
2. Locate upperedge oftophinge 7-ll2 inches belowheadofframe.
3. Locate lower edge of bottom htnge 7 -l/2 inches above finished floor.
4. Space center hinges equal distance between top and bottom hinges.
I. Protect hardware until painting is complete. Prior to completion of this Worh examine
all doors and other finish hardware installed under this Section; adjust as required and
leave hardware in proper working condition.
3.0? ADruSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate
defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace
woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
06200-10 l-7554.01
o
I C. Refer to Division 9 Section - Painting for final finishing of installed finish carpenty
I work.
.1 D. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Conhactor of final protection
I and maintained conditions necessary io ensure that work will be with out damage or! deterioration at time of acceptance.
I END oF sEcrroN
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I r-7s54.0r 06200-11
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07110
STIEET MEMBRAIYE WATERPROOFING
PART I -GENERAL
I.O1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Work of this Section includes provision of frrlly adhered cold applied sheet
membrane waterproofing where ihown with protection board and associated ac-
cessories.
I.O2 DELIVERY
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging with all labels intact.
I.O3 STORAGE
A. Pallets of membrane shall not be double-stacked on job site. Provide cover on top and
all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation.
B. Store primer, mastic, protection board adhesive, and liquid membrane in a dry area
away from high heat, flames, or sparks.
C. Store protection board flat and off ground on wood plat'orms. Provide tarpaulin cover
on top and all sides.
1.04 HANDLING
A. Handle all materials in a manner that will prevent damage of any kind. Remove dam-
aged material from Project Site and replace with new materials. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations for safe handling and storage regarding personal protection, health,
and environmental considerations.
I.O5 REFERENCES
A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of General Conditions and Division 01
- General Requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances,
rules, and regulations.
1.06 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturer, materials, inspection, preparation, installatiorl field quality
control, and completed Work are listed in Parts 2 - Products and 3 - Execution of this
Section in accordance with General Conditions.
B. Installer Qualifications - Waterproofing shall be installed only by factory trained and
approved installers.
C. Design Performance - Noti$ Architect before submitting bid of any note, implication,
or detail, shown or specified that will not meet installation or warranty requirements.
Il
il
I
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I t-7554.01 071l0-l
I . Otherwise bid submission and contract award shall imply acceptance of waranty
requirements, details shown, and specifications stated.
D. Special Requirement - When required by membrane manufacturer, backup material
suppliers shall submit samples of materials not supplied by membrane manufactrner for
written approvals by manufacturer prior to waterproofing installation.
I.O7 SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and make submittals listed in accordance with General Conditions.
l. Product Data - Submit manufacturefs published specifications, recommenda-
tions, and installation instruction for use intended.
1.08 JOBSITECONDITIONS
A. Maintain surfaces to be waterproofed at 40 degrees F minimum. If it becomes neces-
sary, due to schedule requirements, to install waterproofing at surface temperatures
below 40 degrees F use manufacture/s "cold weather" material and follow manufac-
tuler's "cold weather" application irrstnrctions. In no instance shall water proofing ma-
terial be installed when surface temperature is below or will be below 25 degrees F.
I.O9 WARRANTY
A. Five (5) year term, beginning date work is accepted by Owner, warrant material to be
completely waterproof, in addition to guaranty requirements of General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. W. R, Grace & Co.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Items, accessories, components, and teatments specified are as manufactured by W. R.
Grace and Col unless otherwise noted.
1. Membrane - Bituthene 3000 rubberized asphalt sheet in rolls 36 inches wide.
Use Bituthene 3100 for "cold weather" applications.
2. Primer - Bituthene P-3000; P-3100 for "cold weather" applications.
3. Elastomeric Mastic - Bituthene EM-3000.
4. Liquid Membrane - Bituthene LM-3000.
5. Protection Board:
a. Horizontal - 1/4 inch asphalt impregnated hardboard approved by mem-
brane manufacturer.b. Vertical - Insulation type 3 as specified in Section 07210; minimum thick-
ness - 3/4 inch unless otherwise noted.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
J
07110-2 r-7554.01
J.
4.
).
6.
J
I
I
I
0
I
t
I
t
0
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Protection Board Adhesive:
a. PBA-3000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Vertical Surfaces:
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed.
Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Ensure that concrete has been cured a minimum ofseven days and is dry before appli-
cation of waterproofing membrane. Clean substate to remove dust, dirt, and debris.
l. General - Membrane, when in place, shall withstand a minimum static ground
water pressure of 150 feet.
Priming - Limit application of primer to what can be covered with waterproofing
membrane in a given work day. Primed areas not covered by membrane during
work day shall be reprimed. Apply primer by spray, roller, or brush at a rate of
250-350 square feet per gallon. If a roller is used, it shall be natural material
such as lamb's wool, having a nap of approximately one inch. Apply primer to
clean, dry, frost-free, and dust free surface. Suffrcient primer shall be used on
dry swface to condition it to a dust-free state suitable for installation of water-
proofing membrane. Allow primer to dry one hour or until tack-free.
Membrane Installation - Apply waterproofing membrane vertically in sections of
8 feet in length or less. On higher walls apply two or more sections with upper
overlapping lower by at least 2-l/2 ncbes. Press membrane in place with heavy
hand pressure or rollers during application.
Sealing Edges - Apply waterproofing membrane over edge of slab or over top of
wall. If membrane is terminated on vertical surface, provide a reglet or counter
flashing. Press edges with a metal or hardwood tool. Apply a troweled bead of
elastomeric mastic to all vertical and horizontal terminations.
Sealing Seams - Overlap all edges and end seams at least 2-l/2 inches. Apply
succeeding sheets with a minimum 2-l/2 inch overlap and stagger end laps. Roll
or press entire membrane firmly and complete. Patch misaligned or inadequately
lapped seams with membrane. Slit all fishmouths, overlap flaps, and repair with
a patch of membrane and press or roll in place. Seal edges of patch with a
troweling of elastomeric mastic. Seal laps within 12 inches of all comers with a
troweling or elastomeric mastic.
Comer Forming - Outside corners shall be free of sharp edges. Inside comers
shall receive a fillet formed with liquid membrane, latex modified cement mortax,
or epoxy mortar. Do not use fiber or wood cants.
a- Use the following methods for treating comers:
l-7554.01 071l0-3
l) Inside Comers - Apply liquid membrane 6 inches in each direction
from corner and form a fillet with a minimun 314 nch face or use
liquid membrane to fomr a fillet with a minimum 3/4 inch face and
cover with a 12 inch strip of membrane 6 inches up and 6 inches out.2) Outside Corners - Install 12 inch minimum strip of membrane cen-
tered on corner.b. Protection Board - Apply protection board on all vertical surfaces subject
to damage from othef trades.
QUALTTYCONTROL
Contactor shall make arang€ments for periodic Site inspections of Work by mem-
brane manufacturer. These inspections shall take place at cornmencement of Work and
during progress of Work. lntervals between inspections shall be detennined at precon-
struction conference Deviations from requirements of membrane manufacturer, as
noted by his inspector, shall be corrected after notification to Architect.
COMPLETED WORK
Work shall be undanaged upon completion of zucceeding ril/ork. Inspect each area just
prior to being covered. Do any additional or corrective Work necessary or perform
tests as dhected to ensure confommnce with specified requirements.
ENDOF SECTION
I
I,
I
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
I
0
I
,l
I
I
I
I
!
t
I
t
I
I
I
l071l0-4 t-7554.01
I
I
t PARr'-.ENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
t A. Section Includes:
SECTION 07160
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
l. Company specializing in bituminous waterproofing systems with 5 years
rnuumum exPenence.
2. List of completed projects comparable to this project is required.
I l. Cold applied asphalt bitumen dampproofing.
2. Protectivecovering.
n B. Related work:t
t._ l. Section 03300 - Concrete Work: Concrete substrate jointing method.
I r.oz ST.JBMITTALS
I A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
t B. Submit manufacturefs installation instructions underprovisions of Section 01300.
I C. Submit manufacturer's certificate that installed materials meet or exceed specified'u requirements.
I l.o3 euALrrY ASSURANCE.I,|v A. ApplicatorQualifications:I
0
I.O4 PRODUCT HANDLING
I A. Deliver products in manufacturer's sealed containers, with seals and labels intact.
l, B. Store materials in an enclosed space protected from weather and out of direct rays of
f the sun. Maintain a temperature range of 40 degrees F. minirnum, 90 degrees F.
mtl)omum.
U 1.05 EI\N/IRONMENTAL CONDITIONSr
^ A. Dampproofing shall be applied when the temperature is 40 degrees F. or above.a
N B. Application at temperatures'below 40 degrees F. shall be permitted only after written
approval from the dampproofing manufacturer and only after adequate precautions
I have been taken to assure dry and frost-free concrete surfaces.
|, C. Do not apply during inclement weather.
I
I
t-7ss4.01 07160-l
o I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
0
I
0
I
I
t
a
I
I
t
I.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent work from damage due to type of work included in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURER
A. Sonneborn Building Products.
B. Approvedsubstitutions.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Hydrocide 600 non-fibrate4 asphalt emulsion dampproofing.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Spray Equipment:
l. Airless spray with a 45:l Graco King pump at 3000 psi with a 50 ft. 3/8 inch I.D.
hose.
2. Gun; Hydra-Mastrc207-945 with a 619 revers-a-clean spray tip.
B. Protection Board: l/8 inch thick asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard, compatible,
water resistant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Veriff surfaces are solid, free of frozen matter, loose particles, cracks, pits, rough
projections, and foreign matter detimental to adhesion and application of
dampproofing.
B. Do not apply dampproofing to frozen, dirty, or dusty surfaces unacceptable to
applicator.
C. Verifr items which penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, and honeycomb in substrate.
3.03 APPLICATION OF DAMPPROOFING
A. Apply dampproofing in two coats by brush or spray, allowing fust coat to dry tacky
before applying second coat.
l-7554.01 07160-2
I
I l. Fill in all crevices and grooves making sure coating is continuous and free from
I breaksandpinholes.
a Carry coating overexposed top and outside edge offooting.IJ 3. Spread around alljoints, grooves, and slots, and into all chases, corners, reveals,
and soffits.
f 4. Bring the coating to finished grade.v
a B. Backlill shall not be placed aCainst dampproofing for at least 24 to 48 hours after
I application.
- l. Plape bacldrll within 7 days.-
| 2. Take care that backlill is placed in a manner that will not rupture or-damage-the
protection board and film or cause the coating or membranes to be displaced on
t the wall.
'D C. Seal items projecting thrcugh dampproofing surface watertight with mastic.
| 3.04 PRoTECTToNtA. Protect finished dampproofing from darnage during backfrll operations by adhering
I
protection board with mastic over treated surfaces.
- B. Protection board not required at formdation insulation locations.
J C. Neatly fit boards around pipes and projections.
I D. Backfill against protection board to pr€vent injury to membrane.
I END oF sECTIoN
1-7554.01
I
Ili
I
I
t
3
07160-3
I
I sEcrroN o72ro
I BUILDINGINSULATION
* PARTI-cENERAL
I r.ol suMMARY
j
A. Section Includes:tI l. Batt insulation.
a 2. Rigid insulation.
tt 3. Safing insulation.
| 4. Firestopping insulation.l 5. Perimeterinsulation.l
t B. Related Sections:
I l. Section 07270 - Firestopping.
I 2. Section Og25O - Gypsum Board; acoustical insulation.
AI 3. Division 15 - Pipe and Duct Insulation.t
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
II
I A. Submit samples of each material or product to be used.
I B. Submit samples clearly identified with manufactuey's name, brand name, R value, and
I composition.
riA C. Submit insulation manufacturer's recommendations for:
t l. Adhesive for use on metal deck or concrete wall installation.
l, 2. Procedures for use of adhesive.
U I.O3 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND }IANDLING
I A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original packaging.
a.. B. Clearly identif manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable standard, and R value.
I C. Store materials offground.
n D. Protect against weather, condensatioru and damage.
F E. Immediately nemove damaged material from site.
^I
',1. l-7554.01 07210-lI
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI.JFACTURERS
A. Owens-ComingFiberglass.@attlnsulation).
B. Thermal Engineered Systems @att Insulation).
C. Schullerlntemational.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. BatL Insulation General:
l. 25 flame spread and 50 smoke development per ASTM E 84.
2. Rated noncombustible per ASTM E 136.
3. Batts shall have minimum R-Value of 3.0 per inch of insulation thickness.
B. Foil Faced Batt Insulation:
l. Flame resistant FSK-25, resilient glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin to
foil facing.
2. Fire classification: 25150 or less rating per ASTM E 84.
3. Perm Rating: 0.5 grainVhr.sq.ff/in. of Hg.
4. R-ValueVSize: Forwalls; R-13,3-ll2'thick, 16" wide.
C. Perimeterlnsulation:
l. I'thick "Styrofoam SM" as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co. To be installed
intwo I" layers.
2. Mastic shall be Contech PL300.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Do not install insulation until the construction has progressed to the point that
inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Baff Insulation.
l. Install insulation between framing members with insulation fitting snugly
between framing members.
2. Set reflective, foil-faced units with not less than 0.75-inch air space in front of
foil.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
n
t
I
I
I
fi
07210-2 t-7554.01
J
a 3. Cut and fit insulating batts around pipes, conduits, outlet boxes and ductwork
t penetrations as necessary to maintain the integrity of the insulation.
tt 4. Where pipes are located in the cavities being insulated, install insulation between
I
the exterior face and the prpe and compress insulation, if necessary.
- 5. Securely fasten flanges of the batts to frarning members using only the fastening
I system recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation material for type ofI 9ffi"#:rffi,,?"#*1#,::'"lf,u::*"!ilI*ff*.fr$.oo'"*'ng arr
I 6. End match insulation neatly, with snug fit or overlapped.
z Fully insulate small areas between closely spaced frarning members.II B. Perimeter Insulation:
I l. Install rigid insulation by adhering to substrate with adhesive.
17 2. All joints shall be square and tightly butted. Install in layers with joints
.r staggered between layers. Provide full corner laps on adjacent surfaces atI s5,11y"fr1":iii$,*m:t *1"#,f,1"'i"T;?"::":?3-H:'#;*i':fi3
f,
cementing.
t 3. Install perimeter insulation against foundation walls as indicated.
i 4. Use care so as not to damage insulation.
'.l' 5. Replace any insulation damaged due to construction operations.
, ENDOFSECTION
I
I
t
I
Il
I
l-7554.01t 07210-3
t
I
3
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
t
t
Ii
I
1.02
A.
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A, Section Includes:
l. Wall penetrations.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Non fire-rated batts.
2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Fire-rated partitions and sound insulation.
3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
REFERENCES
Applicable Publications. The publications listed below form a part of this specification
to ihe extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic
desigrration only.
I. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
PUBLICATIONS.
a. C 665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housingb. E 84 - Surface Buming Characteristics of Building Materialsc. E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Constuction and Materialsd. E 814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetation Fire Stops (UL Standard 1479.)
2. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) PUBLICATION.
a. No. 70 - National Electical Code
I
t
t
I.O3 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Firestopping shall consist of providing a material or a combination of materials to form
an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and gases, and to maintain the
integrity of the time-rated construction.
B. Firestopping shall be provided in the following locations:
1. Duct, condui! and plpe penetations through time-rated partitions and fire walls.
2. Other locations where shown.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in conformance with Section 01300.
l-7554.01 07270-l
o
Manufachrer's
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
0
I
l'catalog data.
2. lnsrtallation detail for each type of application.
3. Test dala for time-rated construction.
1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Material shall have been tested by UL; or, other approved laboratory to meet required
fire resistance ratings of areas receiving firestopping materials.
B. Installation and materials shall confomt to requirernenb of ASTM E I 19 and E 814.
C. Fire-test data shall include certification by a nationally recogrrized testing authority or
by other supporting evidence satisfactory to the Architect.
D. Materials used to seal penetrations in time-rated assemblies shall be capable of
preventing the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when
subjected to ASTM E ll9 time-temperature fue conditions for I hour; the time
detemrined by the assembly rating.
1.06 STORAGE, DELIVERY AND I{ANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered in the original unopened packages or containers showing
name of the manufacturer and the brand narne.
B. Materials shall be stored off the ground and shall be protected from damage and
exposure to the elements.
C. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site.
r.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply fuestopping materials when temperature of substate material and
surrounding air is below 40 degrees F.
B. The 40 degrees F minimum temperature must be held24 hours before, during, and 48
hours after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The manufacturers and products listed are approved for use.
l. Dow Coming: 2000 Series Sealant, Foam and Intumescent Wrap.
2. STI: Pensil 100 Sealant,200 Foam.
3. 3M Fire Barrier: CP25 Sealants, Putty MPP and MPS, FSl95 Wrap Strip.
4. USG.
5. Equivalent products ofother manufacturers are approved subject to requirements
ofSection 01600.
,t
t
I07270-2 l-7554.01
I
I
t
I
i
I
t
I
I
o
FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS.2.02
A.
GENERAL
Commercially manufactured products complying with the following minimum
reqrurements.
l. Flame Spread: 25 Maximum in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Smoke Density: 50 Maximum in accordance wiih ASTM E 84.
3. Nontoxicity: Nontoxic to human beings at all stages of application and during
fire conditions.
B. Manufacturer's recommended damming materials as back-up for applied firestopping
compounds.
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dirt, grease, oil, loose material, frost, or other matter which would
affect bond of fuestopping.
B. Masking - If required to produce neatly finished work, mask edges ofjoints to prevent
misplacement of the primer or compound onto adjacent exposed surfaces.
C. Clean concrete swfaces to receive firestopping materials of incompatible form
releasing agents.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install firestopping at locations shown or specified in accordance with manufacture/s
instruction and fire test report.
B. Cutting and patching of construction and providing sleeves, where required, are shown
in Drawings or specified in other sections.
3.03 FILLING OF VOIDS
A. Firestopping material shall completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric
configuration, subject to tolerances established by the manufacturer.
I
ti
)
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.Firestopping for filling voids in floors in which the smallest dimension of the void is 4
inches or more shall support the same load as the floor is designed to support or shall
be protected by a permanent banier to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area.
INSULATED PIPES AND DUCTS
Insulated pipes and ducts penebating fire-rated floors and walls shall be insulated with
materials which provide the same performance as the firestopping material.
This material shall extend a minimum of 6 inches on each side of the opening.
Vapor barrier of such insulation shall have a perm rating of 0.03 morimum.
3.04
A.
B.
c.
t-7554.0r 07270-3
3.05 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fire dampers in ducts and penetations of time-rated constnrction shall be furnished
and installed in accordance with the requirements in DIVISION 15.
t
I
I
I
t
,l
t
I
I
i
I
t
I
0
B. Tooling - Tooling is required to ensure finn fiill contact with the interfaces of the joint.
Tool joints to form smooth, uniform beads with slightly concave surfaces. Joints shall
be straight, uniform, smooth and neatly finished. Tooling agents shall only be used if
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3.08 CLEAI{ING
A. Strip-offprotective masking tape immediately after compound has been applied. Sbip
toward the joint. Do not reuse masking material. Discard tape carefully to prevent
defacing adj acent surfaces.
B. Clean off excess compound or smearsi with cleaning material recommended by the
manufacturer of the compound.
3.06
A.
3.07
A.
ELECTRICAL CABLES OR CONDUITS
Firestopping at penetations of electrical cables or conduits shall also comply with the
requirements of NFPA No. 70.
INSTALLATION OF SEALA}IT
Sealant Application - Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturey's instnrctions,
using hand guns or pressure equipment with proper nozle size. Force sealant into and
against sides ofjoinr Avoid pulling of the sealant from the sides. Fill joint completely
with sealant.
ENDOF SECTION
I
I
I
i
I07270-4 l-7554.01
I
I
T
I
I
f,
l
I
I
I
I
I
n
I
l
i
I
t
I
sEcTroN 07510
BT]ILT.TJP BITIJMINOUS ROOFING
PART 1-GENERAL
I.O1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Glass fiber felt built-up roofing system.
2. Roof insulation system.
3. Base flashing and accessories.
4. Aggregatesurfacing.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Carpentry related to built-up roof system
installation.
2. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: flashing, gravel stops, gutters and
downspouts.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 41 - Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.
B. ASTM D 312 - Asphalt Used in Roofing.
C. ASTM D 2178 - Asphalt Impregnated Glass Mat Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
D. FS HH-I-I972/2 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Faced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate.
I.O3 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Manufacturer'sRecommendations:
l. All products comprising the total roofing system, including the insulation, shall
be acceptable to the roofing membrane manufacturer.
2. The published and written general requirements and specific recommendations of
the various materials manufacturers shall become a part of the project
specification to the extent referenced hereinafter.
3. The manufacturer's recommendations will govem the construction when not in
conflict with the specific provisions of the project specification.
4. In the event of conflic! the specific provisions of this specification will prevail
over such manufacturer's requirements or recommendations.
1-7554.01 07510-1
1.04
A.
B.
D.
1.05
A.
SUBMITTALS
Submit product data for membrane and base flashing materials.
Provide three (3) copies of the manufactnrer's specifications and application
instructions for all roof installations used; one (l) copy each shall be furnished to the
Owner and the Architect and one (l) copy shall be kept on the job site until the roof
installation is complete.
Submit certification of manufacturey's approval of this specific project regarding
warranty requirements. Certification shall be submitted prior to roofing application.
Submit manufacturey's certification that materials meet or exceed specified
requirements.
QUATITY ASSLJRAI.ICE
Qualifications:
l. Applicator:. Company specializing-in built-uptituminous roof application with 5
years experience, approved by roofing materials manufacturer.
2. Roofing components shall be provided from a single manufacturer source to
assure compatibility and confomrance to manufacturer's warranty conditions.
Regulatory Requirements:
l. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (JL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification.
Preinstallation Conference :
l. Convene a preconstnrction conference rmder provisions of Section 01200 one
week prior to commencing work of this section.
2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.
3. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work
including the following:
a. Review the specifications and details with the Owner, Contactor, Architect
and roofing applicator.b. Confimr that the applicator and manufacturer accept the roofing
specifications and details as a proper and functional system. If the
applicator and manufacturer have any apprehension or concern they shall
discuss and resolve them at this time.c. Establish where the roofing project will start and how the installation will
proceed.d. Determine what type of equipment will be used for the roofing application.e. Resolve where and how the materials are to be stored on the project.f. Determine the weather conditions under which the roofing applicator will
install the roofing system. The Architect Owner and Contractor must
acknowledge that if the weather conditions do require the roofing
applicator to stop the installation of the roofing system that pressure will
not be brought to bear on the roofing applicator to ignore the pre-
determined conditions and continue the installation.
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
,t
I
I
B.
C.
I
I
U
I
I
I
l07510-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l,
I
I
t
I
S. Establish a prcgram with the mechanical subcontactor as to exactly how_
and where iire mechanical eouipment will be transported across the roof
area. If nvo men caDnot
"u.ry
tir" equipment to the base it shall be placed
directly on the base by crane. Under no conditions can any equipmeqt or
materials be tansported across roofing without the prior approval of the
roofing applicator.h. All penetrations and walls must be in place prior to the roofing operation.i. Establish a program for controlling all traffic across finished roofing.
D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials that are identical to
materials whose fire performance characteristics, per requirements listed in Part 2 of
this Section, have been determined from tests by uL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I.06 DELIVERY,STORAGEANDHANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and
labels intact.
C. Store materials in weather protected environment clear of ground and moisture.
D. Stand roll materials on end.
I.O7 ENVIRONMENTALREQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when air temperature may
fall below 40 degrees F.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane to danp or frozen deck surface.
C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than
can be weatherproofed during same day.
I.O8 WARRANTY
A. Provide roofing manufacturey's ten year warranty to be fumished upon completion and
acceptance of the roofing installation.
B. Warranty in writing the rool flashing, and sheet metal work against leakage and other
defects,due to faihue in materials and/or workmanship for 2 yearc from the date of
substantial completion of the building . The Contractor shall repair all damages due to
failures covered above at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Schuller Intemational, 4GNC.
B. Owens-ComingFiberglass,4l-NG.
1-7554.01 07510-3
ROOFING SYS
Built-Up Roofing System: Four-ply, asphalt applied glass-fiber reinforced felts, with
insulation and gravel aggregate.
o
TEMS
Comply with roofing system manufacturey's recommendations for component roofing
syst€m materials, including insulation material as required for manufacturer's warranty.
2.03 SHEET MATERIALS
A. GlassFiberFelt: ASTMDzlTS,TypeIV.
l. Schuller lnternational GlasPly Premier.
2. OCF PermaPly-R.
B. Base Sheeu (where applicable to manufacturer's requirement) ASTM D 2626,No. 45;
plain.
2.04 BITUMINOUSMATERIALS
A. AsphaltBitumen: ASTM D 3lz,TypeIandType III.
B. Asphalt Flashing Cement FS SS-C-153, Type I or ASTM D 2822.
2.05 BUILT-UP ROOF MEMBRA}.IE SYSTEM
A. Nailable-Deck, Asphalt, Glass-Fiber, Aggregate Roofing: Provide built-up, aggegate-
surfaced roof system with asphalt bitumen and glass-fiber ply felts for laying up as
indicated:
1. Sheathing Paper: Single ply of5 lb. per 100 sq. ft., rosin-sized, sheathing paper.
2. Base Ply: Single ply of asphalt, glass-fiber felt, complying with ASTM D 2178,
Type IV.
3. Ply Felts: Three plies of asphalt, glass-fiber felts, complying with ASTM D
2178, Type IV.
4. Interply Bitumen: Roofing asphalt, complying with ASTM D 312, Type II.
5. Comply with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Specification Plate
No.32--NAGA, Diagrarn A.
2.06 INSULATION
A. All insulation shall be compatible with the manufacturer's warranty provisions and bear
U.L.label.
B. Total insulation thickness shall be a minimum of 3 inches with the Thermal Resistance
(R value): R=30.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
tl
il
I
g
I
I
2.02
A.
B.
075104 l-7554.01
I
I C. Polyisocyanurate Foam Board: Rigid boards of minimum 2.0 pcf) density
I polyisocyanurate-based foam core, permanently bonded to roofing felt facer sheets.v Provide in thickness indicated with minimum aged r value of 5.88, when conditioned
!
per RIC/TIMA BulletinNo.2Sl-1.
2.07 AGGREGATESUPSACING
I A. Aggregate: ASTM D 1863; Sound, hard washed river gravel, 400 tb/sq.
l. Embed ag$egate in flood coat of asphalt.
t 2. Apply second flood coat and gravel application. Remove loose gravel.
| 2.08 CANTS
r A. Fiber Cant and Tapered Edge Sbips: Asphalt irnpregnated wood fiberboard, performed
I
to 45 degree angle.
t B. Wood Cant may be used provided they are preservative teated and conform to roofing
)
system manufacturer's recommendations.
I 2.09 ACCESSORIES
I
A. Roofing Nails: Galvanized or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit application.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
I 3.01 EXAMINATION
- A. Veriff deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly
I sloped to drains.
B. Verifr roofopenings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents tbrough roofare solidly set,
I
wood nailing strips, and reglets are in place. Verifu deck is supported and secured.
C. Verifr deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Confirm dry deck by moisture
I meter with 12 percent moishre maximum.
I D. Beginning installation means acceptance of subshate.
t 3.02 PRoTECTToN|'
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.I! B. Where work must continue over finished roof membrane, protection surfaces.
I
3.03 INSULATION APPLICATION
r A. Install roofing, flashing and insulation in strict accordance with manufactruer's
instructions.
I B. Apply roofing and insulation in dry weather and do not apply roofing when ambient
temperature is below 40 degrees F.I
1 rzss4.ol 07510-5
I.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
J.
L.
M.
N.
o.
P.
Lay insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit
neatly to perimeter blocking and alound protrusions through roof.
Mechanically fasten insulation boards as required for UL Class 60 uplift resistance
windstorm requirements.
Install no more insulation at one time than will be protected from wetting or other
damage by the elements by installation of roofing membrane on the same day or prior
to rain or dew.
Solid mop with hot bitumen betrreen layers of insulation with Type III asphalt.
Run long joints for insulation in continuous staight lines, perpendicular to roof slope
with end joints staggered between rows.built-up 4-ply membrane (bur) application
Bitumen Temperature:
l. Maximum Bitumen temperature in kettle: Type I, 425 degrees F, Type Ln,475
degrees F. Discard bitumen heated above specified maximum.
2. Minimum bitumen temperature at time and point of application: Type I, 300
degrees F, Type trI, 300 degrees F. Do not reheat bitumen.
Minimum Rate of Application of Bitumen:
l. Between layen of insulatioq 23 to 25 lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
2. Between insulation and felt, 25 to 30 lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
3. Between layers of felt - 23 to25lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
4. Top coat - 60 lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
5. Aggregate - 400lbs. per 100 sq. ft"
Extend felts up cant stipe to vertical surfaces. Mop in one ply of granular surface felt
as base flashing. Secure to nailing stips at 4 inches and reglets.
Solid mop with Type I asphalt heated bitumen between felts and provide complete
uniform coating. Felt shall not touch felt.
Lay felts parallel to long dimension of roof.
Broom or press felts into heated bitumen providing tight, smooth larninations without
wrinkles, buckles, kinks or fishmouths; brooming shall follow immediately behind felt
laying.
Complete application of roofing system without pockets or blisters.
Complete installation of BUR roofing system, including aggregate, up to line of
termination of day's work.
Install temporary water cut-offs at completion of each day's work and remove upon
resumption of work.
07510-6 l-7554.01
foo
r.. a. Mop and seal two additional plies of felt around roof protrusions.
| 3.04 FLASHTNGS
t A. Coordinate installation of roof hoppers, drains, sumps, and related flashings.
B. Mop in and seal flashings and flanges of items protuding through membrane.
I 3.05 AGGRE.ATE
'TJPJA.TNGr A. Apply uniform flood coat of asphalt at rate of 60 lbs./square and while hot, embed
I roofing aggregate atrate of400lbs./square.
B. Evenly distibute aggegate and ensure bond with flood coat. Extend aggegate to
t bottoir edge of cant-sirips.
3.06 FrELD QUALTTY CONTROLI
I A. Inspgclion 2qd^tesline$l be performed at the Owner's option by firm appointed under
provisions of Section 0 I 400.
I B. Correct defects and inegularities.I
3.07 CLEAI{INGit
I A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
t B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling
t caused by work-of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advise
and conform to their instructions.
I
!r END OF SECTION
I
a
t
T
I
I
I
1 l-7554.01 oTsto-z
I
3
I
I SECTION 07511
r BUrLT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING/CUTTING AllD PATCITING
I PARTI -.ENERAL
I l.ol suMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I l.
:;1i;rflH.rrr:Tlng
of existing built-up roofing system as required to install
I B. Related Sections:
l. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work relating to roof curbs
installation.
2. Section 07510 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing.
3. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Patctq repair.
I 1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 312 - Asphalt Used in Roofing.
I B. FS SS-CC-153 - Cement, Bituminous, Plastic.
I.O3 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
I A. Roof patching shall be provided where roof penetrations have to be added or removed- on the portions of existing roof membrane that are indicated to remain.
I B. Roof system, including membrane, insulation and deck shall be patched with material1F to match existing, adjacent material in gage, appearance, thickness and structural
I
perfomrance which is equal to or greater than the existing.
- I.O4 SUBMTTALS
t A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
t B. Submit product data for membrane and base flashing materials.
I 1.0s QUALTTY ASSTTRANCE
- A. Applicator: Company specializing in built-up roofing system application with 5 years'
I :t?:;fiil: trained and approved by roofing materials manufacturer to apply this type
I B. Roofing components shall be provided from a single manufacturer source to assure
a compatibility and conformance to manufacturer's warranty conditions.
I
C. Regulatory Requirements:
I r-7554.0r 07511-r
v
nderwriters Laboratories,
o
Fire Hazard
I
I
I
I
l.u Inc. (UL): Class A Classification.
I.06 DELIVERY,STORAGEANDHANDLING
A. Deliver products to site rmder provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containets, dry, undamaged, seals and
labels intact.
Store materials in weather protected environment clear of ground and moisture.
Stand roll materials on end.
Storage of roofing rolls should be at least above 40 degrees F for a period before
application.
F. Breather type coverings zuch as canvas should be used to protect materials.
r.o7 ENVTRONMENTALREQUREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing during inclement weather or when air temperature may fall below
40 degrees F. (5 degrees C).
B, Do not apply roofing to damp or frozen substrate.
C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than
can be weatherproofed during same day.
I.O8 PREINSTALLATIONCONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-constnrction conference one week prior to commencing work of this
Section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section.
C. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work including
the following:
l. Review the specification and details with the Contactor, Architect and roofing
applicator.
2. Confirm that the applicator and manufacturer accept the roofing specifications
and details asi a proper and functional system. If the applicator and manufacturer
has any apprehensions or concem they shall discuss and resolve them at this
time. All changes to the system and documents shall be put in writing, approved
by the Architect and distributed to all parties involved.
3. Establish where the roofing project will start and how the installation will
proceed.
4. Determine what type of equipment will be used for the roofing application.
5. Resolve where and how the materials are to be stored on the project.
6. Determine the weather conditions under which the roofing applicator will install
c.
D.
E.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I075tt-2 t-7554.0r
I
| *,r,fl:*f;.ffix*",:T,1,3ffi?:H*"iffi:?i,ifil#H:[':ffi*ili*:
roofing system that pressure will not be brought to bear on the roofing applicatorr 7 ffi"":J;ff::ffi::ffi;:;:::"J:ffiI[*
I 1.09 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufactruer's certification that proposed procedures and materials will not
I voidwananty.
U PART2.PRoDUCTS
| 2.or MANUFAcTURERS
A. Match existing system.
I PARr3-DccurroN
t 3.01 EXAMINATION
I A. Veriff roofopenings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roofare solidly set,
- wood nailing snips, and reglets are in place. Veriff deck is supported and secured.
I B. Beginning installation means acceptance of substate.
I 3.02 PRoTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
'-
I B. Where work must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces.t
3.03 INSI.JLATIONAPPLICATION
I A. Membrane Repair:
I l. Cut membrane in straight lines with square corners around openings.
t 2. Strip aggregate back from cut opening a minimum of 2'-0" in each direction.
t 3 ffJli,':islr"3lffi:iffi;1if,l"'jil1ft'lillf,fi3;ff'3*fftu#?'ffi:
as existing roof.
t 4. Apply aggregate in flood coat of bitumen.
I
B.
,I;#"r,i1rrr1"g,
flashing, and insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's
i 3.04 FLASHINGS
t A. Apply base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements.
I
I l-zs54.or 075 1 1-3
o
Install prefabricated
instnrctions.
o
accordance
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Il
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C.
D.
3.05
A.
Coordinate installation ofroof top rmits, exhaust vents and related flashings.
Mop in and seal flashings and flanges of items protuding through membrane.
CLEANING
Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. In areas where finislred surfaces
are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this Section,
consult manufacturer ofsurfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions.
curbs and roofing accessories in
END OF SECTION
with manufacturer's
075rt4 l-7554.01
t
I sEcrIoN oz6oo
I F'LASHING AI{D SHEET METAL
't PART l -cENERAL
I l.or SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I L Facias.
,- 2. Flashings.
I 3. Counterflashings.
| 4. Downspouts.
5. Gutten.a
t 6. SofFrts.
L, 7. Related clips, anchors, and fasteners.
t B. Related Sections:
t l. Section 0?510 - Built-up Bituminous Roofing.
2. Section 0751I - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing/Cutting and Patching.
| 3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
I r.02 REFERENCES
I A. Codes/Sandards:
I l. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials).
2. SMACNA (Architecturd Sheet Metal Manual, 1987, Fourth Edition).
| 3. FS (Federal Specifications).
I.O3 SUBMTTALSrr A. Submit samples of both Flashing and Counterflashing materials in conformance with
Section 01300.
I B. Samples: Minimum of 12 inches by 12 inches in size.
I
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall be installed by experienced, fully competent craftsmen arid made
a watertight.
I
I
r-75s4.0r 07600-l
I.O5 WARRANTY
A. Sheet metal work shall be waranted for a period of 2 years from date of acceptance.
Warranty shall include replacement at Contractor's expense any defects which occur
during the waranty period which, in the opinion of the Architect are due to defective
materials, workmanship, or for faihue to allow for expansion/contaction.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.OI MANUFACTI.JRERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
l. Gravel Stops:
a. W. P. Hickman Co.b. Approvedsubstitution.
2. Metal Soffits:
a. AlcoaAluminum.b. Alside Division of Associated Materials. Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Iron: Use at facias, gravel stops, downspouts and gutters.
l. ConformtoASTM Specification A525.
2. Sheet goods shall be 24 gage except where indicated otherwise; cleats and clips
shall be 20 gage, unless otherwise noted.
3. Galvanized coating comply with G90.
B. Aluminum: Use at soffits.
l. Alloy and temp€r recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of
use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy
and temper designated below:
2. Factory-Painted Aluminum SheeL ASTMB209, 3105, with a minimum
thickness of 0.019 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder: Conform to ASTM Spec. B 32, 50-50.
D. Flux:
l. Shall be resin, muriatic acid killed with zinc or approved brand soldering paste.
2. Wash offthoroughly after soldering is completed.
E. Nails: Use galvanized nails in contact with galvanized iron; use aluminum nails in
contact with aluminum.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I07600-2 l-7554.01
I
I F. Screws:
r l. Use cadmium plated in contact witlr galvanized iron.
1 2. Use aluminum in contact with aluminum.
3. Washers shall be neoprene.
t G. Nonhardening Mastic:
I l. Use elastic caulking meeting FS TT-C-598 Type I.
I H. Sealant Tape:
I l. Use self-adhering, non-oily, resilient, Shore A hardness of20-30.
2.03 FABRICATION
I A. Sheet metal shall be formed to shapes and installed as indicated. Make flashings at
angles continuous by soldering. Allow for expansion/contraction.
I B. Fabricate counterflashings as detailed on the Drawings. Provide in at least l0'-0"r lengths, lap end joinS iinches and interlock. Bottom drip edge of counterflashing
: shall press tight against base flashing.Ir C. Fabricate facias to match profile of existing facias.
I D. Fabricate caps at roof penetations as per Fig. A of Plate 58 or as per Fig. C of Plate 66
I of SMACNA.
r E. Fabricate gutters per Plate 15 of SMACNA.
I F. Fabricate downspouts as per Fig. B, I of Plate 3l of SMACNA with hangers as per
Fig. G of Plate 35 of SIvIACNA, gage as noted on Plate 35. Hangers spaced not to
I exceed 6'-0" o.c.
G. Gravel Stops: Provide Hickman "Drain-Thru Gravel Stop" at gutter locations and
I Hickman "Safeguard Gravel Stop System Type F" at other edges in prefinished colors.
I 1. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
I H. Metal Soffits: Provide soffit material complying with A,Alv[\ 1402 fabricated from- aluminum sheet in alloy recomended by soffrt manufacturer, Alcoa "Value-Gard"
a- Model No. SVG16N10 with lanced openings for ventilation, prefinished in color as
I selected by Architect from manufacturer's stiirdard colors.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUSFLASHING
-I A. Form flashing to shapes indicated in lengths as long as possible. Lock seam or solder
joints as indicated or required for a watertight installation.
I
I B. Use concealed cleats for securing flashing to adjacent construction, wherever possible.
I
I
r-7ss4.0r 07600-3
2.05 FIMSHES
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for
Aluminum Finishes" andNAAMM Metal Finishes Manual, Sections Amp 501 and 505
for steel finish desigrrations and application recommendations.
B. Galvanized Steel Gravel Stop High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: Apply the
following system by coil-coating process on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by
coating manufacfi.uers and applicator.
l. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacture/s standard 2-coat,
thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
choices for color and gloss.
C. Aluminum Soffit Finish: Complying with A.AIvtA 1402, manufacturer's standard two-
coat PVC finish.
D. Shop Finish, Rain Drainage: Provide manufacture/s standard baked-on, white-acrylic
shop finish on sheet metal rain-drainage units (gutters, downspouts, and similar
exposed units); 1.0-mil dry fifn thickness.
PART 3 . DGCUTION
3.OI WORKMANSHIP
A. Execute all work in best, substantial, waterproof, workmanlike manner.
B. See Drawings for items and details.
C. Flash all projections through roof.
D. Shape and install sheet metal cap and counterflashings as directed.
E. Furnish those items to be installed by others to the proper trade for installation.
F. Make waterproof corner joints by soldering solidly; joints shall be fully lapped.
G. Fomr to allow for expansion and contaction as required.
H. Install sheet metal counterflashing over roof base flashing, as required and as detailed.
I. Separate dissimilar metals with mastic or sealant tape.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Width of laps shall be 3-in. minimum or shall be designed after Altemate Section A-A
of Plate 82 of SMACNA.
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I07600-4 1-7554.01
c.
D.
I
I
T
I
I
I
l
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
o
joints
o
nonhardeningB. Securely seal all
lap.
and laps with sealant tape or mastic, full width of
Fastening of all metal, maximum 2 ft o.c., whether fastening of cleats, clips or through
face of metal.
When fastening through face metal, urie scr€w and slotted hole where fastening is not
exposed and screw with washer where fastening is exposed. In exposed fastenings,
hole through metal shall be twice the diameter of screw shank.
Calk all reglets (see Section 07900 - Joint Sealen).
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 07600-5
t
I sEcrIoN oTeoo
. JOINT SEALERS
. PARTI.GENERAL
t l.0l SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I l. Jointsasdetailed, indicatedorrequired.
r Joints in cast-in-place concrete.Ia 3. Roofflashingandcounterflashing.
| 4. Penetrations of floors, walls and roofs.
5. Expansion joints.
I 6. Door, window and louver frames.
7. Joints betrveen dissimilar materials.
I B. Related Sections:
t l. Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete.
t 2. Section 07270 - Firestopping.
| 3. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.
4. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
LI! 5. Section 08800 - Glazing.
I 6. Section 09250- GypsumBoard.
a I.O2 REFERENCES
I
t A. Federal Specifications:
l. TT-S-0023OC(2) - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component
I (For Calking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structues).
2. TT-S-001543A - Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Calking,
t
Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures).
3. TT-S-00227E(3) - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multiple Component
I (For Calking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Stnrctures).
I' I.O3 SUBMITTALS
I A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300.
l-7554.01 07900-lI
Submit samples colors.
Submit manufacturer's surface preparation and installation instnrctions under
provisions of Section 01300.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Applicator Qualifi cations:
l. Application shall be done by a Joint Sealant Subcontactor with five years
experience. Docunentation required.
2. Use only qualified workmen thoroughly skilled and specially trained in the
techniques of calking, who can demonstate to the satisfaction of the Architect,
their ability to fill joints solidly and neatly.
o
of sealant
B. ManufacturerTechnicalAssistanc.e:
l. Materials shall be supplied by manufacturer who will provide qualified technical
assistance at the project site.
2. Mixing and application of sealing compound shall be in stict accordance with
the manufacturer's printed directions. Initial mixing and application shall be
under the direct supernision ofthe manufacturer's representative.
I.O5 DELIVERY,STORAGEANDHANDLING
A. Deliver calking and sealing compomds to the job in unbrokeq sealed containers
bearing the manufacture/s mixing directions. Store materials in sealed containers in a
dry protected area above the ground or floor.
B. Protect materials before, during and after installation. Protect the installed work of
other trades during installation.
C. Do not use materials that have been stored for a period of time exceeding the ma;<imum
recommended shelf life of the materials.
I.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. The joint confignration, the joint surfaces and backing forming the sealant rabbet shall
be as detailed in the drawings and in accordance with the contact specification.
B. Do not proceed with the installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions when
joint to be sealed is damp, wet or frozen,or when temperatures are below or above the
manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. Consult the manufacturer for
specific insftucfi ons before proceeding.
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. TremcoManufacturing.
B. Dow Corning.
07900-2
I
I
t
I
I
'lI
I
I
I
B.
c.
1.04
A.
t-7554.01
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
o
Corporation.c.
D.
E.
2.02
A.
Mameco International.
Sonnebom Building Products.
MATERI-ALS
Sealants:
l. Acrylic type, one component (non-sag), conform to FS TT-S-00230-, Type II,
non-sag, Class A, 15 percent joint movement" color: Neutral'
2. Silicone type, one component (low modulus), conform to FS TT-S-01543A,
Class A, 50 percent joint movement.
3. Polyurethane Type, two component (non-sag), conform to FS TT-S-00227E,50
percent joint movement.
4. Polynrethane Type, single component (self leveling) FS TT-S-00230c, Type 1,
Class A.
5. Dow Coming No. 890 Silicone, compatible with asphalt impregnated expansion
joint filler.
B. Calking: Oil base type, conform to FS TT-C-598C(I), Type II, Color neutal'
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers' standard color chart unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Sealant Primer:
l. Suitable to substrate surfaces as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
2. Knowledge of whether the primer is staining or non-staining shall be obtained
prior to application.
E. Joint Backing:
1. Performed compressible, resilient, non-wa:<ing, non-extruding, non-staining
stips (polyethylene foam, i foam, butyl) as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer.
2. Backing shall be of sizes and shapes to zuit the various conditions and shall be
compatible with sealant, primers, and substrates.
F. Bond Breaker: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
G. Cleaning Agent As recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
t-75s4.01 07900-3
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Surface Condition:
l. Joint surfaces to receive a sealant shall be sound, smooth, clean, dry and free of
all visible contamfurants.
2. Applications on non-visible coatings or contaminants to surface of rabbet area
prior to application of sealant shall be controlled by the Contractor in
consultation with the sealant manufacturer.
B. Joint Size: Joint size shall be as detailed or as determined by the Architect based on
building movement sealant capabilities and substate requirements.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUFSACES
A. Primer:
1. Thoroughly clean joints and apply primer, if recommended by sealant
manufacturer, to dry surfaces.
2. Apply primer prior to application ofjoint backing, bond breaker or sealants.
B. Joint Backing:
l. Injoints where the depth ofthe joint exceeds the required depth ofthe sealant
installjoint backing to provide backing and uniform depth ofsealant.
2. Joint backing sball be installed with approximately 30 percent compression. Do
not stetch, twist, puncture or tear joint backing. Butt joint backing at
intersections.
C. Bond Breaker Tape:
1. Install bond breaker tape smoothly at back of joint where joint backing is not
required or cannot be installed.
2. Sealant shall adhere only to the sides and not to the back of the joint to eliminate
three-sided adhesion.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. SealantApplication:
l. Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturey's application manual and
instuctions, using hand guns or pressure equipment with proper nozzle size, on
clean, dry, properly prepared substrates.
2. Force sealant into joint and against sides ofjoint to make uniform. Avoid pulling
of the sealant from the sides. Fill sealant space completely with sealant.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I07900-4 r-7554.01
t
- 3. Where an irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists, the applicator shall
I apply masking tape at the edge of the joint to ensure joint neatness andr protection. Remove tape after sealant is applied.
I B. Tooling:
I l. Tooling is required to ensurc firm full contact with the interfaces of the joint.
I 2. Tool joints !o fom.r lmooth uniform beads with slightly.concave surfaces. Finish
joints shall be staight, uniform, smooth and neatly finished.
| 3.
*""f;";:rff"mess
sealant from adjacent surfaces ofjoint, leaving the work in a
t 4. Tooling agents should only be used if recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANING
I A. Clean^off excess compound and smears with cleaning rnut".T1l recommended by Semanufacturer of the compound. Leave work in a condition satisfactory to the
- Architect.II 3.05 SEALANT SCHEDULE
I A. Joints in vertical planes:
l. Building exterior and interior face ofthrough expansion or contoljoints.
| 2. Provide non-sag rype poiyurethane or silicone sealant.
a B. Joints in horizontal planes:
I L Building interiorand exterior.
I
2. Provide self-leveling type polyurethane or silicone sealant.
C. Joints on interior of building: Except as indicated in item A above, provide acrylic
I type sealant.
" D. Perimeter of plumbing fixtures and vanities: Provide mildew-resistant silicone type
I sealant.
I E. Set all thresholds in tull bed of oil base calking.
I
F. Cerarnic Tile: Provide silicone sealant at wall and base joints.
G. See Drawings for typical locations.
-r END OF SECTION
t
I
I 1-7554.01 07900-s
I
I
I PARr'-.ENERAL
I r.0l STTMMARY
I
SECTION 08100
METAL DOORS & FRAMES
A. Section Includes:
I 1. General work of this section consists of fumishing and installing all metal doors
- and frames as shown and as specified herein.
I B. Related Sections:
l. Section 08210 - Sy'ood Doors.
t 2. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
I 1.02 SUBMITTALS
- A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufactureds shop drawings for doors, frames, and
I accessories in accordance with Section 01300.
I l. Submit shop drawings covering each type of door and frame, frame conditions,
and complete anchoiage details, supplemented by suitable schedules covering
I doors and frames.
2. Show undercut opening sizes and locations in doors.II 3. Indicate size, gage, and location of reinforcement for hardware on shop drawings.
I 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AI.ID HANDLING
I A. Deliver, store, and handle hollow metal work in a manner to prevent damage and
deterioration.
I B. Store doors and frames upright, in a protected dry area at least I inch or more offthe
ground or floor and at least 1/4 inch between individual pieces.
I C. Protect exposed finish surfaces of prefinished items with masking tape.
I
PART2-PRODUCTS
! 2.OI MANI.'FACTURERS
I
A. Hollow metal work shall be manufactured by one ofthe following:
1. Gateway Metal Products
2. Fenestra.
3. Steelcraft.
t-7554.01
T
t
I 08100-l
o
Building Products Div.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
4. Amweld
DOORS
Face sheets shall be flat, smooth, galvanized 18 gage steel. Sizes and slyles are
indicated on the Drawings.
For exterior door locations, fabricate doors from 2 outer, galvanized" stetcher-leveled
steel sheets not less than 0.0635 inch thick. Construct doon with smooth, flush
surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges, except around
glazed panel inserts. Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of doors to permit escape
of entrapped moisture. Close bottom edge with minimum 0.0635-inch- thick
galvanized steel closing channel and top edge with minimum 0.0635-inch- thick
galvanized steel filler channel so webs of channels are flush with bottom and top edges.
Sealjoints in top edges ofdoors against water penetration.
Door shall have continuously welded edges, dressed and ground smoolh, and with no
visible seams on door faces or vertical edges.
Internal Stiffeners:
l. Surface sheets shall be supported by "2", channel, or continuous tnrss members
not less than 16 gage (28 gage for continuous tnrss), spaced not more than 6
inches on center and intemally spot welded to both surface sheets at ma:<imum of
4 inches o.c.
2. Top and bottom edges ofall doors shall be closed flush with continuous 16 gage
channel members extending full width of door.
3. Edges ofdoors shall be supported by 16 gage interior edge cbannels extending
full height of door.
Sound Deadening: Interior surface shall be treated with a sounddeadening material to
eliminate metallic ring.
Sound Retardant Install rock wool sound retardant material in doors with a density of
3.5 lbs. and a thickness of 50 percent greater than the door thickness before
compression.
Clearances: (Tolerance: minus l/16 inch for fire rated doon)
l. Between doors and frames at head and jamb l/8 inch.
2. At sill 3/8 inch at bottom of single doors, 1/4 inch at bottom of pairs of doors.
Where threshold is used 1/8 inch between door and threshold.
3. Between meeting edge of doors in pain l/8 inch.
4. Bevel edges of single acting doors l/8 inch in 2 inches.
5. Coordinate door height with floor covering thickness.
F.
G.
08100-2 t-7554.01
I
I
r H. Glazing Stops:
I I 5ffii:J:H3:H,'tri,'*t?J*1*$ii'"'"stopstosecwegrass'
Stops
I 2. Install glass in glazing compound in conformance with Section 08800.
3. Glazing stop shall be integral with frame on the exterior side of the frame.
Interioi glaijng stop shall be held in place with countersunk oval head security
screws.
I z.o3 FRAMES
!t
A. Sheet steel for frames shall be hot rolled prime quality carbon steel except exterior
I frames which shall be galvanized steel sheets.I
- B. Size and styles are indicated on the Drawings.
I C. Frames shall be combination buck, frarne and tim on exterior, separate frame and trim
on interior as detailed.
I D. Minimum Gages: Frarnes for interior door, door and window, and window openings
shall be not less than 0.060 inch(16 gage) minimum.
I l. ExteriorFrames: Notlessthan0.0T85inch(l4gage)thicka
E. Brake-forn steel sheets:I
t l. Provide profiles and shapes free ofwarp, buckles, fractures or other defects.
I
2. Form 5/8 inch door stops integral with frames.
F. Corners and connections shall be mitered and welded with exposed welds ground flush
and smooth.
a G. Anchors:
I l. Provide an anchor at each jamb for each 2'-6" of door or window height orI fraction thereof.
t 2. Vary anchor types to provide positive fastening to adjacent construction, provide
I special anchors as detailed.
- 3. Secure a metal clip angle at bottom of each jamb member for anchoring to floor,
I with a minimum of 2 fasteners.
4. Wood Stud Anchor: Provide 16 gage Z-shaped anchors.
I H. Provide 3 holes for each stike jamb and 2 holes for header of double frames for
application of door silencers.
I I. Provide qyo .lq gage steel spreaders for double rabbeted frames tack welded to the
bottom of both jaurbs.
t
I
l-7554.01 08100-3
t
v
PREPARATION FOR FIMSHED HARDWARE
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.04
A.Doors and frames stnll be factory reinforced, drilled, and tapped for mortise template
hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule. Obtain current hardware
templates from hardware supplier.
B. Provide welded-in reinforcing plates for snrface applied hardware.
C. Frarne Reinforcement: Thickness and sizes for frame reinforcement shall be as
follows:
l. Butt Hinges: 3116 plate 12 inches long by full width of rabbet.
2. Closer: l0 ga- channel section 12 inches long and full width of frame trim.
3. Reinforcement for strikes, flush bolts, and all other surface mounted hardware:
12 gage.
D. Door Reinforcement Thickness and sizes for door hardware reinforcement shall be as
follows:
1. Butt Hinges: 3/16 inch plate 9 inches long welded to 16 gage. interior edge
channels.
2. Surface Applied Closers: 12 gage box section minfunum 4 inches deep and 12
inches long weld to top and edge channels.
3. Locksets, Deadbolts, Panic Devices: 12 gage steel spot welded to interior edge
channels.
4. Reinforcement for Pull Plates, Flush Bolts, and All Other Surface Mounted
Hardware: 12 gage steel spot welded to internal stiffeners.
2.05 FINISH
A. Doors and frames shall be leveled and ground smooth.
B. Apply mineral filler to eliminate weld scars and other blemishes.
C. Provide factory coat of rust inhibitive metal primer including galvanized surfaces.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION OF FRAMES
A. Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level
and maintain jambs plumb and square.
B. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent constnrction.
C. Remove factory applied spreader bar before setting frame and apply exact length wood
spreader bars al b6ftom add center of door to mainiain correct spabiirg between'jambs.
081004 t-7554.01
t o
- 3.02 INSTALLATION OF DOORS
I A. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instruction.
Hardware and specialties shall be as specified in Section 08710, Hardware.
I B. Adjust operable parts for correct function.
I C. Remove hardware, with exception of prime-coated items, tag, box, and reinstall aiter
I finish painting is completed.
r D. Clearances shall be as specified in 2.02 above.rI' 3.03 PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP
I A. Immediately after erection, ar€as where prime coat has been damaged shall be sanded
I smooth and touched up with same primer as applied at shop.
I B. Remove rust before above specified touch-up is applied. Touch-up shall not be
t obvious.
.r 3.04 DOOR SCIIEDULE
I! A. Dimensions and other requirements for each hollow metal door and frame are noted on
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
Door Schedule of the Drawings. Each door is identified by a door mark as shown on
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
I
l-7ss4.01 08100-5
I
I
t PARrI-.ENERAL
I 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
SECTION 08210
wooD DooRs
l. Submit two samples of each type of door veneer.
2. Sample size: 12 by 16 by l-3l4 inch in size.
I l. Wood doors: Fire rated and non-rated.
2. Flush wood doors with veneer facings.
I B. Related Sections:
T
l. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Hardware installation, door hanging.
2. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames: Steel frames and doors.
t 3. Section 08710 - Hardware.
4. Section 08800 - Glazing.
r 5. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors.
t r.02 REFERENCES
I- A. ANSIAIWWDA I.S. Series - Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors (ncludes
I Standardsls. l.l throughl.S. 1.7),1985 Edition.
t B. ANSI A 135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
I C. AWI - Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute, 1988 Edition.
D. NFPA 80 - Fire doors and windows.
t r.03 SUBMTTTALS
I A. Submit shop drawings, samples, and product data under provisions of Sections 01300.
! B, Indicate door elevations, stile and rail reinforcement, internal backing for hardware
attachment, and cutouts for glazing, louvers.
t C. Samples:
I
I
t
I
r-7ss4,01 08210-l
o
ASSTIRA}ICE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
1.04 QUALTTY
A. Confomr to requirements of AWI Quality Standard Section 01300 Premium Grade and
ANSIAIWWDA I.S. l.l through I.S. 1.7.
Installed Doors and Panels: Conform to NFPA 80 for fue rated class indicated.
Regulatory Requirements :
L Provide UL or Warnock Hersey label on doors indicated on door schedule.
2. If any door or frame scheduled to be fte-rated cannot qualiry for appropriate
labeling because of its desigt, hardware or any other reason, advise Architect
prior to submission of bids.
D. Coordination:
l. Provide the door manufacturer with all necessary information, including steel
buck shop drawings, hardware schedule, floor plans, templates, and sanples of
hardware required to properly machine doors.
2. Door manufacturer shall coordinate information received so that doors are
properly machined and ready for hanging at the site.
I.O5 DELIVERY,STORAGEA}IDHANDLING
A. Deliver store, and handle wood doon in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration.
B. Doors shall be individually packaged for shipment to the site.
C. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least I inch or more offthe floor and at
least l/4 inch between individual pieces.
D. Protect exposed finish surfaces of prefinished items with masking tape.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Specific Product Warranty:
l. Warranty all doors for one year begimdng on the day of acceptance.
2. Submit 2 copies of written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form
signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor.
3. The Warranty shall agree to repair or replace defective doors which have warped
(bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core constuction below in
face veneers or do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWWDA and AWI.
B. The warranty shall also include refinishing and reinstallation which may be required
due to repair or replacement ofdefective doors.
C. In addition to the above, the warranty for solid core flr'sh inrcrior doors shall be in
effect for lifetime of installation.
B.
c.
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
T
08210-2 1-7554.01
T
I D. Manufacturer shall inspect doors after installation and shall note on warranty that n9
I provisions of the wananty have been voided or nullified and that waranty is in fullr effect at completion of installation.
I PART2-PRoDUcrst2.01 MANUFACTIJRERS
I A. Weyerhaeuser Co. specified to establish level of quality.
I B. Ngoma.
- C. Eggen Hardwood Products.
I 2.02 MATERTALSIA. Solid Core Doors:
t l. "AWI PC-5'type.
" Solid particleboard core.lL.I 3. Hardwood stiles.
I 4. TypeFD.t 5. Fire rated as scheduled.
I B. AWI Quality Grade: Premium.
I C. Faces:
I l. Plain sliced Red Oak, veneer, both sides.
I 2. Thickness: l/40 inch minimum.t D. Edge Stiles: Red Oak.
I E. Cores:
I l. Particle Board: Core shall be one piece slab padical board with a density of 28 to
l 32'
2. Mineral Core: Equal to commercial standard l7l-58.
t F. Stiles and Rails:
I l. Vertical stiles shall be 3 3/4 inches or 1 l/8 inches fir or cedar with l/2 inch
I H*fl$i laminated edge stip with two coats facto'ry applied primer to match
I 2. Top and bottom rails shall be of same construction.
3. Where mortise closers or other similar densities occur, blocking shall be provided
so that all screws fasten into hardwood for their compiete lengft.I
l-7554.01 08210-3
I
o
Door AWI Construction Type:
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Fire Rated
l. Fire Rated Minerdl Core Doors: hovide lock blocks.
2. Provide factory prefitting and premachining as required for fire rated labels.
H. Adhesives:
l. Adhesives shallcomplywithAI{SI .IWWDAI.S. I series,TypeI.
I. Wood Fire Doors:
l. Fire doors, shall be "B" label I l2 hour constnrction with finish same as
specified for wood doors.
2. Submit certificates stating that the doors meet "8" label construction in every
respect in accordance with Undenvriteds Laboratories, Inc. specifications, for I
1/2 hour rating.
3. Fire doors shall carry an embossed Fire Underunitefs Label attached to the
hanging stile of door stating they are manufactr.ued to meet I l/2 hour 'B' label
constnrction.
4. Wood fue doors will be provided by same manufacturer as wood doors.
2.03 FINISH
A. Comply with Section 09900, Painting.
B. Seal top and bottom edges ofdoors with tinted seal asi soon as possible upon arrival at
the site.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Premium Grade and
ANSIAIWWDA I.S. I requirements.
B. Interior wood doors shall be completely sized bevelled, and machined for all hardware
except that applied to the surface not r€quiring cutting ofdoor in the field.
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Conditioning: Condition doors to average humidity in installation area prior to
hanging.
B. Prefitting: Prefit doors to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not
previously work at factor as required for proper fit and unifomr clearance at each edge.
C. Sealing: Before installation of hardware, brush apply exterior seal coat to all job site
cut or planed surfaces.
l. Sealer: Type recommended by manufacturer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I082r0-4 t-7554.01
T
- 3.02 INSTALLATION
It A. Doors shall be hung in a workmanlike manner taking precautions not to scratch or mar
the face of the do-or in any manner. All damagel'doors shall be replaced by the
I contractor at no additional c6st to Owner.r B. Cutting, drilling, fitting, or other similar type of work to the doors shall not be
I permitted at the site except for attachment to surface applied hardware.
r C. Install doors in accordance with manufacnrer's recommendations.
t l. Fit to width by planing and. fit tq heiqhj.. In no case shall doors be cut down to
opening sizes smaller than those for which they were manufactwed.
I 2. Installation: By skilled finistr carpenters or factory authorized installers.t 3. Installer: Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the manufacturer's door
warranty as currently in effect and assure compliance with all provisions.
I
D. Clearance:
I l. Non-Fire Rated Doors:
I fr. iffih li8 il:f: t'* inch bever in 2 inches'
I c. Between Double Doors: l/8 inch.
r 2. $*.",?X"fr313i,:T*:JHHlTi'?:l"lierings:
tt2inch'
I a. Jamb: l/8 inch, l/8 inch bevel in 2 inches.
I b. Head: l/8 inch.I ;. ffTfi:iB"t::f .P,T;ii"#t"f:*rre doors, r/4 inch at bottom orpairs or
doors.
. 3.03 ADruSTING AND PROTECTION
I A. Adjusfinent:
I l. At completion ofjob, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper
operation condition.
IIt B. Protection:
I l. Protect all doors from damage after hung until final inspection. Immediatelyt before final inspection, clean doors of all dirt, dust, and other foreign materials
leaving doors in perfect condition.
I 2. Advise Contractor of proper procedures required to protect installed wood doors
from damages or deterioration until acceptance ofentire project.
I
I
I
r-7ss4.01 08210-s
C. Replacement:
l. Refinish or replace doors damaged dwing installation.
2. Causes for Rejection: Chips, scratches or gouges ofveneer.
3,04 DOORSCIIEDULE
A. Dimensions and other requirements for each wood door are noted on the Door
Schedule. Each door is identified by a door mark as shown on the Drawings.
ENDOF SECTION
08210-6 t-7554.01
I
I
I PARrI-GENERAL
I 1.ol sTTMMARY
SECTION OE3O5
ACCESS DOORS
I
A. Section Includes:
t l. Non-rated access doors and franes.
I B. Related Sections:
r l. Section03300-Concrete: Openingsinconcrete.
2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Openings in partitions.
3. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish.
I t.02 SUBMTTTALS
I
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
r B. Include sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details ofadjoining work.
I C. Submit manufacturet's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
!
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I 2.0t MANLJFACTURERS
r A. Babcock - Davis.
t B. Bilco.
I C. Karp Associates, Inc.
D. Milcor.
t 2.02 AccEss uNrrs
I A. Access Panels - Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings: Flush, style DW, 16 gage frame,
I 14 gage panel, galvanized steel drywall bead, concealed spring hinges. Size andt location shown on Drawings. Cam operated locking devices.
I 2.03 FrNrsH
A. Factory prime for site painting.
I
I
I
r-7ss4.0r 08305-l
PART 3 . E)(ECUTION
3.OI INSPECTION
A. Veriff rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install frame plumb and level in wall and ceiling openings.
B. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.
C. Install in accordance with manufactnrer's recornmendations and requirements
Underwriters' Laboratories, [nc., for fire-rated access panels.
D. Rehang or replace panels that do not operate prop€rly.
E. Refinish or replace demiged or defective panels or frames.
ENDOF SECTION
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
t08305-2 t-7ss4.0r
I
I SECTION 08617
wooD wrNDows
I
I PARrI-GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
I- A. This Section includes the following wood window types:
t l. Awning windows.I
? Nonoperative (fixed) windows.Ir B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
t l. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior and exterior wood trim that is
,r not included as part of the wood window units.
- 2. Division 8 Section "Gla"ing" for glazing requirements for wood windows,
including factory -glazsd window units.
I,O2 DEFINITIONS
I A. Performance-grade number, included as part of the window designation system, is the
actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot used to deterrnine the strucnral
test pressure and water test pressure.
l. Stnrctural test pressure, wind load test is equivalent to 150 percent ofthe design
pressrue.
2. Water-leakage-resistance test pressure is equivalent to 10 percent of the design
pressure with 2.86 lb/sq. ft. as a minimum.
1.03 PEPSORMANCEREQUIREMENTS
I A. General: Provide wood windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand
normal thermal mov€ment, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as
I demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing
I types, grades, and sizes required for this Project according to test methods indicated.
I B. Standards: Performance requirements for operating force, air infiltration, water
t penetration, structural performance, and forced-entry resistance for wood windows are
those specified in NWWDA I.S. 2, "Indusbry Standard for Wood Window Units."
I C. Test Criteria: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency
I l-7ss4.ol
I
I
I
I based on the following criteria:
08611 - I
o
wind velocity
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
D.
l.Design at Project site is 90 mi./h.
2. Test Procedures: Test window units according to ASTM E 283 for air
infiltation, ASTM E 547 for water penetation, and ASTM E 330 for structural
performance.
Performance Requirernents: Testing shall demonstate compliance with requirements
indicated in NWWDA I.S. 2 for operating force, air infiltation" water penetation"
structural perfonnance, and forced-enty resistance for the type and performance grade
of window units required. Where required desigr pressure exceeds the minimum for
the specified window grade, comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2, Article 6,
"Optional Perfomrance Classifications," for higher than minimum perfonnance grades.
l. Air-Infiltation Rate for Operating Units: Not more than 0.10 cfin/ft. of operable
sash joint for an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbflsq. ft..
2. Water Penetration: No water penetation as defined in the test method at an
inward test pressure of l0 percent ofthe stnctural test pressure.
3. Sfuctural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4
percent of any membe/s span after removing the imposed load, for a positive
(inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 60 lbflsq. ft.
4. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Perfomrance Level 20 requirements
when tested according to ASTM F 588.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division I Specification Sections.
Product Data for each type of wood window required, including the following:
l. Construction details and fabrication methods.
2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes.
Shop Drawings for each type of window required, including information not fully
detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following:
l. Layout and installation details, including anchors.
2. Elevations at l/4 inch = 1 foot scale and typical window unit elevations at 314
inch= I footscale.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
08611 - 2 t-7554.01
D.
B.
c.
D.
F.
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
1.05
A.
3. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement
and stiffeners.
4. Hardware, including operators.
5. Glazing details.
6. Accessories.
Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type,
grade, and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated
based on comprehensive testing of cunent window units within the last 5 years. Test
results based on use ofdownsized test units will not be accepted.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Fimrs whose windows have been certified under the
NWWDA "Hallmark Program" for wood window units are listed in the cturent
NWWDA "Membership and Product Directory" and comply with requirements
indicated.
l. Provide only wood window units bearing an NWWDA "Hallmark Ptogram"
label certiffing compliance with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2.
Single-source Responsibility: Obtain wood window units from one source and by a
single manufacturer.
Safety Glass Standard: Provide products complying with testing requirements of
l6 CFR, Part l20l for Category II materials.
Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing
Association (FGMA) 'Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating-glass units permanently
marked on spacers or at least on one component pane of units with the appropriate
certification label of one of the inspecting ag€ncy indicated below:
l. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
2. AssociatedLaboratories,Inc. (ALD.
3. National Certification Testing Laboratories (NCTL).
Product Options: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, dimensional requirements, and
aesthetic effects of wood windows and are based on the specific window types and
models indicated. Other wood window manufacturers whose products have equal
performance characteristics may be considered provided deviations in size, profile, and
1-7554.01 08611 - 3
v
minor
o
effect. Refer
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
dimensions are
"Substitutions."
and do not alter the aesthetic !o Division 1 Section
I.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Field Measruements: Check window openings by field measurements before
fabrication and show recorded mea$rements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with consuuction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
l. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field
measurements. Coordinate wall constnrction to ensure that actual opening
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
I.O7 WARRAI{TY
A. General Wananty: The special warrdnty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent wittu other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written waranty executed by wood window manufacturer
agreeing to repair or replace window components that fail in materials or workmanship
within the specified warrdnty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
l. Stnrctural faihues including excessive deflectiorU water leakage, air infiltation,
or condensation.
2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
3. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C. Warranty Period for Insulating Glass: l0 years after date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranty Period for Wood Windows: 2 years after date of Substantid Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufactwer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide window units by one
of the following:
1. Unfinished Wood tlrindow Units:
L Eagle Window and Door, Inc. (specified to establish level of quality).
b. Caradco Window Corp.
08611 - 4 t-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
c. Hurd Millwork Co.
d. Malta Wood Windows & Doors (Division of Tompkins Industries, lnc.).
Marvin Windows.
Pella Corporation.
Pozzi Wood Windows.
Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.
2.02 MATERI.ALS
A. General: Comply withrequirements of NWWDA I.S.2.
B. \tr/ood: Clear ponderosa pine or other suitable fine-grain lumber, kiln dried to a
moisture content of 6 to t2 percent at time of fabrication and free of visible finger
joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than l/32 wideby 2
inches long.
l. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative teated after machining per
NWWDA I.S.4.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories.of
aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hotdip zinc-coated steel or iron complying
with requirements of ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (severe) service condition; provide
suffrcient stength to withstand desigrr pressure indicated.
D. Fasteners: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's
recommendations and standard industy practices for type and size of installation
fasteners.
l. Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and
installation.
2. Use brass screws for hardware and accessory installation.
E. Compression-Type Weatherstripping: Provide compressible weatherstripping designed
for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely
concealed when sash is closed.
l. Weatherstripping Material: Molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287
or molded, expanded, EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509,
Grade 4.
F. Glass-Fiber-Mesh Insect Screen: l8-by-14 or l8-by-16 mesh of plastic-coated glass-
fiber threads, woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion" shrinkage,
stretch" impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with requirements of
ASTM D 3656.
G. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide manufacturer's standard clear, sealed, insulating
glazing material that complies with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
e.
f.
g.
h.
t-7554.01 08611 - 5
o
extrude4 viny
I
I
I
I
H. Glazing Seal: Provide manufactueds standard l, or butyl glazing gasket
providing weathertight seal.
2.03 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturet's standard hardware, necessary to operate, tightly close,
and securely lock windows. Do not use alunrinum in frictional contact with other
metals.
l. Provide solid white metal hardware with a special coating finish and plated steel
or brass/bronze operating bars and rods.
B. Foru-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply wittr AAMA 904.1.
l. Friction Shoes: Nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable
material.
C. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA90l.l for rotary operators.
Comply with ASTM E 405, Method A, when subjected to operating mornents and
closing torques indicated in AAlv[{ l0:.
l. Operator shall operate all ventilators simultaneously, securely closing them at
both jambs without using additional manually contolled locking devices.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator.
Locate screerul on inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, depending upon
window type. Desigr windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-
fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches.
l. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shape4 extruded- or fomred-
aluminum members of 0.040-inch-minimum wall thickness, with mitered or
coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners. Provide removable PVC
spline/anchor concealing edge of screen frame. Comply with requirements of
sMA 1004.
2.05 AWNINGWINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements ofNWWDA Performance Grade DP60.
B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware:
1. Operating Device: Gear-type rotary operator located on jamb at sill.
2. Hinges: Concealed 4-bar friction hinges (2 per ventilator) located on each jamb
near top rail.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I08611 - 6 r-7554.0r
loo
I
3. Cam latch or other latching hardware with lever handle or pull.
2.06 FDGD WINDOWS
I A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP60.
2.7 FABRICATION
It A. General: Fabricate wood window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a
I complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
t L Comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S.2 for moistue content of lumber at
time of fabrication.
2. Provide frame extensions to permit window unit to fit wall conditions as shown
t
on the Drawings.
B. Fabricate windows to produce units that are reglazable without dismantling sash
I framing. Provide openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware
I and other items.
I l. Provide weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating sash.
I 2. Provide removable insect screen for each operating sash, with location
determined by manufacturer.
a 3. Provide glazing stops, nailed or snap-on type, coordinated with glass selection
and glazing system indicated.
I 4. Factory-Glazed Window Units: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united
I inches, glaze window mits in the shop before delivery, unless factory glazing is
f not available from manufacturer. Comply with requirements of Division 8
Section "Gln-ing" sf these Specifications and NWWDA I.S. 2.
! 5. Groove Glazing: Factory-glazed units without removable stops or other
lr:ru**llilt;"il;ff#.fielddisassemblytofacilitatereplacementof
C. Complete fabricatioq assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before
t shipment to the Project site, to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components! only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site,
I
provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
r 2.8 FINISHES
I A. Wood Finish: Provide the following finish on exposed wood in units:
I
I r-lss4.or 08611 - 7
o
standard shop-prime
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings before installation. Veri$ that opening is correct and sill plate is
level. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
l. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound, well-nailed, free of voids, and
without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in
opening and within 3 inches of comer.
l. Shop-Primed Units: Provide manufactureds
wood surfaces only.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.02
A.
B.
C.
3.03
A.
3.04
A.
coat on exterior
2. Coordinate window installation wittr wall flashings and other built-in
components.
INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installing window
units, hardware, operatorsn accessories, and other components of the Work.
Set window units plunb, level, tme to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash.
Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
Set sill members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets, as indicated, to
provide weathertight construction.
ADruSTING
Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and
weatherstipping for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware
and moving parts.
CLEANING
Clean interior and exterior surfaces immediately after installation. Exercise care to
avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants,
dirt, and other substances.
Clean glass of factory-glazed units immediately after installing windows. Wash and
polish glass on both faces before Substantial Completion. Comply with manufactuer's
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels
from glass surfaces.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during the construction period.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
t
I
B.
C.
08611 - 8 t-7554.0r
I
I
Completion.
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I rzss4.or
END OF SECNON
oo
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect window units from damase or deterioration until the time of Substantial
08611 - 9
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t.02
A.
B.
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. The extent of hardware is shown on the drawings and in schedules.
2. Provide hardware for all doors including all items known commercially as
"builders hardware" or "finish hatdware".
3. Include lock cylinders for locks fumished in other sections where so specified.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry; installation of hardware.
2. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames.
3. Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Acceptability of substitute items, refer to Section 01600.
Standards:
l. Hardware Brands: All locks and latch sets must be one brand, all overhead
closures one brand, all floor checks one brand, all hinges one brand, all panic
devices one brand.
2. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance
with NFPA Standard No. 80. This requirement takes precedence over other
requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware which has been tested
and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the
requirements of the door and door frame labels.
3. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide UL label on
exit device indicating 'Fire Exit Hardware".
C. Fasteners:
1. Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared
for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
2. Furnish screws for hardware installation, with each hardware item. Provide
Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicbted.
l-7554.01 08710-l
3. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) scrcws to match the hardware
finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of other such
work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive
painted finish.
D. Suppliers:
l. Builders hardware iupplier shall be experienced in furnishing and servicing
hardware of this type and grade for a minimum period of 2 years.
2. The supplier shall be, or have in his employ, an experienced AHC Certified
Consultant who is available for consultation during the course of the work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule:
l. Submit copies of the hardware schedule complying with the actual construction
progress schedule requirements to each draft. Hardware schedules are intended
for the coordination of the work. Review and acceptance by the Architect or
Owner does not relieve the Contactor of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the
requirements as shown and specified.
2. Fumish a full set of cuts of the products to be used at the time of the initial
hardware submittal.
3. Final Hardware Schedule: Based on the hardware requirements indicated,
organize the final hardware schedule into "hardware sets", indicating complete
designation ofevery item required for each door or opening.
4. Fumish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate
the fabrication of other work (zuch as hollow metal frames) which may be critical
in the project construction schedule.
5. Furnish final draft of schedule after samples, manufacturer's data sheets,
coordination with shop drawings for other work, delivery schedules and similar
information has been completed and accepted.
6. Wherever needed, furnish templates to fabricators of other work which is to
receive finish hardware.
B. Key Schedules:
1. Prepare keying schedules for approval, and factory key locks in accordance with
approved schedule.
2. Furnish in triplicate, complete schedule of key marking and master key system to
Architect prior to final acceptance.
C. Requirements for Maintenance:
1. Warranty: Furnish 2 copies of the following written warranties:
a. Mechanical failure of door closures for 5 vears.b. Failure ofparts ofall hardware except door closures for I year.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t08710-2 l-7554.01
I
I 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed.
I Contol the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediatelyt replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses,
both before and after installation.
I B. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware
schedule, and include basic installation instnrction in the package.
I C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and ther hardware installer rmtil each is satisfied that the count is correct.
I l.os PRoJEcr coNDrrroNsIA. Coordinate hardware with other work.
I B. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of thicknesses,
profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for properr installation and function.
I- C. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper
locations (shop or project site) for installation.
II D. Fumish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be
factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop
I drawings of such other work, to conJirm that adequate provisions are made for the
I proper installation ofhardware.
I PART2-PRODUCTS
I z.or HARD'ARE Lrsr
I A. Fumish hardware in accordance with the hardware schedule included at the end of thist Section, and as indicated in the Drawing Door Schedule. Those schedules are intended
as a guide to indicate hardware functions.
t B. Provide all items needed for door function including fire-rating and requirements for
fire-rated doors.
I C. Mount closers, to all extent possible, out of corridors.
D. Furnish all items in US26D, Dull Chrome finish, excqrt where otherwise noted and asf foilows:r l. Trim plates may be supplied in US32D, Brushed Stainless Steel finish.
I 2. Closers: Paintdd aluminum.
I 3. Weatherstrip: Natural aluminum finish.
I E. All butts on exterior doors to be non-ferrous with srainless steel non-removable pins.
I F. All other butts to have non-rising pins.I
l-7554,01 08710-3
I
2.02 KEYING
A. Supplier shall submit final Keying Schedule with Owner for approval and obtain final
instructions in writing.
B. System:
l. Except as otherwise indicated, key to existing Great Grand Masterkey system for
the project.
2. All lock cylinden shall be "Removable Core" type.
C. Keys:
1. Furnish 3 change keys for each lock and 5 master keys.
2. The keys shall be made of nickel silver.
2.03 HARDWAREFORBIFOLDDOORS
A. General: Provide manufacturet's standard hardwarc for interior bifold doors when not
fumished as part of complete door package.
B. Operating Hardware: Provide manufacturcr's complete sets consisting of overhead
extnrded aluminum tack; captive nylon shoe or roller gurdes; rubber bumpers in tack;
and adjustable pivots, hinges, and door alignen all designed to accommodate the
number, size, thickness, and weight of door leaves indicated.
l. Provide heavy-duty sets designed for leaves weighing up to 75 lb.
C. Trim Hardware: Provide the following items as needed for operating bifold doors:
1. Pulls: Aluminum wire type pulls,4 inches wide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for
Builder's Hardware" by DHI for standard steel franes of custom steel frames as
applicable, exgepl as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with
goveming regulations.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or
into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item
completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application.
C. After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
T
t
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t08710-4 t-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
l. lnstaller may leave hardware items in place during frnishing work providing such
items are firlly masked and protected. Remove finish materials which may
penetrate maslking, without damage to hardware or its finish or replace as
required.
D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the
attachment substate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
E. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
Screw thresholds to substrate with No. l0 or larger screws, of the proper type for
permanent anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact
with the threshold metal.
At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated, set each edge ofthreshold in a seal strip
of butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutlylene mastic sealant to completely fill concealed
voids and exclude moistue. Do not plug drainage or weep holes. Remove excess
sealant.
ADruST AND CLEAN
F.
3.02
A.
3.03
T F.GENT)
C.
D.
item of hardware and each door, to ensure prop€rAdjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensur,e Prop€r
operation or function of wery irnit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication
recommended by manufacturer (graphite-type if no other recommended).
Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly
as intended for the application made.
Final Adjustment Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior
to acceptance or occupancy ofa space or area, retum to the work during the week prior
to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustnent of all hardware
items in such space and area.
Clean and re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and
finish of hardware and dbors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilation equipment.
MANUFACTURER'S ABBREVIATIONS OF LISTED TIARDWARE
(HA)
(sc)
(No)
(TR)
(PE)
(JB)
(LB)
MANTTFACTURER
Hager
Schlage Lock Co.
Nodon
Trimco
Pemko
Jaybee
Lawrence Bros.
APPROVED SUBSTITUTES
McKinney, Stanley, Bommer
No Substitution
LCN
Quality, Glynn-Johnson
Reese, Zero, Hager
Approved equal
Stanley, Hager
t-7554.01 08710-5
o
SCHEDULE
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
t
t
I
I
I
T
I
T
3.04 HARDWARE
A. Hardware Groups:
l- The following
Drawings.
HWI
Janitor Room
EACHDOORTOHAVE:
BUTTS
LOCKSET
WALL STOP
SILENCER
HW2
Mechanical Room (Fire Rated)
EACH DOOR TO }IAVE:
Ilardware Groups (HW) apply to doors as scheduled on the
1279 4.5 x4.5
AL53PD SAT x 10-025
wl276CCS
t229A
BBl279 4.5 x4.5
AL53PD SAT x 10-025
83OI REG
WI276CCS or Wl2l IES
S88D
1279 4.5 x4.5
ALI0S SAT x 1G025
wt276CCS
r?29A
BBl279 4.5 x4.5
1001 4" x 16"
l0l3 4" x 16"
83OI REG
8" x2" LDW x 0.050"
wl276CCS
1229f'.
626 IIA626 SC626 TR
TR
3 EA.
1EA.
I EA.
3 EA.
626 HA626 SCEN NO
626 TR
PE
3 EA.
I EA.
I EA.
I EA.
626 HA626 SC626 TR
TR
626 HA626 TR626 TREN NO630 TR626 TR
TR
BUTTS
LOCKSET
CLOSER
WALL ORFLOOR
STOP
SMOKE SEALI SET
HW3
Office Doors
EACH DOORTO HAVE:
3EA. BUTTS
I EA. PASSAGE SET
I EA. WALL STOP
3 EA. SILENCERS
HW4
Restroom Doors
EACH DOORTO HAVE:
3EA. BUTTS
I EA. PUSHPLATE
I EA. PULLPLATE
I EA. CLOSER
I EA. KICKPLATE
1 EA. WALL STOP
3 EA. SILENCERS
08710-6 t-7554.01
I
I Hws
BI.FOLD DOORSET
I EACHDOORTOHAVE:
I I SET BI-FOLD I{DWE. HD-640 Series LB
t 2EA. PULLS 647 626 JB
- HW6
' Vestibule Doors
I EAcHDooRToHAVE:I
3 EA. BUTTS BBL279 4.5 x 4.5 626 HA
I lEA. PUSHPLATE 100014"x 16" 626 TR
I r EA. PULL lr95-2 626 TR
I EA. CLOSER 83OI REG EN NO
r I EA. KICKPLATE 8" x2" LDW x 0.050' 630 TRI r EA. wALL sroP wl276ccs 626 TRI I SET DOOR SEAL S88D Head and Jambs PE
I Hw7I
Exterior Entry Doors
I EACHDOORTOHAVE:
I 3 EA. BUTTS BBll9l 4.5 x4.5 NRP 626 HA
I l EA. DEADLocK B460P xt2-076 626 scI I SET. PUS}YPULLBARS I73I x3'LDW 626 TR
I EA. KICKPLATE 8"x2" LDWx0.050" 630 TRI l EA. wALL sroP wr2z6ccs 626 TRI I EA. THRESHOLD I72A AL PE
I EA. WEATIIERSTRIP S88D at head PE
I zEA. WEATI#RSTIRP 3OsCRatjambs AL PE
I l EA DOORBOTTOM 3l5CN AL PE
END OF SECTION
r
I
T
I
I
I
1-7ss4.01 08710-7
I sEcrIoN o88oo
GLAZING
I PART I -GENERAL
I r.ol ST.JMMARY
A. Section Includes:
! t. Floatglass.
r 2. Safety glass.
r 3. Insulating glass rmits.
I 4. Custom mirrors.
B. Related Sections:
-
t 1. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames.
I 2. Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
I 3. Section0S6ll -WoodWindows.
I r.o2 REFERENCESI
A. ANSI 297.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety
n Ghzing Material Used in Buildings.
I B. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
I C. SIGMA No. &-7-2 - Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
-D. FGMA - Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual.II I.O3 SUBMITTALS
I A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300.
I B. Submit two samples 12 by 12 inches in size, illustating glass, unit, and coloration
r except clear glass.
- I.O4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Installer shall have minimum 5 years experience in project of similar size andr complexity.
I B. Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual: Glazing
t installation methods.
l! C. All exterior glass shall withstand 30 psf wind loa4 both positive and negative. Provide
I written certification as to compliance with this requirement.
t-7554.0r 08800-1
I
o
D. Safety Glass: Comply with Colorado State Statutes, UBC Section 5406, LJBC
Standard 54-2 and AIISI 297.1 with certiffing label on each piece.
E. Insulating Glass: Seal Standard ASTM E6-P3, Test Methods Pl and P2. Provide units
manufactured by SIGMA mernber and bearing IGCC, ALI or NCTL certification
numbers.
F. Manufacturers: Provide each type of glass and primary sealanUgasket from a single
manufacturer with not less than 5 years of swcessful experience in the production of
materials similar to those required.
I.O5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,A}IDHANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products underprovisions ofSection 01600.
C. Insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes with project site at
approximately 8,300 ft. above sea level. Comply with insulating glass fabricator's
recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
I.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide insulating glass manufacturet's written warranty, agreeing to within specified
waranty period:
L Furnish FOB project site, replacements for insulating glass units which have
defective hermetic seals (excluding that due to glass breakage).
2. Defined to include intrusion of moishue or dirt.
3. Internal condensation at temperatures above -20 degrees F.
4. Deterioration of intemal glass coatings.
5. Other visual evidence of seal faihue or performance failure.
6. Provided manufactureds instnrction for handling, installation" protection and
maintenance have been adhered to during warmnty period.
B. Warranty period is l0 years after seal date permanently imprinted on unit, but not less
than 9 years after date of zubstantial completion.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.or PRrME (NON-PROCESSED) GLASS
A. Manufacturers:
l. Cardinal IG.
2. Ford Glass Div.
3. Libby-Owens-FordCo.
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I08800-2 r-7554.01
lrI o,i,
Hl:ilffT:
I B. Float Glass: Clear: l/4 inch thick except as otherwise indicated.I 2.02 PROCESSED GLASS
II
I A. Tempered Glass:
I l. Prime glass of color and type indicated, which has been heat-treated to stengthen
J glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed stength.
2. Provide tempered glass where safety glass is indicated or where required by
I applicable laws andtodes.
B. Custom Mirrors:
! l. Clear float glass l/4 inch thick except as otherwise indicated.
I 2 ffiHTf*, copper protective coating and 2 mil thick paint coating; comply
t
1 3. Minor Edge Treannent: Provide forms of edge seatnent indicated below, with
I edges sealed after treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of
glass coating:
I,r a' Beveled Polished edge'
I
b.
Hf;H::r"
treatnent and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to
n 4. Mirror Hardware: Extruded aluminum mirror hardware, of size and profile
I recommended by mirror manufacturer, in manufacturer's standard finish,
complying with description below:
I a. Clear anodized finish.v
a 5. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for installation of mirror
'r hardware.rf
rI 2.03 FABRICATED GLASS UNITS
IiI A. Manufacturers:
0 l. Cardinal IG.
2. LOF.
il 3. PPG.
- 4. General Glass Co.r
I l-7554.01 08800-3
I
av
5. Thermo-Systems.
B. Insulating Glass:
l. Factory assembled and sealed units with minimum lDinch air space.
2. Manufacturer's printed warranty against defects in materials and workmanship
and specifically including perimeter edge seals.
3. Assemble from above specified types as indicated or scheduled.
3/4 inch for wood windows, I inch elsewhere or as indicated on the
Drawings.
Provide units manufactured rmder provisions of SIGMA and bearing
IGCC, ALI oTNCTL certification number.
Fabricate with double seals, polyisobutylene primary and silicone
secondary preferred.
Exterior Pane: Clear float except units for wood windows to be low-
emissivity pyrolybc coated on second surface.
Interior Pane: Clear, float.
Doors, sidelights, and glass, openings within 18 inches of the floor; both
panes must be tempered.
2.04 GLAZING SEALANTS/COMPOUNDS
A. General:
l. Provide grey exposed gla ng materials, unless another color is indicated, or
unless another color is selected by Architect from manufactuer's standard colon.
2. Provide hardness of materials as recomrnended by the manufacturer for the
required application and condition ofinstallation in each case.
3. Provide only compounds which are known (proven) to be fully compatible with
surfaces contacted.
B. l-Part Acrylic Glazing Sealant:
l. Solvent-base4 acrylic terpolymer, thermoplastic sealant; 95 percent of solids
acrylic; compounded specifically for glazing; complying with FS TT-S-230,
Class B, Type II. Tremco Mono or approved substitution.
C. Sealant Type: Trernco No. 440 or approved substihrtion.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUSGLAZINGMATERI.ALS
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 Durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with
sealants used.
B. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 Dwometer hardness, with proven compatibility with
sealants used.
C. Compressible filler Rod: Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic
rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and
resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection.
I
l
t
I
Ta,
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
I
I
I
I
t
I
!
Ii
l
!
l
I
I08800-4 t-7554.01
loo
I D. Cleaners, Primen and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
I PART3-DGcurroN
t 3.or EXAMINATToN
A. Check that glazing channels are free of burrs, irregularities, and debris.
I B. Check that glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections.
I C. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory.
. 3.02 PREPARATION
I A. Field Measurements:
/-t
- l. Measwe size of frame to receive glass.
I 2. Compute actual glass size, allowing for edge clearances.
I B. Preoaration ofSurfaces:
t l. Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed.
t 2. 3#l tt*r and glazing surfaces, to remove dust, oil and contaminants, and wipe
! 3.03 TNSTALLATTON
A. Cut glass with smooth staight edge to fill size required by opening.
t B. Vertical edges: ground smooth. Sharp corners eased slightly.
a! C. Maintain l/4 inch clear at top sides and edges of glass greater than 3-0" in width or
I height.
D. Set all glass with waves parallel to sill.
t E. Set all glass on setting blocks as recommended by manufacturers.
I F. Apply glazing compound" glaang sealant, glaztng tape and gaskets uniformly with
!, accurately formed comers and by levels. Remove excess compound from glass and'r sash. Use only recommended thinners, cleaners and solvents.
I G. Remove all dht and stains.
H. Install minors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
I l. Install permanent means of support at bottom and top edges with bottom support
designed to withstand minor weight and top support to prevent minor from
-' coming away from wall along top edges.
!2. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners
I installed with anchors or inserts as applicable.
i
r-7ss4.01 08800-5
3. For continuous bottom supports, provide l/8 x zl-inch setting blocks at quarter
points. For channels or other continuous supports in which water could be
tapped, provide two l/4-inch diameter weeps drilled between setting blocks.
4. Provide clips along top of mirror.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Glazing compound back and face beds shall be smight and smooth without finger
marks. Remove exsess g)a"tngcompound.
B. Clean, polish glass and restore to original condition all adjacent areas soiled during
glazing operation.
3.05 GLAZINGTYPELOCATIONS
A. All exterior gfass is insulatd.
B. Provide insulated, safety glass in all glazed exterior doors and entry sidelites adjacent
to exterior doors.
C. Provide single glazing safety glass at vestibule doors and their entry sidelites.
D. Provide safety glass at interior glazed doors, sidelites, and within l8 inches of floor.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
!
t
l
I
I
I
I
I08800-6 r-7554.01
I o
t sncrroN oe2so
r GYPSUMBOARI)
I PARTI -GENERAL
I I.OI SUMMARYa- A. Section lncludes:
t l. Gypsumdrywallconstruction.
2. Taped and sandedjoint treatnent.
) B. Related Sections:
t l. Section 06100 - Rouglr Carpentry; Wood framing system and blocking.
I 2. Section 07210 - Building Insulation; Thermal insulation.
I 3. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames; Hollowmetal frames.t
-j 4. Section 08305 - Access Doon; Metal access panels.
I 5. Section 09900 - Painting:
I r.02 REFERENCES
- A. Recommended Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum board,
t Gypsum Association GA-216.
f B. Recommendations for Installation of Steel Door Frames in steel Stud-Gypsum Board
l fire-rated partitions, Gypsum Association GA-219.
f c. ASTM C 36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
I D. ASTM C 630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
I- E. ASTM C 754 - Installation of steel framing members to receive screw-attached
I Gypsum V/allboard, Backing Board or Water Resistant Backing Board.
't F. FS SS-L-30: Lath and Board Products, Gypsum.
I r.o3 suBMrrrALS
A. Submit catalog data indicating compliance Section 01300.
I l.o4 euALrrYASsuRANcE
I A. Industry Standard: comply with applicable requirements of GA-216, "Application and
I finishing of Gypsum Board" by the Gypsum Association, except where more detailed
' or more stringent requirements are indicated, including the recommendation of the
- manufacturer.
I
I
t-75s4.01 09250-l
o
of board
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
T
B. Allowable Tolerances: l/16 inch offset befiveen planes
8'-0u for plumb, level, warp, and bow.
I.O5 DELIVERY,STORAGEANDFIANDLING
faces and l/4 inch in
A. Deliver all materials in their original unopened containers, fully identified with the
manufactureds name, brand , type, and grade.
B. Store in a dry, well ventilated enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and
exposure to the elements.
C. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTTIRERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may
be incorporated in the work include the following:
l. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
United States Gypsum Co.
Domtar Gypsum.
Georgia-Pacific Corp.
Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
B. All catalog numben and rade nanes used in this Section are those of United States
Gypsum, unless otherwise noted, and are to establish continuity and a standard of
quality.
2.02 MATERI-ALS
A. Gypsum Board:
1. 5/8 inch regular, tapered edge gypsum board, 48 inches wide and in lengths as
long as practical to minimize the number of joints. Board shall comply with
ASTM C 36.
2. 5/8 inch WR Type X, tapered edge gypsum board, 48 inch wide, lengths as long
as practical to minimize the number ofjoints. Board shall comply with ASTM C
630.
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Charurels:
1. 7i8 inch metal funing hat channels.
2. l-l/2 inches cold-rolled channels.
3. l-l/2 inches 25 gage, z-funing channels.
C. Hanger Wire:
l. No. 9 cold drawn ASTM A 641, soft, class I, galvanized steel wire.
09250-2 l-7554.01
D.
E.
I
t
I
t
to
Tiewire: 16 gage or clips.
Metal Trim: Dur-A-Bead corner reinforcemenu No. 200 series metal trim, and Perf-A-
Bead.
F. Contol Joint No. 093.
G. Joint Treatnent Perf-A-Tape Joint system; joint compound ait-purpose or ready-
mixed joint compound all-purpose; Druabond 90 or equal.
H. Fasteners: Type A and Type S-12, length as required, and 3/8 inch pan head.
PART 3. DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine the substates and the spaces to receive gypsum board, and the conditions
under which it is to be installed; and shall notiry the Contractor, in writing, of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
in a manner acceptable to the lnstaller.
3,02 INSTALLATION.GENERAL
A. Isolate gypsum board from walls, columns, beams and ceiling by use of No. 200 series
metal trim or control joint.
B. Provide sealant at edge of gypsum board at abutting walls, floors, beams, columns, and
ceilings. Seal all cutouts at all sotrnd retardant walls, air shafu and plenums.
C. In long partition runs, provide contol joints no more than 30'-0" o.c. Provide conhol
joints in partitions at locations of construction change. Veriff control joint locations
with Architect.
D. Ends and edges of all gypsum wallboard shall occru over framing members.
E. End joints shall be staggered at least l'-0".
F. Do not auach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including
joists and headers. Instead, float gypsum panels over these members using resilient
channels or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
G. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by
manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating intemal corner
consEuction.
H. Screws shall be staggered on adjoining edges where ends occur on same framing
members.
I. Drive screws home with the heads slightly below surface in a dimple formed by the
crowned face of the driving tool.
J. Care shall be taken to avoid breaking the paper surface.
l-7554.01
t
f
T
I
I
T
I
l
I
I
t
I
t
I
I 09250-3
L.
M.
N.
o.
P.
a.
Provide Dur-A-Bead at all external 90 degree corners and Perf-A-Tape at all intemal
comers and joints. Provide Perf-A-Bead at external cornen of 120 degree or greater.
Apply fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
Provide No. 200-4 series metal trim where all edges adjoin dissimilar material and
elsewhere as indicated.
Finish all exposed joints and screw heads with all purpose compound on interior
applications.
The building shall be heated well in advance of, during, and following the applications
of wallboard, to maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 50 degrees F. and
ventilation provided to eliminate excessive moisture.
Install specified closures at openings of all fire rated walls or walls enclosing return air
plenums.
Reinforce each interior hollow metal window frame mullion from floor to window
frame head at locations where window length exceeds l0'-0"; and where the window
frame does not extend to the floor.
GYPSI.'M WALLBOARD INSTALLATION
Install gypsum board in accordance with USG Bulletin SA 923, ASTM C 754, and
GA-216 as applicable: Have a copy of bulletins on the job. Anchoring of floor and
ceiling runners, securing ofstuds to runners and spacing ofscrews shall be as required
by indicated bulletins and ASTM C 754. Framing of studs at openings shall be in
accordance with GA-2 I 9.
All partitions shall be constnrcted in accordance with the drawing legend and shall
confomr to the fire-rating as indicated.
One-hour wood stud walls and non-rated walls shall be constructed with single layer
5/8 inch Type X or 5/8 inch WR Type X Gypsum Board each side of 3-518 inches
metal studs spaced at 16 inches o.c. conforming to GA-WP-1200. Board shall be screw
auached andjoints and screw head finished.
Interior ceilings shall be constructed with single layer 5/8 inch gypsum board secrned
to 7/8 inch metal funing channels unless otherwise noted. Metal furring channels
spaced at 24 inches o.c., secured to l-ll2 inches cold-rolled channels with 15 gage tie
wire or clips. l-l/2 inches cold-rolled channels spaced at 4'-0u o.c. and supported at
maximum 4'-0" o.c. with No. 9 gage wire.
Chase walls at plumbing or similar chases shall be constructed with single layer 5/8
inch Type X or 5/8 inch WR Type X gypsum board one side of studs spaced at 16
inches o.c.
INSTALLATION OF WALLBOARD FINISHING
General:
l. Apply teatnent at.gypsum board. joints Oqth directions), flanges of trim
accessories, penetations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as
required to prepare work for finishes.
t
I
l
t
t
I
I
l
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
3.03
A.
3.04
A.
B.
c.
D.
09250-4 l-7554.0r
B.
t
t
t
I
I
0
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
J
I
I
t
t
I
3.05
A.
2. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using type of compound
recommended by manufactruer.
a. Apply joint .tape at.joints between qypsyn b-oards, expept where trim
accessory is indicated. Tape in comer beads and termination metal (except
exposed type).b. Apply joint compound in three (3) coats (not including prefill of openings
in base), and sand between last two (2) coats and after last coat.c. Review and coordinate with finish schedules and sections to assure proper
conditions to receive finishes as required and specified.d. All exposed gypsum wall board to be taped and sanded whether or not
scheduled to receive finish.
Partial Finishing:
l. Omit third coat and sanding on concealed work which is indicated for wallboard
finishing, including sound, fue, air, and smoke-rated work.
PROTECTION OF WORK
Installer shall advise Contactor of required procedures of protection of the gypsum
wallboard work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the
construction period.
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01 09250-5
I
!
I sEcTroN 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
'
PARTI-GENERAL
I l.0l suMlvIARY
A. Section lncludes:
| 1. Acoustical tile material and installation.
2. Suspended metal grid systems.
I B. Related sections:
l. Section 09250 - GypsrunBoard; Suspended substrate.
2. Section 10652 - Folding Panel Partitions; Ceiling tack in ceiling;
I 3. Division 15 - Mechanical; Air diffirsion devices in ceiling.t a Division 16 - Electrical; Light fixtures in ceiling.II r.oz REFERENcES
I A. ASTM C 635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel
I Ceilings.
r B. ASTM C 636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
I andlay-inPanels.
I.O3 SUBMTTALSta A. Samples:
I l. Submit three 12 inch square samples of each type of acoustical material to
; illustrate color and range ofappearance.
I 2. Submit three 12 inch long samples of each suspension system member, moldings,
, andhangers.
B. Manufacturer'sLiterature:
a l. Submit for review the manufacture/s product data
I 2. Submit for review the manufacturer's recommendation for installation of
! suspension system.
I
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacture of specified ceiling products
t
I
r-7ss4.0r
with three years minimum experience.
09510-1
o
experience,
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Installer: Company with three yea$ minimun
projects similar in scope to this project.
C. Fire Hazard Classification: UL tested. listed
in ceiling installation for
and labeled as "Class 0-25". smoke
developed of 50 or less.
I.O5 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, and until
wetwork is completed and dry, and until work above ceilings is completed.
B. Ambient conditions of temperatue and humidity shall be near those indicated for final
occupancy.
I.06 EXTRAMATER]ALS
A. At time of completing the installation" deliver stock of maintenance materials to the
Owner. Fumish full size units matching the units installed, packaged with protective
covering for storage, and identified with appropriate labels.
B. Acoustical Units: Furnish an amount equal to l0 percent of the amount installed of
each type, pattern, color, but not less than 10 units. Do not use for replacement of
damaged units prior to building occupancy or substantial completion whichever occurs
later.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI ACOUSTICAL UMTS
A. Manufacturers: Products offered by manufacturers to comply with requirements
include the following:
l. Armstong Cork Co.
2. Approved substitution underprovisions ofSection 01600.
B. Ceiling Panels:
l. Pattem: Minaboard, Fissured.
2. Type/Size: No. 7558, 24by 48 by 5/8, Lay-in.
3. Finish: Factory applied, white vinyl-latex, washable.
4. NRC: 0.50 to 0.60.
5. STC: 35 to 39.
6. Light Reflectance: LR-l (Over 75 percent).
2.02 SUSPENSIONSYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
l. As indicated below.
I
I
I
I
I09510-2 t-7554.01
!
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
o
substituti
o
016002. Approved ons under provisions of Section
B. Grid: ASTM C 635, intemrediate non-fire rated components die cut and interlocking;
types as indicated below.
C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, and edge moldings required for suspended
grid system.
D. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating.
E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to
rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical
components with maximum deflection of l/360.
F. Suspension Types:
L Exposed "T".
2.03 HANGERWIRE
A. No. 12 gage galvanized soft steel wire.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions under which ceiling work is to be performed and notifr Confactor,
in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
Wires shall not splay more than 5 inches in a 4 foot vertical drop.B.
c.
D. Provide wall angles at joining with all vertical surfaces, securely fastened in place.
E. Ceilings shall have accessibility at any location.
3,02 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED SYSTEMS
A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C 636, manufacture/s instructions and as
supplemented in this Section.
B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of l/360 maximum.
C. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers
with other work.
D. Supply hangers or inserts for installation as required with instructions for their correct
placement. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required.
E. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
Provide I No. 12 gage wire hanger at each corner of each lay-in light fixture in addition
to other support wires.
t-7554.01 09510-3
K.
L.
3.03
A.
B.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
oo
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the
nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the exha distance.
Locate system on room a:ris according to reflected plan.
Do not support components on main runners or cross nurneni if weight causes total
dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixffie loads by supplementary
hangers located within inches ofeach corner; or support components independently.
Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
Install edge pslding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest
practical lengths. Miter comers. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other
intemrptions. Field rabbett tile where bullnose comenl or round obstn:ctions occur,
provide preformed closers to march edge molding.
Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detimental to
appearance and function.
Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twisq wary and dents.
ADruSTMENT AND CLEA}IING
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including rim, edge molding, and
suspension members; comply with manufacturers instnrctions for cleaning and touch
up of minor finish damage.
Remove and replace work which cannot be satisfactorily cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECNON
095104 t-7554.01
I
:
t PAR'I-.ENERAL
I l.0l SUMMARY
A. Section lncludes:
sEcTroN 09650
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
l. Preparationofsubstatesurfaces.
2. Application of resilient tile.
3. Cleaning of resilient floor surfaces.
2. Section 03560 - Cementitious Floor Patching; repair of existing concrete slabs.
3. Section09665 - Resilient SheetFlooring.
4. Section 09678 - Resilient Wall Base amd Accessories.
t
T
I r.02 QUATITYASSIJRANCEI- A. Installer Qualification. Minimum 3 years experience installing resilient floor covering
I material.
l| I.O3 REFERENCES
t A. Codes/Standards:a l. Conform to the following fire test data:
a- Flame spread - ASTM E 84 - 75 or less.b. NBS Smoke - ASTM E 662 - 450 or less.
- c. Critical Radiant Flux - ASTM E 648 - 0,45 wattVcm2 or more.
u B. Federal Specifications:
I B. Related Sections:
'r l. Section 03300 - Concrete Work; finish towelling of floor slab.
I
i
I
I L FS SS-T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl-Asbestos.
2. FS L-F-450 - Flooring, Vinyl Plastic.
I r.o4 suBMrrrAls
I
A. Submittals in conformance with Section 01300.
I
l-7554.01I 09650-l
Samples:
l. Submit minimum of 3 samples of each type and color or pattem of resilient
flooring and base material, including custom cut decorative base.
2. Mark samples with name of Contractor, project identification, and area where
materials are to be used.
Maintenance Data and Instructions: Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the
worh fumish copies of a list of recommended maintenance products and recommended
maintenance methods and procedures.
Maintenance Materials :
l. Fumish additional flooring covering materials for replacement and maintenance.
2. Fumish materials of each size, color, pattern, and type of material included in the
work.
3. Fumistr materials at the rate of two cartons for each color and pattern of flooring.
PRODUCT DELTVERY A}{D STORACE
Deliver materials to project site in manufactr:rer's original, unopened containers with
labels indicating brand nanes, colon and patterns, and quality designations legible and
intact.
Do not open containers or nemove markings until materials are inspected and accepted.
Store and protect accepted materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and
recommendations.
Unless otherwise directed, store materials in original containers at not less than 70
degrees F for not less than 24 houn immediately before installation.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Spaces to receive resilient floor covering shall be maintained at 70 degrees F minimum
at floor level for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion of
tile installation.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTLiPGRS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may
be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
l. Vinyl Composition Tile:
a. AmrsEong World Industries, lnc.b. Arzrock Floor Product Div., Araock Industries.c. GAF Corp., Floor Products Div.d. Kentile Floor, Inc.
B.
I
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
D.
1.05
A.
D.
1.06
A.
B.
c.
I
I
I
l
T
I096s0-2 1-7554.01
loo
n 2. Approved substitutions under the provisions of Section 01600.
| 2.02 TILE MATERTAL
t A. B#.trtr 12 inch by l/8 inch vinyl composition tile FS SS-T-312 B (l) Type IV,
I B. Pattem: Armstong Imperial Texture Premium Excelon Series, Stontex Pattem or
I approvedsubstitution.
2.03 APPLICATIONMATERIALS
a A. General:
I l. Provide type and brands of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
I covering material for the conditions of the installation'
I 2. Provide below-grade adhesive for below-grade applications.
t 3. Primer: Type and brand recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
I B. Crack Filler: Type and brand recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
C. Wax, Cleaner, or other Finishing Material: As recommended by floor covering
I manufacturer for the particular type of flooring material.
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
I 3.ol EXAMTNATI.N
r A. Examine all work over which tile is to be placed and report to the Contractor, any and
I all conditions which will affect the satisfactory execution of the work or endanger its
pennanency.
I 3.02 PREPARATToN
A. Remove grease, dirt, and other substances from subfloors.
I B. Lay flooring only after slabs are suffrciently free from moisture to ensure complete
adhesion.
I C. Inspect subfloorforholes, cracks, and smoothness.
D. Do not proceed with laying until surfaces are smooth, level, and all holes and cracks
I arefilleil.
E. Starting of floor laying shall indicate acceptance of subfloor, and installer of resilient
| flooring shall be responsible for smoothness and levelness of finished floor.
r F. Stack tiles in rooms for 24 hours before laying.
t 3.03 LAYTNGFLooRTNc
A. Apply adhesive and lay flooring, and special items in accordance with manufacturer's
I sti'iaara specifications.
l-7554.01 09650-3I
Make joints as invisible as possible.
o
and Serms
t
I
I
I
B.
c.Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce minimurr
number of seams and symmetrical tile pattems.
D. Install symmetrically about center lines of rooms or areas.
l. Minimum tile width l/2 inch full size at room or areaperimeter.
2. Square grid pattern with all joints aliped.
3. Pattern grain parallel for all units and parallel to long dimension unless otherwise
directed.
E. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is
dissimilar.
F. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to
produce tightjoints.
G. Immediately after floor covering is placed in a room or enclosed area, it shall be
thoroughly rolled with a heavy floor roller desiped for the purpose.
H. Replace all broken or danraged items immediately prior to completion of the building.
I. Tile installed in any individual room or area shall be from same color run.
3.04 CLEANING A}TD POLISHING
A. Clean tile as recommended by manufacturer of tile used.
B. Upon completion" leave floors and base clean, smooth and free fiom buckles, cracks,
and projecting edges.
3.05 RESILIENT TILE COLOR SCHEDI.JLE
A. Location: Break Room/Adjacent Two Storage Rooms/Closed Room.
l. Color: No. 52143 -SandstoneTan.
B. Location: Break Room:
l. Color: No. 52133 - Natural Verdigris.
C. Location: Break Room:
l. Color: No. 52126 - Gravel Blue.
D. Location: Entry.
l. Color: No. 52136- CobbleGranule.
E. More than one color, or border, or accents may be used within spaces.
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
l
I
I09650-4
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
T
I
I PARrI-.ENERAL
I 1.01 SUMMARY
sEcrIoN 09665
RESILIENT SIIEET FLOORING
I
I
A. Section Includes:
I l. Preparation ofsubshate surfaces.t-
2. Application of heat seamed resilient sheet flooring.
t 3. Cleaning ofresilient floor surfaces.
I B. Related Sections:
I l. Section 01020 - Allowances.
2. Section 03300 - Concrete Work; Finish trowelling of floor slab.
3. Section 03560 - Cementitous Floor Patching.
4. Section 09678 - Resilient Wall Base and Accessories.
I I.O2 FLOORINGALLOWANCE
I
A. Selection and Ordering: Fumish resilient sheet flooring as selected by Architect and in
I such quantities as provided for under Division 1 Section "Allowances" and other
I general provisions ofthe Contract.
I B. Flooring supplier's responsibilities shall be as follows:I
l. Submittals: Submit through Contactor required product data final flooring
I schedule, and samples as specified in this Section, unless otherwise indicated.Ir
2. Construction Schedule: Inform Contactor promptly of estimated times and dates
t that will be required to process submittals, to deliver flooring, and to perform!' other work associated with furnishing flooring for purposes of including this data
r in construction schedule. Comply with this schedule.
, 3. Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as required to coordinate
n flooring with other work in respect to installation.
. 4. Product Handling: Package, identifr, deliver flooring specified in this Section.
I C. Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows:f
l. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for flooring in sarne manner as
submittals for other work.I
I rlss4.ol 09665-l
2. Consfiuction Schedule: Cooperate with flooring supplier in establishing
scheduled dates for submittals and delivery. Incorporate in constnrction schedule
the times and dates related to funrishing flooring by supplier.
3. Coordination: Coordinate flooring with other Work. Furnish flooring supplier or
manufacturer with shop drawings of other work where required or requested.
Veriff completeness and suitability with supplier.
4. Product Handling: Inventory flooring jointly with representative of flooring
supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials.
5. Installation Information: The general types of flooring required for this Project
are indicated in this Section in order to establish Contactor's costs for
installation and other work not included in allowance.
6. No adjusrnents in Contract sum will be made for costs other than those covered
by the allowances for subsequent increases or decreases in quantity of flooring
that do not exceed 5 percent.
I.O3 REFERENCES
A. Codes and Standards:
l. Conform to the following fue test data:
a. NBS Smoke - ASTM E 662 - 450 or less.b. Critical Radiant Flux - ASTM E 648 - 0.45 wattVcm2 o, -or", Class l.
B. FederalSpecifications:
1. FS L-F475A - Floor Covering, Surface (Tile and Roll) with backing.
I.O4 STIBMITTALS
A. Manufacturels Data:
l. Certificationsrequired:
a. Certiff that products furnished for this project are asbestos free.b. Certifo that products meet or exceed specification requirements.
Submitals in conformance with Section 01300.
Samples:
l. Submit minimum of 3 samples of each type and color or pattern of resilient
flooring and base material.
2. Mark samples with name of Contactor, project identification, and area where
materials are to be used.
B.
C.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I09665-2 t-7554.0r
I o
I D. Maintenance Data and Instnrctions:
t 1. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the worlg firmish copies of a list of
recommended maintenance produCts and recommended maintenance methods
! andprocedures.
E. MaintenanceMaterials:
I l. Furnish additionat flooring covering materials for replacement and maintenance.
r 2. Furnish materials of each size, color, pafiem, and type of material included in the
I Work.
3. Fumish materials at the rate of two cartons for each color and pattern of flooring.Ill 4. Fumish materials at the rate of twenty linear feet for each color and type of base.
tr I.O5 QUALITYASSURA].ICErA. InstallerQualifications:
l. Minimum 3 years experience installing resilient floor covering material.
2. Installer shall be certified by the solid vinyl sheet flooring manufacturer as
competent in the heat welded seaming technique.
I.06 PRODUCT DELIVERYAND STORAGE
I A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with
labels indicating brand names, colors and patterru, and qualrty designations legible and
- intact.
- B. Do not open containers or remove markings until materials are inspected and accepted.
I C. Store and protect accepted materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and! recommendations.
I D. Unless otherwise directed, store materials in original containers at not less than 70
I degrees F for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation.
I I.O7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
t A. Spaces to receive resilient floor covering shall be maintained at 70 degrees F minimum
at floor level for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion ofI tile installation.I
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
I 2.0r MANUFACTURERS
I A. Armstrong.
t B. Substitutions subject to Owner's intensive chemical resistance product testing for
I rlssl.or
I
I
I acceptance.
09665-3
o
FLOORING
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.03
A.
Gage: .080" nominal.
Width: 6'.
Federal Specification L-F475, Type II, Grade A: Meet wear layer gage and
compositioq flexibility, indentation and solvent-resistance requirements.
Composition: Homogeneous vinyl with through grained vinyl granules.
Pattern: Extend unifomrly through entire thickness of flooring.
Colors: As selected by Architect.
APPLICATION MATERJALS
General:
l. Provide type and brands of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
covering material for the conditions of the installation.
2. Provide below-grade adhesive for below-grade applications.
Primer:
l. Type and brand recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
Crack Filler:
l. Type and brand rccommended by floor covering manufacturer.
Adhesives (Cements): Watet-resistant, stabilized type ari recommended by
manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering products and subsfrate conditions
indicated.
E. Wax, Cleaner, or other Finishing Material:
l. As recommended by floor covering manufhcturer for the particular type of
flooring material.
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine all work over which sheet flooring is to be placed and report to the
Confractor, any and all conditions which will affect the satisfactory execution of the
work or endanger its permanency.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove grease, dirt, and other substances from substrate.
B.
D.
09665-4 t-7554.01
c.
D.
t
I
I
I
I
I
B. Lay flooring only
adhesion.
o
after slabs are sufficiently free from to ensure complete
Inspect subfloor for holes, cracks, and smoothness.
Do not proceed with laying until surfaces ate smooth, level, and all holes and cracks
are filled.
Starting of floor laying shall indicate acceptance of subfloor, and installer of resilient
flooring shall be responsible for smootlness and levelness of finished floor.
5. Cap integral base with an approved cap strip installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce minimum
number of seams and symmetical tile pattems.
Terminate resilient sheet flooring at centerlines ofdoor openings where adjacent floor
finish is dissimilar.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.
Install edging strips where edge of tile flooring is exposed.
Immediately after floor covering is placed in a room or enclosed area, it shall be
thoroughly rolled with a heavy floor roller designed for the purpose.
Replace all broken or damaged items immediately prior to completion of the building.
CLEANING AND POLISHING
Clean flooring :N reconrmended by manufacturer of product use.
Upon completion, leave floors and base clean, smooth and free from buckles, cracks,
and projecting edges.
o
moisture
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions with a minimum of
seams using:
l. Conventional full spread method adhesive.
2. Heat welded seams.
3. Provide integral cove base.
4. Extend flooring material 5" up the wall supported by a cove stick with a 3/4"
radius.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.04
A.
B.
t-7554.01
END OF SECTION
09665-5
I
I
t
I PARrI-.ENERAL
I l.0l SUMMARY
SECTION 09678
RESILIENT WAI-.L BASE AI\D ACCESSORIES
I
I
, A. This Section includes the following:
I l. Resilient wall base.
I 2. Resilient flooring accessories.
u 3. Resilient carpet accessories.
I B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
l. Division 9 Section "Resilient Sheet Flooring."
2. Division 9 Section "Carpeting."
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
I A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
I Specification Sections.
I B. Product data for each type ofproduct specified.
;| C. Samples of manufacturer's standard sample sets in form of pieces cut from each type of
a product specified showing full range of colors and patterns available.
I 1.03 QUALTTYASSURANCEI'I A. Single-Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product
t specified from a single source with resources to provide products ofconsistent quality
t in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
I B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following firet performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
I authorities having jurisdiction.t
I
t t-zss4.ol
l. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E 648.
09678 - I
2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and
containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and
shipping and handling instnrctions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with anbient temperatures
maintained between 50 deg F and 90 deg F.
C. Move products into spaces where they wiil be installed at least 48 hours in advance of
installation.
1.05 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum teNnpemture of 70 deg F in spaces to receive products specified in
this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installatioq during installation, and for not
less than 48 hours after installation. After this perio4 maintain a temperature of not
less than 55 deg F.
B. Do not install products until they are at the sarne temperature as that of the space where
they are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
l
I
I
1.06
A.
r.07
A.
SEQLIENCING AND SCIIEDULING
Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other constnrction to
minimize possibility of d"mage and soiling during remainder of construction period.
EXTRAMATERIALS
Deliver extra materials to Owner. Fumish exfra materials matching products installed
as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with
labels clearly describing contents.
B. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereofofeach
different type and color of resilient wall base installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering floor
accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limted to, the
following:
09678 - 2 t-7554.01
I
I
t
1. Armshong.
2. Mercer.
3. Approvedsubstitution.
I z.oz RESILIENT *ALL BA'E
I A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I.
t B. Style:
I 1. AtResilientTileFlooringAreas: Covewithtop-settoe.
I 2. At Carpeted Areas: Staight with no toe.
I C. Minimum Nominal Thickness: l/8 inch.
I D. Heighr 2-ll2 inches.
I E. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer but not less than 100 feet
I F. Exterior Corners: Premolded.
I G. Interior Corners: Premolded or formed on job.
a H. Color and Pattern:
I l. Staight Base: Armstong No. 60, Jet Black.
I 2. Coved Base: Armstrong No. 74 Shoreline.
- 2.03 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
I A. ProductDescription:
l. Carpet edge for glue down applications, Mercer 705.
2. Reducer stip for resilient flooring, Mercer 633.
3. Tile/carpet joiner, Mercer 150.
I B. Material: Solid vinyl.
I C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for
t rubber accessories complying with requirements indicated.
t
I
I
I r-7ss4.ol 09678 - 3
2,04 INSTALLATIONACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as reconrmended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Trowelable pnderlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-
cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for
applications indicated.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient
flooring product and subsfate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
T
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
D.
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
B.
c.
E.
3.03
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas wherp installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with
Installer present, to veriff that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation
and comply with manufacturer's rcquirements and those specified in this Section.
PREPARATION
General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing
substrates indicated to receive products indicated.
Use towelable leveling and patching compormds per manufacturers directions to fill
cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by
using a terr.azzn or concrete grinder, a dntm sander, or a polishing machine equipped
with a heavy-duty wire brush.
Broom or vacuum clean subshates to be covered immediately before installing
products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for
moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Apply concrete slab primer, if recornmended by flooring manufacturer, prior to
applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacture/s directions.
INSTALLATION
General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according
to manufacturer's installation directions.
09678 - 4 t-7554.01
t
I B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, caseworh and other permanent
fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long
t as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length ofeach piece,
a with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vedical substrates.
I 1. On inegular substrates, filI voids along top edge of resilient wall base with
r manufacturels recommended adhesive filler material.
t 2. Install exterior corne$ before installing staight pieces.
3. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible byr i,'HHtr Tffil:uf:;r*T[1,1":::,:Jfl11ffi,1H"!";iJlfi:#fr"
I C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials oftype indicated andt bond to substates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that
I otlerwise would be exposed.
I 3.04 cLEANINcANDPRoTECTToN
I
t A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation:
l. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner
t recommended by manufactruers of resilient product involved.
.. 2. Sweeporvacuumfloorthoroughly.
t 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
I 4. Dampmop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil.a
- B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from constnrction
I operations and placement of equipment and fixtures druing remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient
I product involved.
I l. Apply protective floor polish to resilient accessories that are free from soil,
t visible adhesive, and surface blemishes.
2. Use commercially available metal, cross-linked, acrylic product acceptable to
resilient accessory manufacturer.r 3. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
t 4. Cover resilient accessories on floors and stairs with undyed, untreated building
paper until inspection for Substantial Completion.
I
I r-zss4.or 09678 - 5
C. Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled
for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of
Project. Clean products using method recommended by manufacturer.
l. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation, prior
to cleaning.
2. Reapply floorpolish after cleaning.
END OF SECTION
09678 - 6 l-7554.01
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
t
I
I
SECTION 09680
CARPETING
PART I - GENERAL
1.OI STJMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Carpeting materials.
2. Direct glue-down installation.
3. Carpet types schedule.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01020 - Allowances.
2. Section 03300 - Concrete Work; Finish trowelling of floor slab.
3. Section 03560 - Cementitious Floor Patching.
4. Section 09665 - Resilient Sheet Flooring.
5. Section 09678 - Resilient Wall Base and Accessories.
I.O2 CARPETALLOWANCE
A. Selection and Ordering: Furnish carpet flooring as selected by Architect and in such
quantities as provided for under Division I Section "Allowances" and other general
provisions of the Contact.
B. Carpet supplier's responsibilities shall be as follows:
1. Submittals: Submit tbrough Contractor required product data" final carpet
schedule, and samples as specified in this Section, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Construction Schedule: Infomr Contactor promptly of estimated times and dates
that will be required to process submitlals, to deliver carpet, and to perform other
work associated with fumishing carpet for purposes of including this data in
construction schedule. Comply with this schedule.
3. Coordination and Templates: Assist Confactor as required to coordinate
carpeting with other work in respect to installation.
4. Product Handling: Package, identifi, deliver carpeting specified in this Section.
C. Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows:
t-7554.01 09680-1
o
for carpeting in same manner as
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
l. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals
submittals for other work.
2. Construction Schedule: Cooperate with carpeting supplier in establishing
scheduled dates for zubmittals and delivery. Incorporate in constnrction schedule
the times and dates related to fimishing carpeting by supplier.
3. Coordination: Coordinate flooring with other Work. Fumish carpeting supplier
or manufacturpr with shop drawings of other work where required or requested.
Veriff completeness and suitability with supplier.
4. Product tlandling: lnventory carpeting jointly with representative of carpet
supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials.
5. Installation Information: The general types of carpeting required for this Project
are indicated in this Section in order to establish Contractor's costs for
installation and other work not included in allowance.
6. No adjusunents in Contract sum will be made for costs other than those covered
by the allowances for subsequent increases or decreases in quantity of carpeting
that do not exceed 5 percent.
I.O3 REFERENCES
A. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRJ):
l. Commercial Carpet lnstallation Standard CRI 104.
2. lndoor Air Quality Testing Program.
B. ASTM Standards as referenced herein.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for carpet material and installation accessory specified.
l. Submit manufacturer's prinrcd data on physical characteristics, durability, fade
resistance, and fire-test-resporute characteristics.
2. Submit methods of installation.
B. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes,
showing the full range of color, texfiue, and paftem variations expected. Prepare
Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with
manufacturer's nane, material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on
Drawings and carpet schedule. Submit the following:
l. l2-inch-square Samples of carpet material required.
2. l2-inch Samples of each type of exposed edge stipping and accessory item.
09680-2 l-7554.01
t
I C. Maintenance data for carpet and cushion to include in the operation and maintenance
I manual specified in Division l. Include the following:
I l. Methods for mainaining carpet and carpet cushion, including manufacturer's
I recommended frequency for maintaining carpet.
I 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
I finishes and performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures.
I l.o5 euALrrY AssuRANcE
I A. lnstaller Qualifications:
| 1. Installer: Firm with not less than 2 years of carpeting experience, similar to work
of this section.
I 2. Manufacturer: Firm (carpet mill) with not less than five (5) years of production
experience wittr carpet manufacnuing, and whose published product literature
clearly indicates ge-neral compliance of products with requirements of this
I section.
I
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AllD HANDLING
t A. Carpet shall be delivered in unopened and adequately marked containers.
I B. Store under cover in well ventilated spaces asi soon as delivered; protect from damage,I dirt. stains and moisture.
I I.O7 WARRANTY
I A. Carpet:I I frTtri*ifl$::Xi3:#sTJ"*f f;5rg*":l*"ii,*l$1,T,'l*T"qi,,il
I lffHllf:l.*at may appear for a period of I year from the date of the completed
2. The manufacturer shall provide a written warrdnty that the material is in
accordance with the specifications in a form approved by the Architect.
B. WarrantyCertification:
I l. Provide separate written warranties for the carpet and the sealant.
2. Waranties shall be sigrred by the Contractor, manufacturer and the Installer.
I l.o8 EXTRAMATERTAL
I
A. The Owner will view all carpet scraps and retain chosen for future repairs.
B. Selected remnants, usable scrap and overage shall be packaged, and identified.
I C. The balance shall be removed from the job site.
I
I r-7ss4.ol 09680-3
PART2. PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. TypeA-Carpet:
l. Roll goods,level loop.
2. Application: Direct gluedown.
2.02 PEPJORMANCE
A. Flammability: ASTM E 648: Radiant panel tesg class I.
B. Electrostatic Propensity: Anti-static warranted safe for office use with electronic
equipment.
C. Tuft Bind: Not less than 20-lb. avef,age, ASTM D 1335 57.
D. Heavy Traffic: Meet or exceed FHA Standards for heavy traffc.
2.03 ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufactuer for installation over specified
substrate and shall be approved by the Owner.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistanl nonstaining type to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for
installed carpet as recommended by the carpet manufacfirer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Prior to installatioru all minor surface irrcgularities shall be repaired and the floor shall
be thoroughly cleaned with all grit and dirt removed. Access floor installer to provide
clean, flat, and tnre conditions for all panels. Start ofwork constitutes acceptance of
floor and responsibility for finished result.
B. Level subfloor within l/4 inch in l0 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or
grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rougb areas. Fill
depressions.
l. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in' subfloor as recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, \r'arq oil, or silicone.
D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloon to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning,
examine subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t09680-4 l-7554.01
I
I l. Concrete-Subfloor Preparation: Apply concrete-slab primer, according to
I manufacturet's directions, where recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
I 3.02 INSTALLATION
I A. All carpet shall be delivered to the job site in original mill wrappings with each
container having register number tags attached.
I B. Where partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of finished carpet
floor, install carpet before installation of these items.
I C. All carpet to run in one direction.
I
D. Match pattern at seams.
E. At doorways, center s€ams under door in closed position.
I F. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, tluesholds, and nosings. Bind or
1; seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
I G. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
I
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
I I. Install approved carpet bar where carpet adjoins dissimilar material.
I J. Carpet is to be installed over new and existing concrete, rmless otherwise indicated.
t 3.03 cLEANING
t A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation.
I l. Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
I recommended by carpet manufacturer.
? Remove protruding yams from carpet surface.I- 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
I 3.04 PRorEcrroN
- A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation."
I B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
I manufacturer and Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the
I time of Substantial Completion.
I
ENDOFSECTToN
I :.-lss4.or 09680-s
I
t SECTION 09900
PAINTING
t PARrI-.ENERAL
I l,0l SUMMARY
r A. Section Includes:
I B. WorkNot Included:
t l. Shop priming of ferrous metal items and fabricated components included under
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Complete painting of all surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building,
except as otherwise specified or indicated in the Finish Schedule.
2. Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed
steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under t}te
mechanical and electrical work. Coordinate with Division 15 and 16 Installers
for color coding.
3. Mechanical grilles, registers, louvers (except aluminum or prefinished items),
panel covers and frames for electrical work.
4. Paint equipment mounted on roof and exterior wall including aluminum and
factory finished items.
5. Scaffolding required for execution of work under this Section.
their respective sections.
2. Pre-finished items.
3. Metal toilet partitions.
4. Acoustic materials
5. Anodized aluminum.
6. Stainless steel.
7. Bronze and brass.
8. Light fixtures, switches and convenience outlets.
9. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, or over irny equipment
identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates or code-required
labels including:
a. Valve and damper operators.b. Linkages.c. Sensing devices.d. Motor and fan shafts.
I l-75s4.0r 09900-l
c
paint
t
caseworlq
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
t
I
t
T
I
t
10. Do not
fixtures.
areas behind permanently mounted plywood panels, or
C. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following
generally inaccessible areas:
1. Foundption spaces.
2. Furred areas.
3. Utility nmnels.
4. Pipe spaces.
5. Duct shafts.
D. Related Sections:
1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; Shop.prime painting.
2. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry; Finishing of millwork.
3. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames; Shopprime painting.
4. Division 15 - Mechanical; Pipe identification taping and stenciled painting.
5. Division 16 - Elecrical; Raceway identification taping and stenciled painting.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. "Painting Specifications" by Painting and Decorating Contactors of Americq "Type l,
Recommended Jobso.
1.03 DEFINITION
A. The term "paint" includes emulsions, enamels, oil paints, sealers, stains, varnishes, and
similar coatings.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each paint system specified, including primers.
l. Provide the manufachuer's technical information including label analysis and
instnrctions for handling, storage, and application ofeach material proposed for
use.
2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and
application. Identifr each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and
general classification.
Submit color samples for each kind and color of paint required.
Prepare saurples on hardboard in duplicate (approximately 8 inches by l0 inches) for
approval.
B.
c.
09900-2 l-7554.01
T
t
o
natural
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
It
I
t
I
t
I
II
l. Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8 inch samples of
wood surfaces.
wood finish on actual
D. After approval, one sample of each kind and color of approved sample will be returned.
E. Do no painting until samples are approved.
l.0s QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed
painting system applications similar in matirial and extent to those indicated for the
Project:that have rbsulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Include on label ofcontainers:
l. Manufactwer's name.
2. Type of paint.
3. Manufacturey's stock number.
4. Color.
5. Instructions for reducing, where applicable.
D. Field Quality Control:
1. Review of first finished room, space, or item of each color scheme is required by
Architect for color, texture, and workmanship.
2. Use first acceptable room, space or item as project standard for each color
scheme.
3. For spray application, paint surface not smaller than 100 sq. ft. as project
standard.
I.06 PRODUCTDELIVERY, STORAGEANDHANDLING
A. Deliver paint materials in original unopened containers with labels and tags intact,
ready-mixed except for minor tinting and thinning done on the job. Provide the highest
quality, and purpose for which manufactured.
B. Secondary products not specified by name and required for thejob such as shellac shall
be "best grade" or "first line" products.
C. Store rnaterials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperatures of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Maintain containers
used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
t-7554.01 09900-3
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and
waste daily. Take necessary measurEs to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fue and health hazads resulting from handling, mixing, and
application.
I.O7 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperatr.ue of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F
(32 degrees C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperature arc between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F
(35 degrees C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; or at temp€ratures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; or
to danrp or wet surfaces.
l. Painting may continue during inclement weather if sufaces and areas to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
I.O8 EXTRAMATERIAL
A. Fumish Owner clean" new, one-quart cans of paints used in the work, well marked,
indicating location of each color and type material used. One can if less than 1,000 sq.
ft., 2 cans if over 1,000 sq. ft. covered.
PART2. PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Except as otherwise specified, materials shall be the products of the following
manufacturers:
l. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
2. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
3. Benjamin Moore & Company Moore).
4. The Glidden Company (Clidden).
5. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).
B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of a
single manufacturer.
2,02 MATERIALS
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
Quality: Provide the best qualtty grade of the various types of coatings as regularly
manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Paint material containers
not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
09900-4 r-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
It
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
B. No claim as to the unsuitability or unavailability of any material specified, or
unwillingress to use specified products, or inability to produce first-class work with
specified products, will be entertained.
C. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, finish coat materials, and related materials_
that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of
service and application, as demonstated by the manufacturer based on testing and field
expenence.
D. Material Qualrty: Provide the manufactuer's best-quality trade sales paint material of
the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying
manufacturey's product identification will not be acceptable.
E. Colors: Match colors indicated bv reference to the manufacturer's standard color
designations.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine subsfrates and conditions rmder which painting will be performed for
compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be
thoroughly dry before paint is applied.
L Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Start of painting will be consfiued as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various subshates. On request, fumish
information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
l. Notiff the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified
over substrates primed by others.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or
provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove
these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces.
Following completion of painting operations in each space or are4 have items
reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatnents, clean the substrates of
substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from
the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the
manufactuer's insEuctions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
r-7554.0r 09900-5
o
l. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or r€move and reprime. Notifr
Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat
material with substates primed by othen.
2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil and other foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. Afrer
priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.b. Prime, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, rmdersides, and backsides ofwood, including cabinets,
comters, cases and paneling.
c. When transparent finistt is required, backprime with spar varnish.d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where wet wall construction
oocurs on backside.e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat
of vamish or sealer immediately upon delivery.
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been
shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirf loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with
recommendations ofthe Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system
manufacturer and according to requirements of [SSPC specification SSPC-
SP-10, Near-White Blast Cleaningl or [SSPC specification SSPC-SP6,
Commercial Blast Cleaningl.b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment
wash coat before priming.c. Touch-up bare areas and shopapplied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-bnrslu clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer,
and touch-up with the same primer as the shop coat.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized swfaces with nonpetroleum-based
solvents so that the surface is free of soil and surface contaminants. Remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to
manufacturet's directions.
l. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free
of foreigrr materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film
an4 if necessary, strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I09900-6 l-7554.01
l.
2.
J.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
A.
B.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat
where-multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the
color of the'finish coa! but provide sufficient fu-fferences in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.
APPLICATION
General: Apply paint according to manufacturey's directions. Use applicators and
rcghniques best suited for substate and type of material being applied.
Do not paint over difi, rust, scale, grease, moistue, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of
the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat
has crued as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications
where sanding is requircd to produce a smooth even surface according to the
manufacfluer's directions.
Apply additional coats if undercoatso stains, or other conditions show through
final coat of paint until paint film is of unifomr finish, color, and appearance.
Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of
flat surfaces.
The temr exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, tts required, to maintain
the system integdty and provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and firmiture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces
behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a
flat, nonspecular black paint.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed srufaces.
Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to
match exterior, except for casework lined with plastic laminate.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or vamish coat.
Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.
10.
I l.
12.
r-7554.01 09900-7
c.
D.
o
Scheduling Painting: Apply fust coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surfac€ deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to p€rmit proper drying. Do not
recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint
does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedrues: Apply paints and coatings by bnrs[ roller, spray, or other
applicators according to the manufacturer's dircctions.
l. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wood as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended
by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturey's
recommended spreading rate. hovide the total dry fiLn thickness of the entire system
as recommended by the manufacturer.
Mechanical and Electical Work Painting mechanical and electical work is limited to
items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limircd to, the following:
l. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Heatexchangers.
3. Tanks.
4. Ductwork.
5. Insulation.
6. Supports.
7. Motors and mechanical equipment.
8. Accessory items.
Electical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
l. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switchgear.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as
recommended by the manufacture, to material that is required to be painted or finished
and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
G.
09900-8 r-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
a
evidence ofsuction spots or unsealed areas in fust coat appears, to ensure a finish coat
with no bum-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave
no evidence of rolling such as laps, inegularity in texture, skid marks, or other swface
imperfections.
K. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface
of uniform finislu color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
L. Transparent (Clear) Finish: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film
of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush
marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
l. Provide satin finish for final coats.
M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
3.04 CLEANING
A. At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from the site.
B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other tades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.
Correct damaged by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting
operauons.
l. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.06 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. The following areas shall receive paint finish designed for high performance and will
withstand high hurnidity:
1. Bathrooms.
B. The following schedule for finishing is not intended to mention every particular item
which will receive painter's finish. The kinds of paint and number of coats required on
the various surfaces shall be as scheduled.
t-7554.01 09900-9
EXTERIOR P
Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shopprimed items.
l. Paint System PS I - Semi-Gloss: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer.l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
b. Fint and Second Coats: Semi-Gloss Acrvlic Latex.
o
AINT SYSTEMS
l) Devoe:
2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
l) Devoe:2\ Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
l) Devoe:
2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:
c. Color: As selected bv Architect.
B. Galvanized Metal:
l. Paint System PS 2 - Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
3.07
A.
16)0( Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Satin
House & Trim Paint.
5200 Glid-Guard Lifemaster.
096 MoorGlo Latex House & Paint Trim.
A-100 Latex House and Trim Paint.
l3 I 0l Rust Penetrating Primer.
5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Stuctural Primer.
IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
Kem Kromik Metal Primer 850N2/B50WI.
13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer.
IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.
No primer required.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. First and Second Coats: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel.
c. Color: As selected by Architect.
Paint System PS 3; Heat-Resistant, Black, Enamel Coating: For surface
temperatures up to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer Coat: Manufacturer's recommended metal primer.l) Devoe: 710-3-9930 HT-10 Modified Silicone High Heat
Coating.2) Glidden: 5546 Glid-Guard Silicone Alkyd Primer, Tan.3) Moore: No primer required.4\ S-W: No primer required.5) Tnemec: No primer required.
b. First and Second Coats: Heat-resistant Enamel.
IOO( Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Satin
House & Trim Paint.
5200 Glid-Guard Lifemaster.
096 MoorGlo Latex House & Paint Trim.
A-100 Latex House and Trim Paint.
7018 Minolac Aluminum.
5547 Glid-Guard Silicone Alkyd Enamel, Grey.
Heat-Resistant Finish Black 073.
09900-10 l-7554.01
c. Finish Coal Interior, Semi-Gloss, Odorless, Alkyd Latex.
a.
b.
l.
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
3.08
A.
4) S-W:5) Tnemec:
a Paint System PS-4; Stained Wood:
Flat Stairu No Finish: One coat.
First Coat: Exterior, semi-transparent oil stain.
l) Devoe:
2) Glidden:
3) Moore:
4) S-W:
Color: Match existing.
INTERIORPAINT SYSTEMS
Ferrous Metal:
l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
Heat-Resistant Black (8688,at2).
Series 39-661 Silicone Aluminum.
9000 All Weather Semi-Transparent Alkyd Stain
and Wood Preservative.
9721 Line Endruance Oil Semi-Transparent Stain.
Moorwood Semi-Transparent Stain and Wood
Preservative 081.
Exterior Semi-Transparent Stain A-14 Series.
14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red.
5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer.
IronClad Retardo Rust-Ifibitive Paint #163.
Kem Kromik Metal Primer 850N2/B50W1.
8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
Pro-Mar 200 Alkvd Enamel Undercoat B49W200.
26)0( Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
4200 Spred Ulta Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
Classic 99 Semi-Gloss Enamel A40 Series.
Paint System PS 6 - Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with
total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.1) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
d. Location: Metal doors and frames.l) Color: Benjamin Moore No. HC 157.
B. Galvanized Metal:
l. Paint System PS 8 - Semi-Gloss Finish: Two finish coats over primer, with total
dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.1) Devoe: 13201 Minolac Galvanized Metal Primer.2) Glidden: 5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer.
t-7554.01 09900-11
o
Moore
S-W:
3)
4)
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.
Galvite B50W3.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.l) Devoe:8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.2) Glidden: 4200 Spred Lltra Semi-Gloss Enamel.3) Moore: Moort's Alkyd Enanel Underbody #217.4) S-Iil: ProMar 200 Allcyd Enamel Undercoat 849W200.
Finish Coaf Interior, semi-gloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.l) Devoe: 26)0( Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.2) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ulta Semi-Gloss Enamel.3) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.4\ S-W: Classic 99 Semi-Gloss Enamel A40 Series.
Location: Metal doon and frames.l) Color: Benjamin Moore No. HC 157.
C. Gypsum Board Systems:
l. Paint Syst€m PS 13 - Acrylic Latex Egg-Shell Enamel: Two finish coats over
primer with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils.
Primer:l) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer.2) Glidden: 5125 Ulta-Hide Latex Egg-Shell Enamel.3) Moore: 273 Moorcraft Vinyl Latex Primer Sealer.4\ S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer 828W200.
Fint and Second Coats:l) Devoe: 34)O( V/onder-Tones Egg-Shell.2) Glidden: 5125 Ultra-Hide Latex Egg-Shell Enamel.3) Moore: 274 Moorcraft Latex Egg-Shell Enamel.4) S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shell820W200.
Location: General Office Areas.1) Color: Benjamin Moore Cameo White.
Location: Ends of Main Conidor.l) Color: Benjamin Moore No. 706 accent color.
Location: Core Service Wall and Inside Lrmch Room at Cabinetrv.l) Color: Benjamin Moore Hamilton Blue.
c.
I
I
c.
Paint System PS 15; High-Performance, Polyamide-Epoxy Coating System:
Provide two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils.
Base Coat Manufacturer's recommended undercoat.l) Devoe:50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinvl Latex Primer
- Sealer.2) Glidden: 300 Spred Wood Undercoat.3) Moore: Tile-Like Catalyzed Architectural Coatings-High
Gloss Enamel #371.4) S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer.5) Tnemec: 5l-792 PVA Sealer.
09900-12 l-7554.01
b.
I
I
t
T
I
t
t
I
I
II
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
First and Second Coats: High-perfomrance, polyamide-epoxy coating.1) Devoe: 1,24)o{.Tru-Glaze4 Epoxy Gloss.2) Glidden: 5240 Chemical-Resistant Epoxy.3) Moore: Ironclad Chemical and Water Resistant Epoxy
Enamel182.
Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel 862 Series/B60v70.
Series 66.
Location: Toilet rooms.l) Color: As selected by Architect.
D. Woodwork and Hardboard:
l.Paint System PS 16; Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
4) S-W:5) Tnemec:
l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:
4) S-W:
b.Filler Coat Paste wood filler.
First and Second Coats: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Odorless, Alkyd Enamel.l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
310 Glidden Wood Undercoater.
Moore's Alkyd Enarnel Underbody #217.
ProMar 200 Alkyd Enarnel Undercoater B49W200.
26)0( Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
4200 Spred Ulta Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
Classic 99 Semi-Gloss Enamel A40 Series.
Location: Closet shelving and wood windows.l) Color: Benjamin Moore Cameo White.
E. Natural-FinishWoodwork:
1. Paint System PS 19; Rubbed Vamish Finish: Two finish coats over shellac plus
filler on open-grain wood.
First Coat: Cut shellac.
l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick-Dry Sealer.
5035 Ultra-Hide Sanding Sealer.
413 Moore's lnterior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry
Sanding Sealer,
ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3.
4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler.
Glidden Paste Wood Filler.
Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238.
Sher-Wood Fast-Drv Filler.
Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing vamish.l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) Moore:4) S-W:
4600 Wonder Wood Stain Alkyd Satin Vamish.
82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish.
Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404.
Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91.
1-7554.0r 09900-13
o
Location: Wood doors and wood tim.
ENDOF SECTION
09900-14 l-7554.01
I sEcrIoN lotso
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
T PART I -GENERAL
I 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I l. Metal partitions fortoilet cubicles.
2. Urinal screens.
t 3. Attachment hardware.
I
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 10800 - Toilet Room Accessories.
t r.o2 euALTTYASSTJRANcE
A. Provide products from a manufacturer regularly engaged in fabrication of metal toilet
I partitions oftype selected.
B. Installer Qualifications: Employ only mechanics with three years experience in
I
installation of metal toilet partitions.
C. Inserts and Anchorages: Fumish iaserts and anchoring devices which must be built
I into other work for the installation of toilet partitions and urinal screens. Coordinate
I delivery with other work to avoid delay.
I.O3 REFERENCES
I A. FS RR-P-1352-Partitions, Metal Toilet, Complete.
I B. $H*"tahSteel Sheet, Zrnc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
I 1.04 SUBMTTTALS
I A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 0l 300.
I B. Clearly indicate partition layouts, swing of doors, elevations, anchorage and mountingI details, panel construction, components hardware, finishes and all relevant dimensions.
I
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Provide sample colors and minimum 3 by 6 inch sized sample of actual base metal.
I E. Submit setting drawings, templates, and instructions for the installation of anchorage'r devices built into other work.
I
t
1-75s4.01 r0150-l
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers ofrering products to comply with the requirements specified herein
include the following:
l. Global Steel Products Corp.
2. Metpar Steel Products Corp.
3. Sanymetal Products, Inc.
4. Henry WeisMfg. Co.
B. Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of mit tbroughout the project
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Floor mounted type.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A526; G90 zinc coating, ofthe following thicknesses:
l. Panels and Doon: 2O gage.
2. Pilasters: 18 gage.
3. Reinforcement 12 gage.
C. Partition, Screen, Door, and Pilaster core materials: Manufacturer's standard, sound-
deadening, double-faced honeycomb, impregnated I(raft paper core.
D. Partition and Door Dimensions: Not less than I inch thick units. unless otherwise
indicated.
l. 24 tnch wide doors, rmless otherwise indicated.
2. 32 inch wide (clear opening), swing out doors at stalls for use by handicapped,
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Pilaster Shoes:
1. Height 3 inches.
2. Thickness: Not less than 20 gage.
3. Finish: To match hardware.
F. Stimrp Brackets: Manufacturer's standard, "T" _or."!J" type as appropriate, heavy duty
accessories, non-ferrous cast alloy with chrome finish.
G. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturet's standard fasteners, finished to match
hardware.
H. All fasteners shall be "theft-proof."
t
t
t
T
t
t
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
t
I10150-2 r-7554.01
o
I 2.03 SHOP FABRICATION
I A. Pressure laminarc face sheet to core material with all edges sealed with a continuous,
steel locking strip or lapping and fomred edges. Miter and weld comers with all welds
I ground smo-oth, 6r cap ivith-manufacturer's itandard stainless steel corner fittings.
B. Frovide concealed reinforcement for installation of hardware, fittings, brackets, and
I required accessories. Reinforce partitions for attachment of gmb bats, as required.
I 2.04 FLooRMouNTED PILASTERS
I A. Not less than l-l/4 inch thick units, with galvanized steel anchorage devices forr securing !o floor. Furnish anchorage devices complete with threaded rods, Iock
washers, and leveling adjustments nuts. Provide shoes at eachpilaster.
I z.os HARD*ARE AND A..ESS.RTES
I
A. Provide hardware and accessories for each door in toilet partitions, as follows:
l. Hinges: Surface mounted type, or cutout inset type adjustable to hold door opegI ffi'$:iTsdiiifr:F!'{:{i,li*,33::?"frHi:trtr'"x1"ffi3',sHn;$with manufacturet's recommendations.
I 2. t#e#_fr?r:: Recessed, latch unit, with combination rubber faced door
I 3. Coat Hook and Bumper: Manufacturefs stand unit, rubber-tipped, mounted 14
I inchesbelowtopofdoor.
I 4. Door Pull: Manufacturet's standard, surface mounted unit.
r 2.06 FINISH
I A. After fabrication, clean galvanized steel surfaces to remove contaminants and pretreatI with phosphate coating. Prime with baked on, rust inhibitive primer and apply two
coats of baked enamel to provide 1.5 mil dry film thickness.
t B. Colors shall be manufacturer's standard as selected by Architect.
I PART3-EXECUTTON
I 3.ol PREPARATIoN
I A. ffpl;,T,#f;1lto*s to which work is to be applied. Report discrepancies to
I B. Take site dimensions affecting this work.
T C. Ensure correct spacing of plumbing fixtures.
I D. Ensure correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing, where required.
t
t
l-75s4.01 10150-3
INSTALLATIO
o
N
T
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
t
T
I
t
3.02
A.
H.
3.03
A.
B.
c.
B.
c.
Install partitions and screens in rigid, staight, plumb and level manner, with partitions
and screens laid out as shown. Where size of cubicles are not showu layout partitions
to form minimum 32 inch wide cubicles.
Set units to allow not more tfun l/2 inch between pilasters and partitions and not more
than I inch clearance between partitions and walls.
Secue partitions to walls with not less than nvo stimrp brackets attached near top and
bottom ofthe partitions. Provide additional brackets as required for stability. Secure
partitions to supporting walls with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
Secure pilasters to supporting floon and tighten with leveling device. Set tops of doors
level with tops of pilasters when doon are in a closed position. Set pilaster mits with
anchorages having not less than 2 inch penetration into supporting floor system.
Hardware adjustnents: Adjust and lub'ricate hardware for proper operation after
installation. Set hinges on out-swing doors to retum to the fully closed position.
Use concealed fastenings whenever possible.
Provide anchors, bolts, and other necessary fasteners, and attach accessory units
securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or directed. Install concealed
mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the accessories. Provide theft-
resistant fasteners for all accessory mormtings.
Mount accessory units at locations and heights shown on the drawings or, if not shown,
as directed by applicable codes for accessibility by handicapped persons.
PROTECTION, CLEANING A}ID FINAL ADruSTMENTS
Protect units during delivery, storage, and after erection so there will be no damage.
Replace damaged work as directed by Architect.
Perform final adjustments to pilaster leveling devices, door hardware and other
operating partsjust prior to final inspection.
Clean exposed surfaces and touch up minor scratches and other imperfections using
materials and methods recommended by partition manufacturer.
D.
E.
F.
G.
END OF SECTION
10150-4 l-7554.0r
I sEcrIoN los22
FIRE EXTINGTIISIIERS/CABINETS
il PARr'-.ENERAL
I I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I l. Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
I 3. Fire extinguishermounting brackets.
I t.02 SUBMITIALS
A. Submit manufachuer's specifications and installation instructions for all devices andr accessories required.
I PART2-PRODUCTS
| z.ot MANUFAcTURERS
A. Manufacturers offering products to comply with the requirements for devices including
il the following:
1. Larsen'sManufacturingCompany.
I 2. J.L.Industries.
- 3. Potter-Roemer.
| 4. General Fire Extinguisher Corp.
I
5. W.O. Allen Manufacturing Company.
B. Materials listed are based on Larsen's Manufacturer's Company.
| 2.oz FrRE EXTTNGUTsHERS
A. Fire extinguishers shall be l0 lbs., multi-purpose, dry chemical, AM-10, 4A-608C
I type; UL alproved. Color: Red.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET
I A. Mounting Type: Semi-recessed.
I B. Style: Cameo Series.
I C. Door Type: Clear acrylic bubble, no letters.
I D. Door Hardware: Pull handle with roller catch. Continuous, stainless steel hinge.
t-7554.0r r0s22-r
I
o
Manufacturer'E.
2.04
A.
s standard white epoxy or baked coating.
MOI.JNTINGBRACKETS
Provide manufactu€r's standard mormting brackets for specified type of fire
o
enamel
extinguishers. Color: Red.
2.05 MOUNTINGBRACKETS
A. Provide manufactureds standard mounting brackets for specific type of fire
extinguishers. Color: Red.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions rmder which fire extinguisher cabinets and brackets
are to be installed. Noti$ the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed *1i1 r'nsatisfactory
conditions have been correst€d.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in locations and at mounting height required by applicable codes. Securely
fasten to stucture, square and plunb in accordance with manufacture/s instructions.
Unless otherwise required, mount top of fire extinguisher at 5'-0' A.F.F.
B. After completion of installation, clean all fue extinguisher cabinets and brackets.
C. All extinguishen to be fully charged.
END OF SECTION
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
t
T
I
I
It-7554.0r t0522-2
a
r SE.TION 10650
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
] PARTI.GENERAL
t l.0l SLJMMARY
'F A. Section lncludes:
J l. Operable wall system.
2. Necessary accessories and mechanisms including hardware, tracks, hanger rods,
I stack panel pocket doors, soffit, soffrt guide rails.
' B. Related Sections:l,
,p l. Section 01030 - Alternates.
1 2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; Track support framing.
I 3. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry; wood trim.
I 4. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers.
5. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board; acoustical insulation.
f 6. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings.
I r.02 REFERENCES
|l A. ASTM E 84 - Surface Buming Characteristics of Building Materials.
I B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). E 90 Laboratory measurementt of Airborne-Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
t C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). E 557 Recommended Practice
I for the application and installation of operable walls.
- 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ir A. Acoustical Performance Requirements:
I l. STC: 54 in accordance with ASTM E 90 test procedure.
2. NRC: 0.90 (one side only).
[ 1.04 suBMrrrALS
a A. Submit shop drawings, product data" and samples under provisions of Section 01300.
I- B. Submit product data describing partitions operation, hardware and accessories, colors
and finishes available.
r-7554.01
I
I 10650-1
D.
E.
1.05
A.
B.
c.
1.06
A.
B.
c.
r.07
A.
Submit shop drawings describing opening sizes, tack layout, details of track and
required supports, elevations ofunits, tack loads, adjacent construction and finish tfun"
and stacking sizes.
Submit two samples of surface finish, 12 by 12 inches, size, indicating quality, color,
texnre, and weight.
Submit manufacturer's installation insruction under provisions of Section 01300.
QUALITY ASSTJRA}ICE
Qualification: A single firm shall have rmdivided responsibility for desigrg fabrication
and erection. The firm must be capable of showing successful experience in Operable
Wall constnrction of the size and type as specified herein for not less than five years.
Limit installed tack deflection under load to l/360.
Provide for vertical adjustnent to accommodate sfiuctur€ defection.
DELTVERY, STORAGE A}{D HANDLING
Deliver materials to job sirc and protect uns€al€d materials from abrasions.
Identify each container with material nane and identification number.
Store materials under cover, protected from weather and construction activities.
WARRANTY
Provide manufacturet's installation, one year warranty against defects in material and
workmanship.
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I.O8 MAINTENANCEDATA
A. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Describe recommended cleaning materials and methods, and spot removal procedures.
C. Describe cleaning materials detimental to fabric surfaces and harclware finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,OI MANUFACTI.JRER
A. Panelfold, Inc.
B. Approved substitutions rurder provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Moduflex Model 810.
l. Manual operation, paired panels.
2. Remote panel stacking.
I
I
I
!
I
I
I10650-2 l-7554.01
D.
)
I
I
I
I
I
t
I,
t
I
I
l
B. Panel Constnrction:
l. Size: Nominal 4 inch thiclq approximately 4'-0u wide, height as indicated.
2,. Panel faces: 14 gage steel. One face perforated.
3. Frames: 14 gage.
4. Insulation: Appropriate for specified STC.
5. Reinforce tops ofpanels to support suspension components-
6. Trimless vertical edges.
7. Panelhangingweight 12psfmaximum.
C. Panel Surfacing: Panels factory surfaced with fabric in color as selected by the
Architect.
l: Provide vertical-rib wall carpeting, acoustical absorption 0.20-0.30 NRC; Class
"A" per AST[,1 E 84 Tunnel T-st (not more than Flame Spread- l0;. Smoke
Developed 5), minimum weight 2l oz.per lineal yard, fused bonded backing.
Sound Seals:
l. Vertical Seals: Interlocking steel with labyrinth design continuouq vinyl
acoustical seals mounted in a ilouble row on the outer edge ofthe panel skins.
2. Horizontal top seals: Clearance type, automatically achrated.
3. Horizontal bottom seals: Clearance tlTe, tool operated with 200 lb. downward
pressru€. 2-l/2 tnches clearance.
a. Provide electric (cordless) power operator with special bit to set bottom
seals.
I
I
I
I
I
E. Suspension System:
l. Track Type 5,7 gage.
2. Hanger Rods: Adjustable steel.
3. Trolley Assembly: Two for each panel with adjustable steel panel bolts.
4. Wheels: Radial type steel ball-bearing.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Before installation is commenced, inspect the opening. Swfaces shall be clean, smooth
and dry.
B. Veri$ that rough opening is conect and has been prepared by others to conform to
ASTM E 557-75 Standard.I
I l-7554.01 10650-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
l
t
I
I
!
I
t
I
t
fi
I
I
Clean all wood, metal, vinyl and fabric surfaces to rcmove soil without using abrasive
cleaners or solutions containing corrosive solvents.
3.02
A.
PREPARATION
Open containers and veriff that dl required parts arc available and undamaged before
disposing of containers.
B. Arrange materials in proper sequence to conform with manufacturer's information and
installation instnrctions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to the manufactureds installation instrlrction shcets.
B. Alternate perforated panel faces in wall assembly as recommended to achieve the MC
0.90 performance.
C. Lubricate all bearing and sliding parts and adjust for smooth and easy operation.
D. Apply perimeter calking and trim as required.
E. Adjust locking hardware for accurate fit.
F. . Securely attach and b,race partition tack to stucfire. Secure and lateratly brace track
to building stnrctural mernbers.
G. Fit, alig& and adjust partition assembly level and plumb; provide smooth operation
3.04
A.
from stacked to drawing position.
CLEA}IING
B. Remove debris from work site.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Afrer all adjustnents, lubrrication testing and clean-up, demonstrate and instnrct the
Owner in the proper operation firnctions and maintenance procedures.
B. Deliver all special tools, operation and maintenance manuals to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
10650-4 t-7554.01
J
t SECTION 10655
I AccoRDIoNFoLDINc PARrrrIoNs
PART I -GENERAL
11
t l.ol SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
r l. Accordion folding panition, wood veneer clad.
I 2. Ceiling track and ceiling guards.
3. Manual operation.
I B. Related sections:
. 1. Section01030 - Alternates.
I 2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel support framing above ceiling.
I 3. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and tack support shimming.
t 4. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood tim.
I
f ' 5. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling.
t r.02 REFERENCES
I A. ASTM E 84 - Surface Buming Characteristics of Building Materials.
t B. ASTM E 90 - Airbome Sormd Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
C. ASTM E 557 - Architectual Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.
I 1.03 SIJBMITTALSt'
.l A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples under provisions of Section 0 1300.
I B. Submit product data describing partition operation, hardware, accessories, colors, and
finishes available.
t C. Submit shop drawings indicating opening sizes, track layout, details of ttack and
required supports, tack loads, adjacent constuction and finish trim, stacking sizes,
1 electric operating components, track switching components.
I D. Submit duplicate samples of wood veneer llby l|inches.
I E. Submit manufacturer's installation instnrctions under provisions of Section 01300.t
t
3 r-7ss4.0r l06ss-l
1.04 QUALITYASSURAIICE
A. Surface Burning of vinyl Fabric Finish: ASTM E 84; flame/smoke rating of not more
than 20 flame spread and 15 smoke dweloped.
B. Sound Transmission Loss: ASTM E 90; minimum STC of 45 tested on 100 sq. ft.
opening.
C. Limit installed tack deflection under load to l/360.
D. Manufacturer shall provide certification tbat partitions ftrmished are of same
consttrction as those tested for rating.
E. A copy of the full laboratory rcport is to be attached to, and be a part of the
certification.
F. Manufacturer shall have a mininum of five (5) years of proven manufacture and
satisfactory performance.
G. Partitions shall be installed by a manufacturcr authorized representative.
l;05. MAINTENANCEDATA
A. Sub'mit maintenance instructions under provisions of Section 0l 700.
B. Describe recommended cleaning matedals and methods, including spot removal
procedures.
C. Describe cleaning materials detimental to wood veneer surface and hardware finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI.'FACTTJRERS
A. Panelfold Inc., Miami, Florida
2.02 MATERI.ALS
A. Partitions: ModelNo. l2l2,mantnlly operated.
B. Twin wall partitions panels shall be bolted to 16 gage steel panel support brackets and
suspended from the steel yoke hinged at the brackets. Multi-fingered extruded vinyl
seals shall be installed top and bottom both sides ofthe partition and field adjustable.
C. End posts'shall have deep nesting aluminum nose with dual vertical sound seals and
shall be equipped *ith grrp pulls, draw-tite latches and aluminum janb molds, bronze
ESP.
D. Track and Hangers: Track shall be extnrded aluninum. Four ball-bearing wheels shall
be installed on each volute. .{ minimurn of fonr shall be installed on each end post.
E. Panel Surfaces: Panels shall be specially laminated engineered wood core, bonded
with water-resistang plastic glue and surfaced with architectural wood veneer; on 12
inch wide panel models. Genuine wood grains and colors from manufacture/s
selection.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
J
I
I
I
f,
10655-2 l-7554.01
T
I F. Connector Hinges: Panels shall be hinged and edge sealed against sound, [ght aoq uII' bansmission uith heavy duty dual-wall-, flame-resistant, extruded vinyl. Hinggs shall
-, be securely locked into and protect the panel edges. They shall provide "Memory-
t 1}ffi causing panels to extend and stack equally, smoothly and quietly. Color:
I
G. Trim: Ceilinguard head trim shall be supplied.
- H. Hardware: Privacy lock one side only.
I I. Finish: Mahogany wood veneer prefinished to match Architecfs sample.
PART 3 - DGCUTIONt1
t 3.01 PREPARATION
f A. Openings shall be prepared with adequate grounds to support track and jamb
I attachment.
. B. Jambs shall be plumb and floors level in the path ofthe door with tolerance of not more
I than 1/4 inch plus or minus across the entire opening.
3.02 INSTALLATION
t A. Partitions shall be in stict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
- approved shop drawings.
I B. Rehang or replace partitions that do not operate properly.
' t1 o?air or replace damaged or defective partitions.
I
\,. NePsu vr rePrcr,e \l4ruqE\,u vl ll\,Le\,ll vv Pqr uuvrltt.
a) 3.03 cLEANING
I A. Clean all wood, metal, vinyl and other finished surfaces to remove soil without using
f abrasive cleaners or solutions containing corrosive solvents.
I B. Remove debris from work site.
t 3.04 DEMoNSTRATToN
t A. After all adjushnents, lubrication testing and clean-up, demonstrate and instruct thef Owner in the proper operation functions and maintenance procedures.
t B. Deliver all special tools, operation and maintenance manuals to the Owner.
-)t END'FSECTI'N
I
I
J
I r-7ss4.0r 10655-3
T o
f' s'crroN tosoo
I TOILET AI\D BATH ACCESSORIES
-l
PART I . GENERALI
t l.o1 suMr4ARY
t A. Section Includes:
r l. Toiletandutilityroomaccessories.
I 2. Handicappedtoiletroom accessories.I
B. Related Sections:
t l. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry; Back-up framing.
I 2. Section 08800 - Glazing; Custom Mirrors.
' t.oz SUBMITTALS
3 A. Submit manufacturer catalog data in conformance with requirements of Section 01300.t B. Submit complete schedule of all accessories for all rooms indicated.
J PART2-PRODUCTS
I 2.0r MANT.JFACTURERS
l A. ' Accessory Specialties.
I B. Bobrick.I
.1^ C. Bradley.
J 2.oz MATERIALSt
j A. Stainless Steel: Type 304, No.4 finish.It B. Brass: CastorforgedqualityalloyconfomrtoFSWW-P-541D/GEN.
t C. Aluminum: Cast quality conform to FS WW-P-541D/GEN.
I D. Mounting Devices: With bonderized finish.
I 2.03 rorlEr AccESsoRrEs
^ A. Model numbers included for toilet room accessories and miscellaneous are items
I manufactured by Bobrick, and are listed as a standard ofquality.
f B. Accessories shall be products of a single manufacfi:rer.a
I C. Install feminine napkin receptacles at each water closet in each Women's toilet room.
t l-7ss4.01 1o8oo-1
I
D. Locate soap dispensers, centered over lavatories.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. FaSricate recessed units with seanless one-piece flange on exposed face.
B. Locked Dispensing Units: Key alike for all accessories.
C. Weld comers, leaving no op€n miters.
D. All equipment except grab bars minimum 22 gage.
E. Grab bars, rninimum 18 gage andl'l2 inches o.d.
PART3.DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Check areas to rcceive surface mounted units for conditions that would affect quality
and execution of work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Dril! holes to correct size and application that is concealed by item, with 1/8 inch
tolerance.
B. Mount surface mounted accessories to concealed anchors.
3.03 ADruSTANID CLEAI'I
A. Adjust acc€ssories for proper operation.
B. After completion of installation, clean and polish all exposed surfaces.
C. Deliver keys and insruction sheets to Owner.
3.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES SCIIEDULE
A. Items are identified by lower case letters on the large scale drawings.
- Description Mtg Mode Mtg. [It Model #
a. Toilet paper dispenser
b. Paper towel dispenser/waste
c. Feminine napkin dispenser
$.25 operation, tampon/napkin
d. Feminine napkin receptacle
e. Soap dispenser
surface z4"lbot-
recessed
recessed
51"/top
72'ltop
B-288
B-3944
B-3500
B-270
B-111
surface 18'/bot.
(ea stool)
surface 36"/bot-
(above lav.)
t
T
I
I
T
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
t
I10800-2 t-7554.01
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
l
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
- Description Mtg Mode Mtg. Ht Model #
f. Soapdispenser
ftab bars Q4" atback" 36" at sides)
Mop Holder
g.
h.
countertop
(above lav.)
34"lbrJ,t.
58"/bot.
B-822
B-6106
B-223
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01 10800-3
t
I
t
sEcrroN 1s010
BASIC MECHAMCAL REQUIREMENTS
PART I.GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 15
Sections, in addition to Division I - Gene:ral Requirements.
I,O2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Although all Divisions and Sections of these Specifications form a part of the Contract,
particular attention is directed to the following Sections of Division l, General
Requirements:
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
i
I
I
I
I
I
1.03
A.
l. Section 01010 - $rrmmary Of Work.
2. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
3. Section 01300 - Submittals.
4. Section 01600 - Material and Equipmenl
5. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems/Commissioning.
6. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents.
7. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data
8. Section02200-Earthwork.
REGULATORY REQUREMENTS
Perfomr all worlq furnish and insall all materials and equipment in full accordance with
the latest applicable rules, regulations, requirements, and specifications of the codes and
agencies identified herein. If codes or standards are not specified for a particular applica-
tioq Contractor shall follow standard industrial practice, being sure that the materials or
methods used shall confomr to local and State codes and shall result in a final installation
tttat wiU perform reliably for the pnrpose or use intended.
B. The following list summarizes the organizatielt whose codes and standards are
specifically required in these Specifications.
-
l. Town of Vail local laws and ordinances.
2. State of Colorado laws and regulations.
3. Stateand/orfederal safetyregulations.
4. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.
5. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
r-7554.01 15010-l
o I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
6. Al-lSI - American National Standards Institute.
7. AWS - American Welrting Society.
8. AWWA - American Water Wo*s Association.
9. CISPI - Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
10. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation
11. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contactors'National Association
12. NFP-A - National Fire Protection Association.
13. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act.
14. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc.
15. NEC -National Electric Code.
16. UL - Undemnitqs Labordories. AMCA - Air Movement and Contnol Associatibn.
17. UBC - UniformBuilding Code.
18. UFC-UniformFireCode.
19. IJMC -UniformMechanical Code.
20. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code.
C. Contractor shall obtain all p€rmits and arrange
applicable to this Division
QUALITY ASSURA}ICE
a[ inspections required by codes
1.04
A.Standards For Materials and Workmanship: All materials shall be new, free of defects,
installed in accordance with manufactureds curr€nt published recommendations, in a neat
manner and in accordance with recognized good practice.
l. Equipment Identification: Each major component of equipment shall have the
manufacturefs name, model and serial nrmrber attached.
2. Machinery Stabilization: All rotating machinery shall be statically and
dynamically balanced at the factory and rebalanced in the field if, in the Archircct's
opinion, it is vibrating excessively.
3. Layout Install equipment and ntn pipes parallel with or at right angles to the lines
of the building unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
B. Mechanical Drawings: Arc diagrammatic in natrne and are not inrcnded to be scaled for
dimensions.
t-7554.01
t
*:I
I
I15010-2
l.
J.
I
I
T
t
I
4.
I
I
I
I
Dimensions: Take all dimensions from Architestural and Stuctural Drawings,
certified equipment drawings and from the stnrcture itself before fabricating any
work.
Space Requirements: Equipment furnishd shall fit in allocated space with due
provision fbr manufactur#s recommended access and maintenance requirements'
Verifr and coordinate space requirements with all tades and equipment which
comprise the Work.
Equipment Variations: The Drawings show equipment that is typical in
cohfiguation and size for equipment specified herernder. Variations may exist
amon-g similar pieces of eqriipinent depending on the particular manufactrrrer.
Provide a[ addifronal piping, ductwork inO ottrEr materiais which may be required
to properly install the Cquipment firmished if it differs from that shown on the
D"u*iogt. Coordinate any changes to the stuctural, architectual and electical
design necessitated by such differences. Provide all of the above services,
maferials and equipment at no change to the ConEact Amount.
Piping Diagrams: Piping and other flow diagrams which appear on the Drawings
are provideil with the inGntion of slrowing eq-uipment pipe, valves, specialties and
other appurtenances in their proper interrelation. Provide and connect any
additional pipe, valves, specialties and appurtenances required by the
manufacturer of the equipment finnished for proper operation of his prodrrcl
whether or not show&bf as required elsewhere in the Specifications, e.g. drain
valves, air vents, and similar items. In the event of discrepancies between the
Piping Diagrams and any plans or elevations shown on the Drawings, the Piping
Diagrams shall govern
5. Motor Sizes: Motor sizes specified herein or shown on the Drawings are in many
cases derived from mannfacturers' data representing the most efficient i.e, lowest
horsqrower, selection which will attain the scheduled performance characteristics.
Although it may sometimes be possible to select a smaller, i.e., less expensive,. piece of equipment that per:fonns as scheduled but with a larger motor, the
scheduled motor size, for purposes ofequipment selection, shall be considered the
maximum permissible.
Warranty: Refer to the General Conditions.
Storage Of Maierials: Refer to Section 01600, Material and Equipment, and as specified
hereinunder.
PROTECTION OF WORK AI.{D PROPERTY
Existing Facilities: Protect all existing facilities whether or not zuch faciltty is to be
removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility shall be done so as not to cause
intemrption of the Work or the Owneds operations. Written permission shall be obtained
from the Owner before disruption of any existing facility occurs.
New tily'ork Each piece of the Work shall be protected as it is completed; cover and
protect all fixtur€s and equipment against damage. At final completion, clean and deliver
all Work in an unblemished condition.
Darnages: Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by his work or through
the neglect of his workmen and shall patctq repair orpay for all such damages.
l
t
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
c.
D.
1.05
A.
B.
t-7554.0r 15010-3
o I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
1.06
A.
t.07
A.
B.
D.
DilSTING UTILITIES
General: Drawings indicate the locations, tlpe and sizes of various utilities within the
hoject site ufiere known- These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If
utilities are encountered during constuction vrtich are uot shown on Drawings,
immediately notify the Architect
Active Services: When encormtered in Work, brace and support existing active sewers,
gas, wat€r, electic and other sendces where required for proper execution of the Work
taking care not to p'revent or disturb the operation of active servic€s that are to remain.
lnactive Services: Remove inactive senrices unexpectedly encnrmtered in the Work as
directed by approved Change Order.
Intemrption Of Services: Where Work makes temporary shutdovm of services
unavoidable, shut down the services at nigb! or at such time as approved by Architect.
Shutdown sball cause tlre least interference with the utility company or Onmet's
established operating routine. Arrange to work continuously, including overtime if
requir€4 to assurc that senrices will be shut down only dtuing time actually required to
make necessary connection to existing work.
Protection: Field locate all existing utilities and make arangements with all appropriate
utility owners prior to performing any excavation. Repair any damage to existing utilities
resulting from the \Vork lvlake repain to the satisfaction of the utility owners and
Architect.
SUBMITTALS
Required After Execution of Contact:
l. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section0l30O, Submittals. In
additioq the following information shall be provided:
a- Complete specifications, descriptive, drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive
literature which shall include make, model, dimensions, weight of
equipmenl and electical schematics.b. Complete performance data that will indicate full compliance with the
Specifications.c. Detailed infomration on stnrctural, mechanical, electical, or other changes or
modifications necessary to adapt products to the arrangement or details
shown on the Drawings.d. List of recommended spare parts for equipment specified.
2. Refer to the individual sections of Division 15 for additional specific submittal
requirements.
Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data grouped to include complete submittals of
related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.
Mark dimensions and values in units to matchthose specified.
The use of a manufacture/s name and model or catalog number is only for the purpose of
establishing the standard ofquality and general configuration desired. Products ofother
manufachrers will be considered in accordance with Section 01600. Material and
Equipment
B.
c.
D.I
I
l150104t-7554.0r
a-
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
h
l.
F.
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
Model numbers, where given, are the latest available to the Architect. However, ploduc!
update may render soma model numbers obsolete. In such cases, s€lect products based
on new, succeeding model number, or the equivalent to model ntunbers of other listed
manufactr:rers. lte Specifications and installation considerations shall ultimately
govem.
Product Data (Section 15010): Submit Product Data for the following:
1. Electric Motors Five Horsepower and Larger: Submit the following information:
Manufacture/s ftrme.
Rated volts and full-load amperes.
RaGd frequency in Hertz and number of phases.
Rated full-load speed in RPM.
NEMA insulation ternperature ratings.
Rated horsepower.
NEMA code letter indicating locked-rotor KVA per horsepower.
Secondary volts and full-load amperes if a wound rotor induction motor.
AFBMA number for each bearing for integral horsepower category.
Service factor.
Frame number and enclosr.re.
Use of motors rated in excess of 1000 watts with a rated power factor less
than 85 percent shall require a statement of power factor at the design load.
o
I
I
I
I.O8 OPERATION A}ID MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data underprovisions of Section 01730.
B. Content shall include the following, as appropriate to the equipment
1. Generaldescriptiveinformation.
2. Description ofcontrols, and accessories.
3. Service depot location and telephone number.
4. Start-upinstnrctions.
5. Spareparts lists.
6. Replacement part numbers and availability.
7. Operatioa maintenance, and inspection data
8. Trouble-shootingguide.
9. Instructions for lubrication.
10. Insnuctions for filter replacement.
11. Instructions for motor and drive replacement
12. Wiring diagrarns.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I r-7s54.01 15010-5
1.9 PROJECT/SITECONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangem€nt of Work to meet Project conditions,
including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Oumer and
l
I
I
tArchitect before proceeding.
C. All equipment furnished and installed
conditions:
Temperatue, outdoor
shall perform as specified under the following
Summer,ma:dmum
100 degrees F
Wint€r, minimunl
-20 degrces F
7snel,(UBC)
8250 feet MSL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Seismic Zone
Altitude
WindLoad 80 mph, Exposr.ue C, UBC
I.IO COORDINATION
A. Layout and Coordination:
l. Before starting Worlq carcfully examine the project siG and all architectural,
structtual and electrical Drawings so as to become thoroughly farniliar withconditions Work on this project. Contactor shall be responsible for
continual coordination of the mechanical Work with other tades so as to avoid
confl icts in installation.
2. Make detsmination of the exact location of existing utility sei:vices prior to the
zubmissionofbid.
3. V€r.iry a[ indicated elwations, b"ildi"g.Tsrcp9n!_1ough-in dimensions, and
equipment locations, before proceeding with any of the Work.
4. Install all valves and to provide access to all parts requiring inspection
and service.
5. Notifi the Architect of any conflict or discrepanry in Drawings'.d Specifications.
6. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification has been
made by the Architect.
7. Beams, girders, footings, or columns shall not be cut or drilled for mechanical
items unless approved by the Architecl
8. Install equipment and run pipes parallel with or at right angles to the lines of the
building unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
B. Electrical Coordination: Refer to Table 15010-1 at the end of this Section.
C. Equipment Manufacnrey's Responsibility and Services:
I
l
I
l
I
l15010-6 t-7554.01
B.
D.
F.
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
l.l I
A.
1. A manufacturet's representative for equipment shall be provided as necessary oJ aI;
specified to assist the Contractor during insallation, and to provide written
certification that the equipment has been installed, complete as specified and in
accordance with the manrrfacturels directions as approved.
2. The manufacturey's representative shall provide the initial start-up of equipment in
the presence of the Architect and Owner.
a- Provide a prestart check ofall piping, valves, contool devices, contol panels,
and equipment.
b. Calibrate and adjust equipment and contols for operation at the specified
design conditions.
c. Provide a record ofall startup events, nqring problerns and their resolution.
Record all set points ofoperational controls and devices.
3. Upon the completion of equipment startup, provide instructional time with the
Owne/s personnel to review the operations and maintenance manuals and perform
each step necessary for startup, shutdown, troubleshooting, and routine
maintenance. The instrrctional time shall be scheduled'tbrough the Owner.
4. Upon completion ofthe inspections, startup, testing, and checkout procedures, the
equipment manufacturer slrall submit written notice to the Conkactor, Owner, and
the Architect that the units are ready for beneficial use by the Owner.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANID HANDLING
Insofar as is practical, the equipment specified herein shall be factory-assembled. Parts
and assemblies that are, ofnecessity, shipped unassembled shall be packaged and tagged
in a marurer that will protect the equipment from damage and facilitate the final assembly
in the field. Generally, machined and unpainted parts shall be protected from damage by
the elements with an application of a saippable protective coating.
The equipment and materials specified herein shall be delivered F.O.B. factory with
freight allowed to ttre Project Site and include frrll-value insurance coverage while in
transit.
Contactor shall inspect the equipmant and materials for darnage upon delivery and shall
immediately report damage to the Owner and replace or repair such damage to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
Handle materials as recommended by the manufacturer, with approved equipment in a
manner that will prevent damage.
Store material indoors and in a secure area offthe ground in an orderly manner that will
allow easy irnpection and inventory.
Store materials subject to t€mperature or humidity damage in a controlled environment as
recommended by the manufactr:rer and approved by the Owuer.
Dangerous and highly combustible materials shall be packaged, shipped, and stored in
compliance with Federal, OSIIA, state, and local safety and fire codes.
l-7554.01 15010-7
I.I2 DEFIMTIONS
A. Concealed: Not norrnally exposed to view by building occupants. For example, above
suspended ceilings and within walls, partitions, shaffs, sernice spaces and equiphent
Kx)rrul.
B. Exposed: Exposed to view or contact by building occupants in such spaces as offices,
toilet rooms, laboratories, or as specified or shoram on the Drawings.
C. Finished Area: Any area sth€r rhan equipment or utility K,onxl, rooms without
architegtual teatnent of floors, walls or ceilings, or as othenrise specified or shown on
the Drawings.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUTPMENTMANUFACTURE
A. One Per Category: Equipment in the following categories shdl be of one manufacturer
or available througb one manufacturEr for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance
bythe Owner.
1.. Afu filt€rs.
2. Dielectric urions.
3. Plumbing fixtures and tim.
4. Temperatr.ne controls, except wherc otherwise specified.
5. Valves:
a- Gate valves.
b. Globe valves.
c. Plugvalves.
d- Ball valves.
2.02 MACHINERY DRTVE A}ID ACCESSORIES
A. Sheaves: Belt drives shall have adjustable or fixed pirch driver sheaves with matched,
fixed companion driven sheaves. Multiple gtoove sheaves shall be fixed pitch and have
matched companion driven slrcaves. When fixed pirch slreaves arc used the Architect
reserves the rigbt to direct that spqd changes be made if in his opinion, these are
warranted after final balancing. Fixed pitch sheaves shall be cast iron, bushed type.
B. Belts: Belt drives shall be standard FHP, A, B, C and D sections.
l. Smaller Horsepower Application: FIIP belt drives may be used for motors less
than three horsepower.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
l15010-8 t-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
o
Select belt types for drives for 3 horsepower and2. Large Horsepower Application:
over from the following chart:
Horsepower
upto5
3. Belt Selection: Match belts
horsepower.
1750 Motor
Sped
A
and size for 150 percent
I160 Motor
Speed
B
of motor nameplate
2.04
A.
4. Belts For A-B Sheaves: Use B Section belts.
C. Belt Guard: Provide all belt drives with suitable and adequate belt grrards that comply
with all applicable codes, enclosing both the driving and driven pulleys, securely fasten in
place and provide with removable covers at each shaft center.
D. Direct Drive: Where couplings are specified for direct drive, use all steel flexible type,
2.03 DGA}ISION A}ID TOGGLE BOLTS
A. New Concrete Work Where necessary to make attachment of any material, fixture or
equipment which may be bolted to masonry or concrete walls or floors, embed bolts in
masonry or concrete during or prior to pouring for such attachment.
B. Existing Masonry Or Concrete: Use drilled-in expansion anchors such as Hilti, or equal.
C. Wood Plugs - Plastic Or Fiber Shields: Do not use wood plugs and plastic or fiber
expansion shields.
ACCESS DOORS
:
Responsibility: Fumish access doors under Division 15 for concealed valves, automatic
or manual air vents, fire dampers and other mechanical work items that require
accessibility for operation and maintenance.
Provide panels with a button or some other means of identification and easy removal.
Size: Access doors shall be 16 bv 16 inches minimum where valves and similar related
items are within easy reach of operator, and at least 24 by 24 inches when personnel must
pass through opening in order to reach valve or other mechanical device.
Panels In Acoustical Ceilings: Conform to Architecnual panel pattem.
Construction: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified, access doors shall be
hinged flush type steel frame panel, 14 gauge minimum for door and 16 gauge minimum
for frame, and with anchor straps.
1. Border: Onlynarrowbordershallbeexposed.
2. Hinges: Concealed type .
3. Locking Device: Flush cam type and screwdriver operated.
4. Metal Swfaces: Prime coat with rust-inhibitive paint.
B.
c.
D.
E.
1-7554.0r 15010-9
F. Approved Manufacturer: Access doors shall be of Milcor type as manufactured by
Inryco, lnc.
1. Glpsum Board and Ceramic Tile Surfaccs: Style DW.
2. Masonry Surfaces: Style M, with masonry anchors.
3. Plastered Surfaces: Style K with recessed pan to receive plaster.
4. Acorxtical Tile Ceilings: Style AT, with recessed pan to receive acoustical tile
material.
& Foruse innon-accessible, adhesivetile ceilings only.
5. Fire Rated Applications: Style ATR with approved fire rating for intended use.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, J.L.
IndusFies, Larsen's and Karp are acceptable.
I
I
T
t
I
I
G.
2.05
'A.
ELECTRICAL DEVICES
Motors: Fumish electic motors
equipment as follows:
associated with the rariors pieces of motor-driven
1. General: Size according to the loads of normal operation of the equipment under
installed conditions.
a- Classification: Motors shall be classified into tluee categories:
l) IntegralQHP): Greaterthan3/4horsepower.2) Fractional (FHP): l/20to314 horsepower.3) Milli $tIHP): Less than V20 horsepowa.
b. Sernice Factor: Open motors shall be selected with a service factor of l.l5 or
greater and be suitable for operation at the design altitude and temperafiue
conditions without operating in excess of the nameplate rated horsepower at
a 1.0 senrice factor.c. Voltage Fluctuations: Motors shall have sufficient torque to start the load
fiom rest; accelerate the load to full running speed within 8 seconds; and
operate without abrupt loss of speed dwing ma;<imum overload condition
when actual line voltage is plus or minus l0 percent of voltage indicated on
the nameplate.d. Single-Phase Motors: General purpose capacitancestart induction-run type
designed for minimrln starting current.
l) Special Service, Definite-Purpose Or Special-Purpose Motors:
Splitphase or capacitor start at the application required.2) High Slip Or Shaded-Pole Motors: Not acceptable in IHP or FHP
ratings but may be used for MHP ratings.
e. Overload Protection: Provide integral overload protection with manual reset.f. Approved Manufacturen: Subject to compliance with these requirements,
Allis-Chalmers; Century; Delco; Emerson; General Electric; Louis Allis;
Wagner; or Westinghouse are acceptable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
1
I
l15010-10 t-7554.01
aJ.
4.
7.
8.
t
I
l
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
'l
t
J
I
I
t
I
I
IHP and FHP Motors: General pulpose, horizontal squirrel cage induction type
withNEMA Class B insulation" continuous 40 degree C. ambient.
a- IHP Motors shall have a 1.15 service factor at sea level.b. FHP Motors shall be selected according to NEMA service factor at sea level.
MHP Motors: Design in confomtance with NEMA Standards and select for
application at altitude and maximum temperatur€ of installed condition.
Enclosures: Motor enclosures shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and as
specifiedbelow.
a- - Open DripProof Motors: Motors shall meet NEMA Standards for
dripproof enclosure when mor.uted in a horizontal position and the
ventilating openings are so constructed that successful operation is not
interferedwiih wtien dmps of liquid or solid particles strike or entEr the
enclosure at any angle up to 15 degrees from the vertical.b. Totally Encloied i4ot6rs: Molors shall be certified for a morimum
temperatur€ rise of 55 degrees C. at a 40 degree C. anrbieng shall be suitable
for
-operation at instaGd ahitude and iemperature conditions without
operafrng in excess of nameplate current, ani shall be equipped with a
bi€athing vertt and drain fitting at the bottom for removal of accirmulated
condensed moishre.
Seals: hovide all motors with dustproof and leakproof mechanical seals at both
ends ofboth bearing housings that will guarantee effective grease tightness for the
above specified bearing life.
Motor Bearings: Shall be as follows:
a- Small Moton: Motors smaller than 1i6 horsepower shall have sleeve
bearings.b. Medium Size Motors: Motors l/6 horsepower through 1/2 horsepower shall
be permanently lubricated ball bearings.c. Large Motors: Motors larger than 1/2 horsepower shall have serviceable ball
or roller bearings.
l) Lubrication Service: Zerklubricationfittings.2) Thrust Design: Bearings shall have full provision for thnrst imposed
by the specific load.3) Life: Three phase bearings rated life based on AFBMA B-10 ratings.4) Lub'ricant Prtssure Relief: Provide for automatic relief of lub'ricant
pressure and accomplish by either built-in reliefdevices, or ball-and--
spring (automatic) relief fittings at bottom of bearing housing.5) Relieflocations: Pressure reliefs shall be to the outside, and shall be
visible from maintenance locations.6) Lube Fitting Accessibility: Must be easily accessible from
operating level.7) Extension Tubes: Where necessary, or specified provide well sequed
extension tubes to b'ring service fitting to an easily accessible location.
Motor Speeds: Shall not exceed 1800 RPM unless otherwise noted.
Motor Frames: ConsEuct of cast iron- formed steel or die-cast aluminum.
l-7554.01 15010-11
a- Sizes: Comply with NEltdA Standard MGI 11.21 and MCI-11.312 for
frane numbers 42 through 2145T.
b. End Shields: Constnrct of cast iron, die-cast aluminum or reinforced steel, as
required to provide stengtb, rigldity, fimr bearing support and alignment for
the required application.
9. Motors With Belt Drives: Install with approved belt tension adjusting facilities
including cast iron or steel bases, slide rails and adjusting screws.
10. Power Factor: Where an application requires an electic motor rated greater than
1,000 watts and the standard motor rated power factor is less than 85 percent under
rated load conditions, use a special designed energy-saving high-efficieucy motor.
L Special Designed Motors: Motor nameplate shall include indication of
manufactureds recommended madmum limit of capacitor KVAR rating
which can be safely applied to motor.
B. Motor Control Equipment: Wher€ motor controls and wiring are specified to be provided
as part of a mechanical equipment package, they shall be as specified below.
l. Starters a1rd Contactors: Shall be of proper NEIVIA size for voltage, load and
enclosure application.
a- Combination Switcb, lvfagnetic Starters: Shall be enclosed t1pe, fused or
nonfirsed- Swirches shell bave extemal operating handles with lock-open
padlocking p,rovisions and shall indicate the ON and OFF positions.
Enclosures sball be NEMA Type No. I or as scheduled on Drawings or
specified. Wh€re types of motor contoller enclosures arc not indicated, they
.shdl be NEMA types which arc most zuitable for the environmental
conditions where motor controllers are being insalled. Doors slnll
mechanically interlock to pr€vent opening unfss the switch is open.
2. Push Buttons, Selector Switches, Pilot Lights: Furnistr in starter cover, contol
panel door or as specified. Provide engraved plastic legend plates to identifr the
function of each item.
3. Control Transformers: Where condr.Etors of the control circuit for a starter or
contactor extend beyond controller enclosure, a control power tansfomrer shall be
included with secondary of 120 volts or lower. Protect secondary side with a fuse
as required by NEC. Ground all contol circuie except where equipment
manufacturers recommend that the control circuits be isolated.
4. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide one exta convertible, nomrally open or nonnally
closed, auxiliary contact for each magnetic motor starter in addition to the holding
contact and any required interlocking contacts.
5. Overload Assembly Heater Elements: Size based on the actual motor nameplate
full load current rating and the assembly manufacturey's recommended heater based
on starter and mstor arnbient temp€ratures and motor service factor. Quantity:
One for each pole. Type: Themral or induction type.
6. Swirch and Fuse UniS: Not acceptable for motor overload protection unless
specifi cally indicated.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
l15010-12 t-7554.01
B.
c.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. Raceway, Wire and Cable: Raceway, wire, cable and accessories shall conform to
the requirernents ofDivision 16, Elecnical, andNEC.
PAINTING
General Painting: Shall be executed under the Work of Division 9, Finishes.
Pipe and Ducts: Piping and ductwork in the building exposed to view shall be painted as
scheduled in Division 9 of the Specifications and/or Drawings.
Pipe ldentification: Painting for prpe identification shall be as scheduled in Section titled,
Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
Equipment: Heat exchangers, converters, storag€ tanks, condensate pumps, condensate
coolers, condensate tanks and expansion tanks shall be painted same color as piping
system to which connected.
Nameplates: Care shall be taken to prevent painting over equipment nameplates.
EQUPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Identification Materials: All equipment and contols shall be identified by stamped brass
identification stips firmly attached to the equipment or adjacent wall at an obvious
location. Lettering shall be not less th:rn lD inch high characters. Identifr each piece of
equipment with its equipment tag number and description, e.g. ID(-l HEAT
EXCHANGER.
PART3 -DGCUTION
2.06
A
B.
c.
D.
E.
2.07
A.
3.01
A.
INSTALLATION AND ARRA}IGEMENTS
Component Removal: Install all Work to permit rcmoval without darnage to other parts
ofcoils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shaffs and wheels, filters, belt guards,
sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or
marnEnance.
Access: Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, taps,
starters, motors, control components and similar items and to clear the openings of doors
and access panels, whether zuch items arc part of the Work of this or other Divisions of
these Specifications.
Offsets, Transitions and Changes In Direction In Pipes and Ducts: Make as required to
maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on
Drawings and provide all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and similar related items, as
required to effect such changes.
Miscellaneous Work It is intended that anything, whether labor or materials, which is
usually firmished as a part of any equipment specified and which is necessary for
complete, operable systems shall be provided as a part ofthe Contract at no change to the
Contact Amount whether or not shown or described.
Concealed Piping: All piping in finished areas of the building shall be concealed except
where otherwise noted on Drawinss.
r-7554.01 15010-13
3.02
A,
B.
3.03
A.
3.04
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
l
I
l
I
I
F.
B.
c.
D.
Equipment Installation: All equipment shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturet's instnrctions, unless approval is given in writing by Architect for deviation.
Conflicts Of Work Where conflicts of work between trades occur and deparnre from
the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other tades involved; com€ to
agr€ement as to changed locations and elwations, and similar related situations; obtain
approval of Architect on proposed changes before p'roceeding with Work.
INSPECTION
Contactor shall inspect thc Work area and identify conflicts with the stucturc and other
tades' work which may conflict with the installation of the mechanical systems.
Contactor sball inspect the Work to enswe the installation and workmanship are in
accordance with acceptable industry standards for the work being done and with these
Specifications.
All materials, equipmenf and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by
the Owner or his representative. Correct any worlg materials, or equipment not in
accordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient or defective.
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
All piping that must be installed across aisles or other main access walkways shall be
covercd with a protective checkered plate steel ramp, pitched a mildmum of l:12 to
allow safe wheeled or foot taffc, and painted with a prime coat and two finish coats of
safety yellow. Ramp shall be supported from the floor, and shall not rest directly on the
plpe.
All mechanical equipment shall be installed with suiable access clearances for
maintenance or removal of replaceable parts and components, and with necessary
couplings or flanges to perfomr the maintenance or removal without removing the
connecting appurtenances.
No water or steam piping shall b€ installed immediately over or within a 3-foot (or more,
as per NEC requirements) plan view clearance of any electrical panel, motor starter, or
mechanical contol panel.
Where equipment requiring penodic maintenance cannot be reached by nomral walkways
because of interference with ductwork, piping, or other mechanical obstnrctions created
by conflicts or changes made during constnrction, or by substitution of equipment, the
Contractor shall provide an altemate safe means of access. These may include construc-
tion of an overhead platform with stairway or ladder ends and safety railings or
handholds, of walk-through duct plenums with hinged access doors, or as required to
meet OSFIA standards for safe maintenance procedures. Bring such cases to the
Architect's attention prior to proceeding.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
General: All excavating and backfilling required by the Work under Division 15 shall be
done in accordance with the requirements contained herein. If requirements of Division 2
are more stingent than those specified hereir:, comply with Division 2 requirements.
15010-14 l-7554.01
B.
c.
D.
F.
G.
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
l
I
t
I
I
I
I
Surveying: Finish and establish all lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and
firmish all line stakes, one by 2by l0 inches, and all hubs or hardwood pegs, one by one
by 6 inches, to stake out the lines and shrcturcs to line and grade.
Excavatioq General: Provide all shoring required to perform excavations and to protect
the hoject, employees, and public. When unstable mat€rid is encountered tl_gqy
excavation" excavation shall ht made to depth as directed by the Architect and bacldlled
with compacted coarse sand or fine gravel br other suitable material. Dr.uing excavation,
material suitable for bacldlling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance
from edge of trenches to avoidoverloading, and to prevent slide or cave-ins. Care shall
be takerrnot to excavate below the depths indicatedbn the Drawings. Where excavation
work is required under existing foofrngs, wrderpin as required to adequately support
existing concrete structtue in such a manner as to avoid raising or lowering or othenuise
damaging existing construction.
Excavafion For Piping: Comply with the requirements of this Section and Section 15060.
Do not excavate trenches until the plpe to be laid therein is on the Project site and is
scheduled to be placed within seven days. Trench walls below top of pipe s!ilI be
vertical and tre width shall not exceed 6 inches to 8 inches on both sides ofpipe. Trench
walls above pipe may be sloped. All prpe shall be laid on solid earth with bellholes
provided for any truUj. .,1,fter fripe is laid ii trench, test and/or insulate if specified before
bacldlling.
Surface Drainage and Grormd Water: Divert surface drainage away from open
excavation and tenching before commencement of 'il/ork. Pile excavated material on
one side of excavation in such a nnnner as to keep surface drainage of adjoining areas
unobstucted. Remove surface water or gound water seepage which enters or
accnmulates in excavation by pumping or zubdraining, so that subgrade or pipe bed is
restored to original bearing value and conditions.
Fledble Pavemenf Sidewalks, Curb and Gutter: Where constuction requires cutting and
replacement of flexible pavemenf sidewalks, curb and gutt€r or similar related items,
cutting shall be accomplished so that remaining exposed edge shall confomt vertically
and horizontally to a straight line. Restore to original condition to satisfaction of Owner
and authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintaining and Protecting Traffc: Maintain barricades, waming signals and lights to
pmtect pedestian and vehicular traffic in accordance with the requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction. Provide and maintain taffic detours as rnay be necessary to keep
such traffic moving during constmction. Provide adequate temporary crossover for
pedestrian and vehicular Gffrc inctuding guard rails, ramps and flags, as required by
agencies having jurisdiction. Remove barricades, rails, lamps and the like immediately
when necessity for zuch protection ceases.
Bacldll Qualrty: Bacldll materials shall be free of rocks'and debris. tn no case shall any
frozen materials be used for backfilling, nor shall any bacldlling be placed on or against
frozen earth. Where Work is placed below footings and closer than 45 degree line from
bottom of footings, backfill shall be l:9 mixture of concrete.
Compaction: Moisten (no puddling), backfill and tanp in eight inch layers, maximum,
with mechanical tamper to consolidate to 90 percent of the ma:<imum density obtainable
at optimum moisture content. Compact the upper 6 inch layer forming the subgrade for
pavement to at least 95 percent of the macimum density obtainable at optimum moisture
content for rigid pavements. Bacldll density shall be as determined by requirements of
r-7554.0r 15010-15
3.05
A.
B.
I
I
l
I
t
I
I
I
I
l
I
J.
ASTM D 698, Standard Procter Method. Repair settled excavations and completely
r€stor€ all property that is damaged during the warrdnty pedod.
Excess Materials: Excavated. material not required or suitable for backfill shall be
removed fiom the Project site and disposd of in accordance with applicable laws and
regulations.
SLEEVES, CUTIING, PATCHING
Major Openings: Such openings in the stnrctnre for the Work are shown on the
Drawings.
Cutting and Patching: Provide all cutting and patching that may be necessary for the
installation of the V/ork. Cut all necesstry openings in fcast concr€te panels with the
approval of the Architect Cutting of sEnchual work shall be done with the wdtt€n
cons€Nrt of the Architect and all zuch work shall be done in accordance with Architecfs
directions. All cutting and patching work shall be done by mechanics skilled in the
appropriate building tade.
Sleeves ForNon-Fire Rated Walls andFloon:
l. Gsneral: Set all necessary sleeves.and boxes for pipe and ducts whether or not
shown on the Drawings, before erection of structure. All sleeves shall fs largs
enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass tbrough the sleeve.
2. Pipe Slewes: Schedule 40 prpe or plaSic hole form extending one inch above
finished floor, except forpenetations offire rated asseinblies (see below).
3. Duct Slewes: 12 gat4e or heavier sheet metal extending one inch beyond both
sides of wall or floor.
4. Sleeves Through Waterproof Membranes: To be provided under the Work of
Division 7.
5. Sleeve Caulking: Caulk all pipes and ducts benveen sleeve and duct or pipe for full
thickness ofwall, floor or roof, except for firewall penetations. See Paragraph D.
below.
a Bare Pipes and Ducts: Caulk with lead wool.b. Insulated Pipes: Caulk with one or two part polyurethane caulking
compound.c. Sleeves For Pipes Requidng Vibration Isolation: Refer to Section 15245, for
c.
vibration sleeves on certain piping.
D. Pipe Penetating Ffu€ Rat€d Walls and Floon: Encase in adjoining sheet metal cans,
minimum 24 gauge, and size for ma:rimum one inch spacing berween pipe and can. Pack
spacing in either end with an approved firestop sealant.
l. Metallic Pipe: One-part nonslump silicone elastomer calk Dow Corning Fire Stop
Sealant 2000.
2. Plastic Pipe, InsulaEd Pipe: Intumescent wrap strip designed to expand into the
cavity left after the prpe or insulation melts. Dow Corning Intumescent Wrap Stip
2002.
I
I
T
l
I
t
t
I15010-16 l-7554.01
c.
D.
E.
E.
F.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
3.06
A.
B.
3.07
A.
B.
c.
D.
3. Other Acceptable lvfanufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, GE
Pensil and Hilti Construction Chemicals are acceptable.
Escutcheons: Exposed pipes in finished areas shall be finished with chrome-plated floor,
wall and ceiling escutcheons.
Finishing: Restore all surfaces to original or satisfactory condition acceptable to
Architect.
CLEA}.IING AND PLACING IN OPERATION
Project Site: Keep the prernises in a clean and orderly condition druing constrtrction.
Waste and unusable material slrall be promptly removed from the Project.site.
Equipmenil Before final acceptance, thoroughly clean or replace all shainers, lubricate
all bearings and clean out all drains.
Filters: Clean all permanent filters; replace tlrowaway type filters with new filters.
Nameplates: Keep all naureplates of equipment clean for easy reading.
. Completion: Upon completion of Worlg clean all equipmenl remove stuplus material
and rubbish of every description incident to the Worlq leaving the Work in neat and clean
order and in complete working conditions.
START.IJP AND COMMISSIONING
Comply with the requirements of Section 01650 and as specified hereinunder.
Contractor shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems, minor subsystems,
and services provided under this Division. He shall coorrdinate startup procedures,
calibratiorU and system check-out with all zubcontractors and trades involved. Any
system operational problems shall be diagnosed; all correctional procedures shall be
initiated with the various zubcontractors as required to bring out the system into
compliance with the desig4 and the problem then shall be rechecked to verif that the
system operates nonnally. Any rernaining difficulties shall be brought to the attention of
the Architect.
Perform tests to the satisfaction of Architect on all piping, ductworlg fixtures, equipmenl
system components, controls, and complete systems as required by this and other
divisions of the Specifications.
Any equipment or system placed in temporary operation for testing or for the
convenience of Contractor during construction and before Owner takes over operation
shall be properly operated and maintained by Contractor.
Provide all labor, materials, tools, instuments, air, water, power and supplies of any kind
required for testing and adjusting of equipment and systems. Cost of gas, electricity and
water supplied through Ownet's meters shall be bome by Contactor.
Provide a fresh charge of lubricant in accordance with the manufacnue/s insbrrctions to
all equipment requiring lubrication prior to staxt-up and maintain lubrication as required
until acceptance by Owner.
t-7554.01 15010-17
J.
hovide for each piece of equipment any special tools rcquired for the operation or
adjrsment of the equipment. Deliver any such tools to Owner prior to final acceptance
ofthe equipmrnt.
Before starting up any syste'nq each piece of equipment comprising a part of the system,
wtrether covered by this or other Divisions of the Specifications, shall be checked for
proper lubricaion, drive rotation, belt tension, of contols, and any other
condition wtrich may cause drmage to equipment or endanger personnel. Where
required in the Specifications or by industry p,ractice, a competent service representative
trained in servicing the respective equipment for which he is rcsponsible shall be present
to zupenrise the startup and test runs of equipment and systems.
Test runs shall be made over the full design load range where possible, or simulated to
the satisfaction of Architect for other conditions.
1. Tests shall continue for as long as nec€ssary to demonstate ttnt systems wil
operate as desigrred.
2. During t€st runs all necessary adjusunents shall be made, controls checked for
proper operation, motors checked for possible overload and the entire system
checked by Contractor for any abnormal condition.
Dnring test runs and prior to acceptanc€ of any WSm, instnrct Owner's designated
operating personnel in the operation of the system.
After test nus have been concluded and systeins have been demonsuated to be
satisfactory and ready for permanent operation, all permanent prpe line stainen and
filters shall b€ cleand air filt€rs cleaned or replaced, valve and pump packings properly
adjusted, belt tensions adjusted, drive guards secured in place, lubrication checked and
replenished if required. Tenrporary piping, dr.rcting, wiring, insfiument connections, and
similar items, shall be removd and openings restored in a pennanent rnanner acceptable
to Architecl
Material or equipment damaged, shown to be defective, not in accordance with the
Specifications or not able to meet ac{€ptance test requirements shall be repaired or
replaced to satisfaction of Architect.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AltD STAI.IDS
General: Where supports, foundations, and stands for mechanical equipment are
indicated on the Drawingq or specified, or required for proper installation" install as
specified herein.
Elevated Equipment Where equipment is indicated on Drawings or specified to be floor
mounted on stands or legs, constnrct floor stands with structtual steel members or steel
prpes and fittings as shown on the Drawings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to
floor.
Miscellaneous Support Hardware: Provide all anchors, guides, sway bracing hangers,
ties, inserts, and similar related items, required for equipment supports.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHAMCAL DMSION
Unless otherwise specified, all motors and contols shall be furnished, set in place and
wircd in accordance with Table 15050-1.
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
l
3.08
A.
c.
3.09
A.
B.
15010-18 t-7554.01
ED
ED
ED
ED
ED
ED
ED
ED
MD
MD
ED
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Item
Equipment motors.
Resistance heaters.
Motor contols where
specified as an
integal package.
Motor contollers.
Resistance heater
contollen.
Magnetic contactors and
mapetic starters
with ovoloadtrip
assembly.
Integral contol
transformen,
Cover-mounted control
devices.
Manual motor starters
with overload tip
assembly.
Motor starter switches.
Disconnect switches firsed
and unfirsed.
Thermal or thermal-magnetic
circuit breakers.
Fuses.
Smoke detectors and fixed-. t€mperatu€ firestats
in ductwork.
Control power source for
temp€rature and equipment
control panels.
TABLE 15O5O.I
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHAMCAL DIVISION
Set in
Place
or Mounted
Under
l'D(l)
MD
MD
MD
MD
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
MD
MD
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(5)
Fumished
Under
l'D(l)
MD
Ifr/ired and
Connected
Under
ED(2)
ED
l-7554.01
ED ED
15010-19
TABLE I 5050-1 (Continued)
S€t inPlace WircdandFwnishd orMounted Connect€dUnder Under Under
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
l
Item
Electric ternperature confrol
rclays and miscellaneoru
devices.
Electric thermostaB.
Electic motorized
valves.
Electic damper
actuators.
NOTES:
MD
l"D(O
ND(O
ND(6)
MD(4)
MD(4)
il,ID(4)
tvD(4)
l,D(4)
tr,O(+)
tvD(4)
IrD(4)
(l) MD: MechanicalDivisionl5. .
Q\ ED: Electical Division 16.
(3) If ftmished as part of factory-wired equiprnent rmder Division 15, wiring
and connections only by Electical Division 16.
(4) If float switches, electic the,rmostats, or any other contol devices carry
the Full Load Current to any motor, they shall be fumished under Division
15, but shall be set in place and connected under Division 16.
(5) Fire alarm-relaed wiring.prorid{ rmder Division 16; Conhol-related
wiring provided under Division 1 5.
(O Except where firmished as part of equipment pockage rmder Division 15.
END OF SECTION
15010-20 1-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
SECTION 1s060
PIPE A}ID PIPE TTTTINGS
PART I - GEMRAL
I.O1 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 01000 - Summary Of Work.
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI PIPEAND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Pipe Specification l:
L MaximumDesigr Pressure: 175 psig.
2. Maximum Design Temperatrue: 200 degrees F.
3. Two lnches and Under (Copper Option):
a- Tubing: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B 88.
b. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 solder.
c. Fittings: Wrought copper solderjoint, ANSI B16 .22.
4. All Sizes, Galvanized:
a. Prpe: Standard weight galvanized steel, ASTM A 120 or A 53 Type F,
Fumace-butt or continuous welded.
b. Joins: Mechanically coupled grooved type or screwed or flanged.
c. Mechanical Couplings: lvlalleable iron, ASTM A 197, grooved type.
d. Fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A 47 Ctnde 32510, galvanized with grooved
ends or 150 pounds (S) - 300 pounds (WOG) galvanized malleable iron,
bande4 ASTM A 197, ANSI B16.3 or flanged 125 pounds (S) - 175 pounds
(WOG) galvanized cast irort ASTM A 126, ANSI 816.1.
e. Flanges: Grooved end, galvanized flanged adapter nipples or Malleable
irorl ASTM A 47 Grade 32510, adaptor flange, or 125 pounds (S) - 175
pormds (WOG), galvanized cast iron, screwed, ASTM A 126 Class B, ANSI
B16.1.
f. All bolting shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.
5. Special Requirements: Clean and touch up darnaged galvanizing with Ameron
uEZ" zinc rich coating.
r-7554.01 15060-t
Pipe Specification 4:
1. Ma<imum Design Pressure : 125 paig.
2. MaximumDesignTemperature: 350degreesF.
3. Two Inches and Under:
a" Pipe: Schedule 40 black ste€I, ASTM A 53 Grade B, seamless.
b. Joints: Screwed.f
c. Fittings: 150 pounds (S) - 300 pounds (WbG), black malleable iron, banded-
ASTM A 197, AI.ISI 816.3.
d. Unions: 250 pounds (S) - 500 pounds (WOG), black malleable iron, grormd
joint with brass sear
4. 2-ll2Inches and Over:
a- Pipe Schdule 40 black steel ASTM A 53 Grade B, seamles.
b. Joints: Butt welded or flanged
c. Fittings: Standard weight seamless steel, butt-weld Ery€, ASTM A 234
Grade WPB, ANSI 816.9.
d. Flanges: Class 150 forged steel, welding neck or sliporl ASTM A l8l' Crade I, AI.ISI 816.5.
e. Note:+ For belowground, all sizes shall have welded joints.
Pipe Specification 7:
l. DesipPressup: Atnosphere.
2. MarimumDesipTernperature: lS0degreesF.
3. Four Inches and Under (Copper Option):
a Pipe: Type DWV hard temper seamless copper dminage tube, ASTM 8-306.
b. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 soldo.
c. Fittings: Cast brass solder joint drainage type ASTM B 584, ANSI 816.4.
4. Upto l0Inches(CastkonOption):
a. Pipe and Fittings: Service weigbt cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and
outside, ASTMA74.
b. Joints: No-Hub with stainless steel shield and rubber sleeve, CISPI 301.
c. Adapters: Transitions from cast iron soil pipe to another pipe material shall
be made with appropriate adapten.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
l15060-2 l-7554.01
I "D. Pipe Specification 8:
' l. DesignPressrue: Atnosphere.
I 2. ModmumDesipTemperanue: l80degreesF.
I
3. Upto lolnches:
a Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301, hubless service weight cast iron soil pipe.
I . b. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.
. 4. 12 Inches and Up:
I a- Pipe and Fittings: Service weiCht cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and
outside, ASTM A74.
b. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564
neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum.
I 2.q2 _ .PIPE
suPPoRrs
A. Hangers:
I l. Standards: All hangers shall comply with the Manufactruey's Standardization
Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Indusbry, MSS Standard Practice for Pipe
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
5. 12 Inches and Up (Cast hon Option):
a- Pipe and Fittings: Service weight cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and
outside, ASTM A74.
b. Joints: Hub-and-qpigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564
neopr€ne gaskets or lead and oakum.
llangers and Supports.
2. General Hanger Types (220 Degrees F. Or Less):
a. Adjustable Clevis: MSS Type l.
b. Adjustable Swivel - Split Ring Type: MSS Type 6.
c. Adjustable Swivel - Band Type: MSS Type 10.
d. RiserClamp: MSS Type 8.
e. Clips: MSS Type26.
f. WeldedAttachment MSS Type22.
3. Steam and Hot Fluid Hangers (Greater Than 220 Degrees F.):
a. Adjustable Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43.
- b. Adjustable Roll Supporr MSS Type 41.
c. Pipe Covering Protection Saddle: MSS Type 39A and 39B.
I r7ss4.or 15060-3
4. Sanitary and Stoml Sewer llangers:
a- Adjustable Clevis: MSS Type 1.
5. Henge$ForC,opperPiping: Copperplated.
6. Size: Sufficient for pipe plu insulation or insulation shields where specified.
7. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Elcen; Fee
and ldason; Grinnell or Michigan are acceptable.
B. Tnpeza Hangers: Formed channel sections used in the support of piping systems shall be
approximately l-5l8 inch by l-ll5 inch 12 gauge steel. All fomred channels shall be
finished with a nrst-resisting primer. Nuts to be carbon steel with attached spring and
supplied by the clrannel manufacturer.
C. Insulation Shields: Pipe shields shall bc longitudina[y spli! approximately 12 inches
long, 360 degrees, zinc plated steel amund a l2-inch long 360 degree insulation insert
" covered with fte resistant vapor banier jacket Insulation insert atall be calcirun silicate
and shall match insulation thickness specified for piping systern.
2.03 PIPEIDENTIFICATION
A Pipe Markers: Pressure sensitive self-sticking type with titles having black upper case
letters and Arabic nurnerals. Comply with ANSI Al3.l.
l. Band and Lett€r Size, All Sizes ln Inches:
Outsid€ Diamet€r Of
Pipe Covering
3/4to Lln
l-l2tD3
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI PIPING INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Storage: Plug or cap end of pipe in storage and store offground.
B. Cleaning Prior To Fabrication: Renove all loose filings, slag, sand, dir! oil, gre€ure or
ottrer foreign zubstances from interior and o<terior surfaces of all pipe fabrication prior to
installation by bn:shing, scraping, blowing, swabbing and so on in the shop or field.
C. Protection After Fabrication: Plug, cap or otherwise seal all open ends.
widthof
Color Band
Size Of
Legend and
Numerals
tn
3/4
8
8
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
l150604l-7554.01
D.
T
t
I
I
I
F.I
I
I
I
Orientation:
1. ' Horizontal Piping: Accurately instatl piping parallel to building lines.
2. Vertical Piping: Insta[ piping plumb.
Methodology: Use full lengths of pipe where length between fittings is less than the
mill-random lengths of prpe. Avoid exha joints. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each
other. Use only reduction fittings where changes in prpe sizes occur.
Unions: Not always shown, however, install at each of the following locations:
Equipment connections, control valves, downsheam of branch connection valves and
wherp dismantling of pipe is required to permit maintenance, repair or replacement of
equipmenl Use dielecbic unions when connecting pipe of dissimilar materials.
Adapters: Provide adapters as required to join different types of piping systems.
THREADED PIPING SYSTEMS
Design: Fabricate branch connections using appropriate standard or reducing tees and
laterals. At prpe size changes use threaded reducing fittings or swaged nipples. Use
bushings only when reducing fittings arc not manufactured in the sizes required. At
piping terminations us€ only threaded nipples and caps.
Installation: Ream pipe to full bore after cutting and threading. Rernove dirt, chips and
threading oil. Apply prpe joint compound only to cleaned male tlueads just prior to
assembly. Where piping fabrication and preparation operations are being perfomred at
the Project site, provide adequate protection over all surfaces, allowing no chips, oil, dirt,
compounds and similar related items to drop on unprotected sufaces.
L Sealant:
a. Steam, Condensate, Boiler Feedwater, Boiler Blowdown: Anti-seize
compound.
b. All Other Seryices: Teflon tape.
COPPERPIPING SYSTEMS
Solder Joints: Use 95-5 tin-antimony solder ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA, and non-acid
flux. Clean and flux piping ends. Wipe excess solder, leaving a unifomr fillet around cup
of fitting.
Brazed Joints:
l. Use silver alloy brazing filler metal ASTM B 260, Type BAg-1 or BAg-2. Apply
non-corrosive flux of type recommended by filler alloy manufacturer. Heat joints
B.
B.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
G.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
r-7554.01 15060-5
3.04
A.
E.
3.05
A.
B.
c.
D.
to brazing temperature using oxy'acetylene torch with tip size as recommended by
fitting manufactruer.
Overheating Protection: Use heat sinks urher€ necessary to protect existing joints or
equipment which will be damaged by heat Remove composition discs from valves
before heating and replace wlren work is cool.
CAST IRON PIPING SYSTEMS
Mechanical Joints: Joints shall be mechanical type conforming to AI{SI A2l.l0 and
ANSI A2l.1l. Gaskets shall be neoprene. Use manufachr€ds standard bolts and nuts.
Coat with nrst-prcventive lubricant Install in accordance with manufacture/s
instructions. Use torque wrench to tighten bolts to equal tension.
Compression Type Push-On Joints: Joints sha[ be single gasket type conforming to
ANSI A21.10 and AI.{SI A2l.Ll. Gaskets shall be neoprene. Use manufacturet's
recommended lub,ricant and apply to splgot end during installation. Lubricant shall be
non-toxic, shall imp,ilt no tast€ or odor to the conveyed liquid and shall have no
deleterious effect on the rubber gasket
Lead-Oakum Caulked Joints: Joins shall be made up by use of oakum and molten virgin
pig lead. Use 12 ounc€s of molten lead per inch diameter of pipe or a depth of one inclr,
whichever is geater. After lead has coole4 seal and smoothly face the joint. Avoid
snaining the pipe or bell during caulking.
No-Hub Joints: Joints shall be ASA Group 022 conforming to CISPI Specification 301.
Clamps slntl be stainless steel. Install in accordance with manufactrrreds instnrctions.
Sanitary and Vent Piprng: Use wye or sanitary tees for b'ranch connections. Use long
sweep bends for changes in direction.
WELDED PIPING SYSTEMS
auahty Assurance: Comply with welding section of AI'{SVASME B3l.l, Code for
Power Piping, for workmanship, testing and general requirements. Welders shall be
certified by the National Weld Test Bureau, Hartford Stearn Boiler and Inspection Co. or
other similar acceptable bureau or agency.
l. Architect res€rves the right to require qualifying demonstrations of any welder
assigned to the Project by the Contaqtor or have welds tested for code compliance.
2. Submit sample welds for inspection upon request.
Preparation Of Piping For Welding: Bevel piping before welding. Bevel pipe with wall
thickness up to 3/4 inch the standard 37-12 degree angle. Use a cutting torch with the
prpe in a pipe cutting and beveling machine. Use weld spacing on all butt welds as
follows:
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
t
I
l
B.
1s060-6 t-7554.01
I
r Nominal Pipe Wall Thickness Spacing
l/4 inch or less l/8 inch
' Over l/4 inclr.less than 3/4 inch 3/16 inch
I l. Remove all corrosive products and other foreigr material from surfaces to be
welded by scraping, brushing, chipping and swabbing at may be required before
r any welding is perforrred. Such cleaning strall eldend back from top of the bevel
I on the outside and from face ofland on the inside ofjoint at least l/4 inch.
I C. Welding Pnrcess:
I l. Pipe Foru Inches and Smaller: Perform welding either by means of gas welding,
oxy-acetylene, process, or by metallic arc process with coated electrodes.
2. Pipe Over Four lnches: Perform welding by metallic arc process with coated
electrodes.
3. Electrodes For Welding: Comply with ASTM A233 andAWS A5.l and be one of
the following classes: 86010, E60l l, E6016, or E6020.
a 4. GCI WeldingRods: ComplywithASTMA25l, GA-60.
t D. Design: Use long radius type elbows at changes in direction of piping. Use welding
fittings exclusively except as otherwise specified or shown. Use eccentric welding
I reducing fittings at changes in pipe sizes when specifically indicated. Use standard tees
I or laterals at branch connections. Make all reducing branch connections using outlet
fittings that provide the appropriate branch connections.
I 3.06 BLTRIED PTPTNG
I A. Cast hon Piprng: Shape tench bottom to give rmiform circumferential support to the
t lower full length of each section of pipe. Excavate bell holes so that after placement only
the pipe barrel receives bearing support from the tench. Do not use spalls, shims or
I lumps to adjust p,pe to grade. Lay pipe proceeding upgrade with bells pointing upgrade.
t Lay each pipe to line and gmde and in such a manner as to form a close concentric joint
with adjoining pipe.
I 3.07 PITCHAND DRAINAGE
I A. Water Piping Systems: Grade and valve with 3/4 inch hose end globe valves to permit
I complete drainage of system. Vent high points in equipment rooms as necessary with
automatic air vents piped to nearest drain fixture. Vent high points in system outside of
I equipment rooms with manual air vents as required to relieve air in the system. Refer tot Section 15100 for valve and air vent specifications.
I
I l-7554.01 15060-7
B. lvfain Sanitary and Storm Lines Within Building; Install with uniform fall of not less
than one inch in 8 feet. Install branches with uniform fall of not less than one inch in 4
feel Anchor vertical lines at each floor.
C. Sanitary Vent Lines: Pitch horizontal vent lines one inch in 40 feet back to fixtures.
3.08 PIPEHANGERS
A. General: Provide complete system of support for all piping.
l. Horizontal Lines: hovide as specified and/or shown on the Drawings.
2. V€rticd Lines: Provide zupports at each floor as specified and/or shown on the
Drawings.
3. Spacing: hovide pipe hangen to completely support systerns without sagging,
including hangers at each off-set or change in directioq and at each b,ranch.
Spacing of supports shall be as follows, rmless otherwise specified or indicated on
the Drawings:
Steel Pipe:
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
PIPE SZE
(Inches)
t/2
3/4 ta I
Lln62
2-tnb3
4to 6
8to 12
Copper Pipe:
PIPE SIZE
(Inches)
ll2ra l-l/2
2 and larger
15060-8
N,IA)( HANGER
SPACING
(Feet)
6
I
l0
l0
T{ANGERROD
DIAMETER
(nches)
3t8
3/8
l0
t2
3/8
t/2
5/8
7t8
MAX.HANCER HANGERROD
SPACING DIAMETER
(Feet) (Inches)
6 3/8
t0 3/8
l-7554.0r
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
Cast Iron Pipe:
PIPE SIZE
(Inches)
All Sizes,
and at Joins
I',IN(HANGER HANGERROD
SPACING DIAMETER(Feet) (Inches)
5 ll2
4. Support cast iron soil pipe at everyjoin! e:<cept that spacing is not to exceed 5 feet.
Provide supports at each branch connectioq on each water closet bend or elbow
and at each trap.
B. Trapzn }langers: Support two or mor€ parallel plpes on vapreza hangers where possible.
Select to support five times the weight or thnrst applied without failure. Non-insulated
steel pipe shall bave clips at each support Non-insulated copper pipe shall rest on
neoprcne sleeves with a clip at each support. Establish spacing for smallest size of pipe
to be zupported in accordance with table below Paragraphs 4., 5., 6., and 7. under
Paragraph A. above.
C. Insulation Shields: Install insulation shields on all pipe where insulation is specified at
each hanger, clip or other pip€ support and at wall, ceiling or floor penetrations, refer to
Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.09 FLUSHINGA}.IDSTERJLIZING
A. General: Blow out all piping with air and then completely wash out cleaning compounds
before final connections ofpiping systems.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Sterilize with approved chlorinating agent to provide a dosage
of not less than 50 ppm after flushing. After a minimum contact period of 24 hours,
system shall be flushed with clean water until rcsidual chlorine is no grcater than that of
the water supply. All procedures shall comply withAWWA Specification C-601.
C. Sewer Systems: Flush and clean sewer lines, remove water and debris before final
connection to existing sewer.
3.10 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
l. General: Tese shall be witnessed and approved by authorities having jurisdiction,
where required. Repair all defects and repea.t test procedure until a satisfactory test
is obtained.
B. Piping shall be thoroughly cleanedon inside before beginning tests.
l-7554.01 15060-9
L Perform tess before any insulation is applied to piping and before piping is
concealed or bruied.
a Perform these tests on all piping, tubing, fittings andjoints after fabrication
and installation in field.
b. Fumish all miscellaneou instnrments and equipment that are required for
iesting.
c. Prior to testirry pipe systems, rcmove or otherwise protect with readily
recopizable blanks those compon€nts which are not desigred to withstand
pressures used in testing piping.
d. During testing, unless otheruise starc4 piping, tubing, fiuings and joints
shall safely withstand test prcssur€ without showing failure, leakage, pressure
loss or distortion for specified time period.
C. Drain and Waste Piping: Test with standing water test of l0 feet of head.
D. Instnrment Air, Plant Air, Fuel Oil and Fuel Gas Piping: Pneumatic test at 1.25 times
design working pressure.
E. Test Duration:
l. Hydrostatic Tests: Hold for a minimum of eight hours without loss of pressure.
2. Pneumatic Tests: Hold for a minimum of two hours without loss of pressuie.
3.II PIPEIDENTIFICATION
A. Pipe Marken: Apply on new and existing above-gmrmd straight pipe runs inside and
outside of Mechanical Rooms after insulation is applied at not over 20 feet spacing, and
adjacent to all valves, and at changes in direction, and wherc piping passes through walls
and floors, cleady visible from operating positions. Apply arrows showing direction of
flow at all Pipe Marken.
B. Identification Tags: Where pip€s ar€ too small or not readily accessible for application
pf pipe markers, fasten l-12 inch diameter brass tag wittr l/2 inch depressed black letten
as specified for pipe markers.
C. Identification: Legends and colors shall be as designated for the services listed below:
Servrce
Domestic Cold Water
Domestic Hot Water
Nanual Gas
Legend
(l)
(l)
(l)
Color
Green
Yellow
Yellow
T
I
t
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
15060-10
Notes: Legend same as Service name.
l-7554.01
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.12 PIPING SCHEDI.JLE
Service
Domestic Cold Water
Above Growd
Domestic Hot Water
Natural Gas
LowPressure Steam
Sanitary & Vent
Above Ground
Sanit{y & Vent
BelowGrormd
Instrument Air
cw
HW
NG
LPS
s,v
IA
END OF SECTION
S,V
t-7554.01 15060-l l
I
SECTION 15IOO
r vALvEs AI\ID SPECIALTIES
I PARrI-GENERAL
I.OI RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work.
I B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
t C. Section 15900 - Contols and InstnrmenlatiorL temperature contol valves.
I PART2-PRODUCTS
2.OI BALLVALVES
I A. Type B: Cast bronze body, bronze ball, full por! 150 psig SWP with blowout-prooft silicon bronze stem and teflon seat for above 180 degrees F., or Brura N seat for 180 de-
grees F. and below, solder joint ends.
I ; Application: copper pipe, all sizes.
I 2.02 PLUG VALVES
I A. Type A: Bronze body, square head stop with check pin, flat way, standard pattem,
threaded.
If l. Application: Natural gas,2" and smaller.
I 2.03 MTSCELLANEOUS VALVES
A. Pressr.re Relief Valves:I ,. ffi. s;*Hs""t".1,*H"'ftT"ffij".fifr'#,i3i:?l:t,ftr;x5:-#r'H;I #1ffi*rH"il"*iilHff'Kuiff;;:1,ff::",ffii$t13#ffiffiI temperatur€ exceeds 200 degrees F. and be firlly open before 210 degrees F. Size,
location and Btu rating point as shown on the Drawings.
r a- t$illE:1ffi*S:ff_:H#lk"Hr"l1*:e.with requirements, A.w.
I z.o4 vACTJTJMBREAKERs
A. Type A: Bronze, 200 psig, 250 degrees F, 3/4 inch male, threaded, for hot water storageItanks.
B. Type B: Bronze, anti-siphon type, full line size, with check valve and atmospheric vent
I for hose connections.
!' C. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Clayon Valve
Company; Febco; or Watts Regulator are acceptable.
I
I
r-7ss4.0r 15100-l
o
ABSORBERS
Constnrction: Stainless steel bellows typ€ with combination pressurized nitro-
gen-hydraulic fluid compression charnber.
B. Certification: Units shall be certified in accordance with Plumbing and DrafuEge lnstitute
Standard WH-201.
C. Approved Manufacturers: Subject tro compliance with rcquirements, Josam; Jay R. Smith;
Wade; or Zurn are acceptable.
2.06 AIRVENTS
A. Type A: Brass, manual type.
l. Approved Manufacturen: Subject to compliance with requirements, Armstrong
Pump; Bell & Gosse$ orTaco are acceptable.
B. Type B: Brass, automatic float tlT€, 250 psig, 2zt0 degees F, with l/4 inch overflow
connection.
l. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Armstrong
Pump; Bell & Gossett; or Taco are acceptable.
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.OI VALVEINSTALLATION
A. Positioning: Install valves with stems in vertical.position full accessible unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer or shown.
B. Valves Isolating Floor-Mormted Equipmenl Locate no higher than 7'-0" above floor
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Isolation Valves For Ceiling Or Wall-Mounted Equipment Locate in the most accessible
location possible.
3.A SPECIALTYINSTALLATION
A. General: Install specialty it€ms in accordance with manufacturels instructions.
B. Shock Absorbers: Install on all domestic hot and cold water branch lines where shown
on Drawings in accordance with PDI WH-201 and manufacturefs instructions. Letter
symbol corresponds to PDI WH-201.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
T
2.05
A.
SHOCK
15100-2 t-7554.01
I
SECTION 15250
I MECHANI.ALINSULATION
I PARrI-.EMRAL
I l.0l RELATED SECTION
I A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work
I
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE
I A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
- five years experience.
I B. Installers: lnsulation shall be ap'plied only by mechanics skilled at such work.
1.03 SAFETYREQURET{ENTS
I A. Fire and Smoke Hazard Classification Rating On Composite,Insulation, Jacket and
Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 225, ASTM E 84 and UL-723 as follows:
I l. Flame Spread Rating: Not to exceed 25.
2. Fuel ConEibuted: Not to exceed 50.
I B. Smoke Developed: Not to exceed 50.
I 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each insulation system specifred hereinafter
I to include insulation,jackets and covers, adhesives, coatings, sealants and cements.
I PART2-PRoDUcrs
I 2.01 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATTON
I A. Insulation: Rigid molded fiber glass pipe covering having a density of 4 pounds/cubic
foot, in compliance with ASTM C 547, having a k-factor of approximately 0.23 at 75
degrees F., and suitable for temperatures from minus 40 degrees F. to 450 degrees F.
B. Jacket Factory applied vapor barrier all-service type with self-sealing lap and butt
strips.
C. Valve, Fitting and Flange Covers: Pre-molded PVC covers with fiber glass insert.
I 2,02 ELASToMERIC PIPE INSULATIoN
r A. Insulation: Cellular elastomeric flexible pipe covering having a density range of 5 to
I 6-112 poundVcubic foot, in compliance with ASTM C 534, having a k-factor of, approximately 0.28 at 75 degrees F. and suitable for temperatures from minus 40
_ degrees F. to 220 degrees F.
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 15250-1
o
Flame Spread:
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
T
T
I
B. Maximum 25.
C. Maximuar Smoke Developed: 50 (3/4" thick and below). 100 (above 3/4" thick).
D. Valve, Fitting and Flange Covers: Same as pipe insulation, cut to fit.
2.03 FACED FrBER GLASS EQUPMENT INSULATION
A. Insulation: Rigid molded fiber glass boards having a density of 3 pounds/cubic foot, in
compliance with ASTM C 612, having a k-factor of approximately 0.22 at 75 degrees
F., and zuitable for temperatures up to 250 degrees F.
B. Jacket: Factory applied vapor barrier facing, secured with ttl- listed pressure sensitive
tape and./or outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.
2.04 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Armstrong;
CertainTeed; Insul-Tube; Knauf; Manville; Owens-Corning Fiberglas; and Rubatex are
acceptable.
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in a smoottr, clean, manner in accordance with the best accepted
practices ofthe trade. Joints shall be tiSht and finished smooth. Cracked, chipped, and
-torn sections shall not be used in the work.
B. Surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and free of loose scale, rust dirl oil or water when
insulation is applied.
C. Fit insulation tightly against surface to which it is applied.
D. Insulation applied to cold, below 100 degrees F., piping, equipment and ductwork shall
be completely vapor sealed and free ofpinholes or other openings. Staples shall not be
used.
E. Do not apply sealant or cement until all previous applications of adhesives and cement
have thoroughly dried.
F. Restore existing insulation and surface finishes distwbed or damaged during the course
of the work in a manner acceptable to Architect.
G. All required tests on piping, equipment and ductwork shall be completed prior to
application of insulation.
H, Apply insulation so as to permit expansion or contraction of pipe lines without causing
damage to insulation or surface finish.
I. Specified pipe insulationjackets shall be factory applied whenever available.
J. Terminate preformed pipe covering at a sufficient distance from valve flanges to permit
removal of bols.
15250-2 r-7554.01
N.
o.
P.
a.
B.
c.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
R.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
B.
K. Insulation on flanges shall overlap adjacent pipe covering 2 inches. Valves shall be
insulated up to the gland.
Insulation shall be continuous through pipe covering protection saddles,. or shall butt
tightly against insulation protection sf,iefa'units instafle-d as part of the piping work.
Pipe line stainers shall be insulated in such a manner as to permit removal of strainer
basket without distr.ubing insulation on the strainer body.
Pipe insulation and vapor banier shall be continuous through sleeves or openings in
walls and floors.
Furnish premolded pipe insulation with extended leg when used on pipes traced with
either piping or cable.
Do not insulate unions.
Where insulation terminates for any reason, taper to pipe and finish with insulating
cement.
Install all insulation and accessories per the manufacturer's instructions.
FIBER GLASS PIPE INSULATION
Pipe: Stagger longitudinal joints. Tightly butt the sections and seal longitudinal seams
of vapor barrier jacket with vapor barier lap adhesive in addition to the self sealing
feature. Seal circumferential end joints with butt strips of vapor barrier material and
vapor barrier lap adhesive. Above a fluid operating temperature of 80 degrees F.,
outrvard clinch staples may be used in place ofadhesive. Seal pipe ends, valves, and
fittings of cold piping with vapor barrier coating.
Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cover with pre-molded glass fiber covering having
same thickness as adjacent insulation. Finish with PVC cover. Seal cover joints on
cold piping with vapor barrier coating or vapor barrier adhesive tape.
Surface Finish:
l. Indoor: No further finish required.
2. Outdoor: Cover with a factory or field applied 0.016 inch smooth 5005 alloy
aluminum jacket. Lap joints downward to shed water. Finish circumferential
joints with prefabricated aluminum or stainless steel straps and waterproof metal
lap sealant.
ELASTOMEzuC PIPE INSULATION
Pipe: Slip insulation over pipe or slit insulation sections and apply around pipe. Seal
longitudinal and circumferential joints with foamed plastic contact adhesive.
Valves, Fittings and Flanges: Fabricate sheet or tubing insulation into covers by
butting and mitering joints as required. Seal all joints with foamed plastic contact
adhesive.
l-7554.01 15250-3
o
GLASS
o
LANKET
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
3.04 FACED FIBER DUCT INSI.]LATION B
A. Ductwork shall be covered by adhering insulation with flexible blanket adhesive.
Adhesive shall be applied in 6 inch strips on a minimum of 12 inch centers. Tightly
butt the insulation and lap vapor barrier jacket minimum 2 inches at all joints. Secure
laps with vapor barrier lap adhesive. Ducts with a width over 30 inches shall be firther
sebured on the underside with mechanical fasteners on l8 inch centerr.
B. Termin&te and seal insulation where thermometers, coitols, darrper linkages, flexible
connections, test connections, access doors, and similar items, occur in ductwork so as
not to interfere with their function and/or replacement.
C. Flexible connections shall not be insulated.
D. Seal all terminating edges of insulation by lapping vapor barrier jacket to duct securing
with vapor barrier adhesive. Further wrap full circumference with vapor barrier tape
set in vapor barrier lap adhesive.
E. Surface Finish:
l. Indoor: No further finish required.
2. Outdoors: Apply a tack coat of weatherproof mastic coating and embed a layer
of glass fabric lapping all joints a minimum of 2 inches. Follow this application
with an additional layer of weatherproof coating l/8 inch thick.
3.05 FrELD QUALTTY CONTROL
A. Insulation Protection: Protection against. dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage
before, during and after installation.
B. Damage: Any such insulation or covering darnaged prior to final acceptance of the
Work shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced.
C. Cleanup: Upon completion of the Worlq thoroughly clean all floors, walls, ceilings,
equipment" and similar items of all adhesives, paints, cements, empty containers, scraps
and other miscellaneous materials, leaving said surfaces in the same conditions of
cleanliness as they were found.
3.06 GLASS FIBER PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
PIPE SIZE THICKNESS(Inch) (Inch)
Plumbing Systems
Domestic Hot Water Supply
Domestic Cold Water
Plumbing Vents Within l0 Feet
of the Exterior
t/2
t/2
to2
all
152504
U2
r-75s4.01
I
I
I ExposedHandicappedlavatory
Drain, Hot and Cold
Water Piping
Plenums
I supply Ductsl
I
.-'il:;,-r"n
withinthe conditioned space.
I
2Except in return air plenums.
o
3.07 ELASTOMERIC FOAM PIPING INSULATION
o
SCHEDULE
I
t
I
I
3.08 FLE)(IBLE GLASS FIBER DUCTWORK INSULATION SCI{EDI.JLE
DUCTWORK
Exhaust Ducts Within 10
ft of Exterior Openings
Outside Air Intake Ducts
END OF SECTION
PIPE SIZE THICKNESS(Inch) (Inch)
all ll2
THICKNESS
(Inch)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I r-7554.01 15250-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15400
PLTJMBING
PART I.GENERAL
I.O1 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Sumrnary Of Work.
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
D. Section 15100 - Valves and Specialties.
E. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation.
F. Section 15440 - Plumbing Equipment.
r.02 scoPE
A. Sanitary Drainage System Inside Building: Extent of system shall include the building
drains, branch piping, soil waste and vent stacks, fixture traps and other related items as
hereinafter specified and connections to plumbing fixtures, floor drains and other
equipment indicated on Drawings or specified as requiring waste, drain and/or vent
facilities. Building sanitary drains shall interface with sanitary sewers approximately 5
feet outside building wall.
B. Cold Water Oistribrltion: Extent of system shall include distribution pipes, necessary
connecting pipes, fittings, shut-offvalves and other supply specialties as indicated on
the Drawings and as specified herein, and connections to plumbing frxtures and other
equipment indicated on the Drawings and specified as requiring cold water, including
connections to equipment fumished under other Sections and Divisions of these
Specifications.
C. Domestic Hot Water Distribution systems shall include hot water heaters, water
distribution lines, necessary connecting pipes, fittings, shut-offvalves, and other parts
specified herein and indicated on Drafthls and connections to plumbing fixtures and
other equipment requiring hot water, including connections to equipment fumished
under other Sections and Divisions ofthese Specifications.
D. Gas Distribution systems shall include all piping, fittings, valves and other items
specified herein from the downstream side of the meter throughout the building, and
connections to equipment requiring gas.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERJALS
A. Piping: Comply with Section 15060.
B. Valves: Comply with Section 15100.
C. Insulation: Comply with Section 15250.
l-7554.01 15400-l
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A. Approved Manufactuers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Josarn; Jay R.
Smith; Wade; or Zum are acceptable.
l. Model numbers for Jay R. Smith are given for reference.
B. Locations: Provide cleanouts where indicated on Drawings and, even if not indicated,
at points of change in direction geater than 45 degrees in horizontal drains, at 50 foot
intervals inside building in staight runs, at end of branch drains, and at or close to base
of soil and waste stacks.
C. Size: Cleanouts shall be full size of plpe on pipes up to 4 inches in diameter and 4
inches for larger pipes.
D. Plugs For Cleanouts: Brass or b'ronze with countersunk slot and lead seal.
E. Cleanouts In Concrete: frame with round, adjustable nickel bronze cover having
vandal-proof screw-secured cover with scoriated exposed surface and uCOu legend,. flashing flange and spigot outlet. Jay R. Smith 4020.
L Carpeted Floors: Provide standard cover in lieu of vandal-proofl with carpet
marker.
2. Resilient Floors: Less cover and with 7 inch by 7 inch access frame and cover
recessed for tile, vandal-proof scr€ws. Jay R. Smith 4160.
F. Cleanouts In Walls:
l. Tee Cleanouts: Enamel coated cast iron tee with hub and spigot conneitions and
plug. Jay R. Smith 4510.
2. Hub Cleanouts: Enamel coated cast iron cleanout femrle with spigot connection
and plug. Jay R. Smith 4400.
3. Wall Access Covers For Dry Wall Constnrction: Nickel bronze, face-of-wall
type, square frame and plarc with anchor lugs and vandal-proof screw-secured
plate. Jay R. Smith 4730.
G. Outdoor Cleanouts: Enameled cast iron access frame with anchor flanges and heavy
duty scoriated nickel bronze cover with "CO" legend and vandal-proof screws.
Enameled cast iron femrle with plug and spigot connection. Jay R. Smith 4520.
2.03 TRAPS
A. Separate Fixtue Traps: Provide traps for fixtures and other equipment requiring
connection to drainage systems, except where trap is an integral part ofthe unit design.
B. Floor Drain Traps: Traps for floor drains and the like shall be approved "P" pattern.
Material, weight and joint type shall conform to pipe and fittings of drainage system in
which installed.
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15400-2 r-7554.01
I
PART3.DGCUTION
I 3.OI INSTALLATION
I A. Install as specified in individual Sections.
I 3.02 TRAPs
I A. Install in accordance with manufacturey's instructions.!
3.03 FLASHINGS
I A. Vents: Flash through roof with sheet lead flashing or with cast iron sleeve.
I L Lead Sleeve Installation: Peen lead sleeve over top of vent one inch with
t sufficient clearance to allow for vent pipe expansion.
2. Cast Iron Sleeve Installation: Caulk to vent and fasten roof flashing to clamp
device to make a watertight and durable joint.
I 3.04 BTJILDING STORM AND SANITARY SEWER SERVICES PIPING
I A. Location Of Sanitary Sewer Line: Where not clearly defined by dimensions on the- Drawings, the sewei shall be not closer than l0 feet horizontally from water supply
r mains or service lines, except that if the top of the sewer line is 3 feet or more below
t fl"r*trif,r:f the water line, the sewer line may be placed no closer than 6 feet
I B. Sel"e, tioes Crossing Water Lines: Where sanitary or storm sewer line crosses within
t 3 feet above orbelolia water line, constnrct sewer line ofcast iron l0 feet each side of
water line with no joint in the sewer line within 3 feet horizontally of the water line.
r END OF SECTION
I -7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15400-3
t
SECTION 15440
T PLTJMBING EQUIPMENT
I PART I'GENERAL
t l.ol RELATED sEcrroNs
I A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work.I B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
I C. Section 15400 - Plumbing.
I D. Product Data: Submit Product Data for all products specified.
I PART2-PRoDUCTS
I 2.OI APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
I A. Model numbers of certain manufacturers are given herein for reference purposes.
I Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are:
t l. Fixtures and Trim: American-Sundard, Crane, Eljer, Kohler.
I 2. Trim (Additional Acceptable): Chicago Faucet, Delt4 Speakman, Symmons,
3. Carriers, Drains: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zum.
I 4. Seats: Beneke, Church, Olsonite.
I 5. Flush Valves: Delany, Sloan, Speakman, Watrous, Zurn Aquaflush.
I 6. Sinks: American-Standar4 Crane, Elkay, Just.
I 7. Mop Service Basins: Fiat, Stem Williams.r 8. Electic Water Coolers: Cordley, Elkay, Halsey-Taylor, Haws, Oasis, Sunroc.
t 9. Floor Drains, Roof Drains: Jonespec, Josam, Wade, Zurn.
) N) I AVATORIESI! A. Wall-mounted handicapped type, white vitreous china, 20 inches by 27 inches lavatory,
installed on concealed arm carriers.
t B. Chrome-plated all brass 17 gage 1-ll4 inch P-hap with cleanout, l-ll4 inch offset type
tailpiece with integral grid strainer, flexible supplies with loose key stops, and chrome-
I plated brass washerless single-handle centerset faucet with aerator.
! 2.03 wATER cLosETS
I A. Tank type, floor mounted, elongated front, 18 inch high bowl, rear outlet, siphon jet,I white vitreous china closet bowl, with close-coupled tank and water-conserving trim,
I
I
t-7554.01 15440-l
O
lid white
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
china bolt caps; flexible supply with loose key stop; so plastic, closed front,
cover, stainless steel bolts.
2.04 URINALS
A. UR-l: White, vitreous china washout type with integral extended shields, flushing rim,
tap and 3/4 inch top spud, flush valve with vacuum breaker on screwdriver 3/4 inch
angle stop, and canier with bottom bearing plate feet or block base as required.
l. Urinal: American-Standard650l.0l0.
2. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 186-1.
2.05 SINKS
A. l8 gage T302, l8-8 stainless steel two compartnent sink with extended back ledge and
sormd dampening; overall dimensions 22 inches by 33 inches wide; chrome-plated all
brass mixing faucets with 9-ll2 inch swing spout vandalproof aerator, flexible supplies
with formed ends, union nuts and stops, vandalproof handles.
B. l-l/2 inch chromeplated all brass waste tubing and ptrap with cleanout, chrome-plated
brass open-grid strainer.
2.06 ELECTRICWATERCOOLERS
A. Surface-mounted handicapped type witlt recessed rcfrigeration system, stainless steel
body, stainless steel top and trim, flexible bubbler, with integral strainer, chrome-plated
all brass l-l/4 inch trap, automatic stream regulator and screwdriver stop, and
self-closing push-bar valve.
B. Fan-cooled refrigerated condensing unit to cool 8 GPH from 80 degrees F to 50 degrees
F with 90 degree F room temperature.
C. Electrical: I 15 volts, single phase.
2.07 JANITOR'S SINK
A. MSB-I: Precast molded stone, 24 inches by 24 inches with l0 inch high sides and 3
inch integral cast drain" removable strainer plate, stainless steel threshold caps on all
exposed sides, and chrome-plated all brass faucet with rigid hose-end spout and pail
hook, integral stops, vacuum breaker and wall brace.
l. Basin: FiatMSB-2424.
2. Faucet: Chicago 897.
2.08 GARBAGE DISPOSERS
A. Food waste disposer with stainless steel grinding compartment, removable splash
guard, sound shiel4 fast-mount installation. ll2Hp ll5 volt 8000 rpm direct-wire
motor..
15440-2 1-7554.01
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
RANTS2.09
A.
2.10
A.
WALL HYD
WH-l: Non-freeze, self-draining type with chrome plated bronze wall plate, lockable
recessed box, hose thread spouicyiinder lock, andintegxal vacuum breaker. Jay R.
Smith 5509.
WATERHEATERS
ElilH-l: Electric, UL and NSF listed with heater element(s), controls, insulated
glass-lined tank, enameled steel jacket, dual anode rods, drain valve and over-tempera-
ture protector.
Three year tank waranty.
Performance as scheduled on the Drawings.
1. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, National;
Ruud; A. O. Smith; and State are acceptable.
B.
c.
PART3 -E)GCUNON
3.OI FIXTI.JREINSTALLATION
A. Connections: Install all fixtures and/or rough-in according to the fixture connection
schedule on the Drawings.
Mounting: Secure fixtures to walls and floor or countertops in accordance with manu-
facturer's roughing in and setting requirements and form a rigid installation.
Exposed Pipe: Brass chrome finish and finished with chrome cover plates or escutch-
eons where they project from walls and floors near the fixture to which they are con-
nected.
Stop Valves: Fumish and install at all fixtures and rough-in locations.
Vacuum Breakers: Provide at all outlets with hose connections.
Venting: Vent each fixnue in accordance with sound plumbing practice and applicable
codes, to a vent stack through the roof. Should the Drawings depict a conservative ap-
proach requiring extra venting or morc material than the codes require as a minimum,
install the waste and vent piping as shown on the Drawings.
Miscellaneous Hose Bibbs: Provide a hose bibb in each mechanical equipment room
where there is a cold water line present.
Joints Between Fixtures and Walls: Fill with white plastic seam compound.
Drain Flashings: Install roof drains and floor drains with 36 inch square 4 pound sheet
lead or 40 mil chlorinated polyethylene flashing clamped into the fixture.
Gas VenI Install in accordance with manufacturels instructions and clearance re-
quirements.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
l-7554.01 15440-3
o
CHTS
I
I
I
3.02
A.
D.
FIXTI.JRE HEI
Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated and, for those fixhres des-
ignated as handicapped, in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA). lnstall other components such as pushbuttons in accordance with ADA.
Water Closet:
l. Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim.
2. Handicapped: 18 inches to top ofseat,44 inches to flush valve control.
Urinal:
l. Standard: 24 inches to top of bowl rim.
2. Handicapped: 17 inches to top of bowl rim, 44 inches to flush valve control.
Lavatory:
l. Standard: 3l inches to top of basin rim.
2. Handicapped: 34 inches to top of basin rim.
Drinking Fountairu Elecuic Water Cooler:
l. Standard: 40 inches to top of basin rim.
2. Handicapped: 36 inches to iop ofspout.
END OF SECTION
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
It54404t-7554.0r
I
I sEcrroN 15800
AIRDISTRIBUTION
t PARrI-.ENERAL
I l.or RELATED sEcrroNs
I
t
I A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work.
I B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
I C. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation.
' D. Section 15900 - Controls and kstrumentation. induct control elements.
I r.oz suBMrrALs
I A. Submitthe following:
l. Ductwork Submit Shop Drawings, drawnto scale, of complete duct layout.
2. Indicate dl fire and smoke dampers, control dampers, access doors, air terminals
and accessories.
3. Note all potential interferences with piping, conduit, structural elements, equipment
and building features.
t 4. Equipmentl Submit Product Data on all products specified hereunder to includer :['"i"*Tff*H,J"Hfl:1ff' ffi:"#;"r r*fr:Ht il"":H:*,T:! compliance with these Specifications
I r.o3 sAFETY REeT.nREMENTSI
A. Fire and Smoke Hazafi Classification: All products which make up the various air
I distribution systems and all parts of these systems installed in or above ceilings shallr comply with and/or be rated in accordance with the applicable requirements of NFPA
90A, NFPA 225, ASTM E 84 and W-?23.II B. Maximum Permissible Ratings:
t
I
I
l-7554.01
t
1. Flame Spread: 25.
2. Smoke Developed: 50.
15800-l
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Insulation: Comply with Section 15250.
B. Duct Liner: Bonded fiberglass sheet with thermosetting acrylic polymer surface on
air side.
l. Thermal conductance of 0.23 per inch at 75 degrees F.
2. Thickness: One inch.
3. Duct sizes shown on Drawings are inside clear.
4. Approved Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, Schuller
International Linacoustic HP is acceptable.
2.02 DUCTWORK
A. Startup: Prior to operating an air handling system all foreign material shall be removed
from interior of ductworh fans, dampers, coils and plenums. Air handling systems are
to be operated only when filten are in place and replaced as per manufactureds
recommendations.
B. Contol Elements: Install air flow switches, flow measuring elements, and
motor-operated dampen ready for final connection of motor operators where indicated
on Drawings, and as specified under Section 15900.
C. Equipment Connections: Connect to mechanical equipment as indicated on Drawings
and/or as specified in these Specifications. Make transition as required to connect to
equipment furnished.
D. Field Conections and Modifications: Ductwork shall be coordinated with the work of
other trades as required. Installation shall be planned and coordinated in advance to
avoid interferences to the matdmum extent possible. Where, in the course of
installation, interferences are found to exist, make the changes necessary to accomplish
the installation satisfactorily, at no change to the Contract Amount, with the prior
written approval of the Architect.
E. Ductwork and Accessories:
l. Rigid Low Pressure Ductwork: Neq lock-forming quality sheet steel having a
galvanized coating of 1.25 ounces total for both sides of one square foot with
materials, constmction details, gauges, weights and thicknesses for ducts,
hangers, damper plenums, access doors and tuming vanes in accordance with the
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I15800-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as shown
and specified.
2. Flat Oval and Round Ductwork: Zinc-coated steel fabricated with lock type or
welded longitudinal seams. Fittings shall be all welded zinc-coated steel.
3. Tuming Vanes: Double thickness, spaced, located, dimensioned and constructed
in accordance with SMACNA.
4. Duct Sealer:
a. Ductwork shall be sealed in accordance with SMACNA.
b. Sealing shall include alljoints, seams, holes and other openings.
c. Sealing shall also include all connections to fans, air terminals, volume
contol boxes, sound attenuators and all other parts of the air distribution
system including air handling unit sections.
F. Flexible Ducts: UL l8l listed, fabric supported by helically wound spring steel wire or
flat steel bands; rated to 2 inches WG positive and 1.5 inches WG negative for low
pressure ducts, and 15 inches WG positive or negative for medium high pressure ducts.
. L Provide factory pre-shaped oval end for connections to oval inlets.
2. Limit each connection to 6 feet and change of direction to 90 degrees.
3. Attach to equipment collars and matching duct or sheet metal htting by minimum
of 4 inch slip type engag€ment.
4. Coat collars and duct with liquid duct sealant just prior to slip joining.
5. Secure to both the duct and the equipment collar with a l/2 inch wide stainless
steel factory preformed locking type wo'nn screw clamping band pulled up tight
to result in air tight connections.
G. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible Duct wrapped with flexible glass f,rber insulation,
enclosed by seamless aluminum-pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23
K value at 75 degrees F.
2.03 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as
indicated.
B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either
direction, and two gages heavier for sizes ovet 24 inches.
t
I
t
I
I t-7554.01 15800-3
l. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum l/4 inch
diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set
screw.
C. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-ll2x 30 inch.
D. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattem with modmum blade sizes 12 x
72 nch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized
channel frarne with suitable hardware.
E. Except in rorurd ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple
blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
F. Provide locking, indicating qua&ant regulaton on single and multi-blade dampers.
Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
G. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-offmounting brackets, bases, or
adapters.
2.04 SPIN.IN FITTINGS
A. Bellmouth typ€ with locking quadnnt damper, tapered body with bead, constructed of
26 gage galvanized steel.
2.05 BACKDRAFTDAMPERS
A. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16 gage
galvanized steel, or extnrded aluminun, with edge-pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch
width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with
90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to
permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.06 FLHflBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Constmction Standards, and as
indicated. Provide between all fans and air handling units and their connecting duct-
work, and wherever shownon the Drawings.
l. Connectors shall be securely fastened to the unit and adjacent ductwork in a
manner that provides a leaktight connection while permitting easy adjustment or
removal.
2. Misalignment between equipment and its connecting ductwork shall not be taken
up in a flexible connection.
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
T
15800-4 l-7554.01
t
I
I
t
B. UL listed fue-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,
minimum densrty 25 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches, crimped into metal edging
stip.
2.07 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as
indicated.
Review locations prior to fabrication.
Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and
quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch
thidk insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller Olan 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.
E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to l8 inches square, three hinges
and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48
inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.
F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.08 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene
plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw
cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT PRESSURE CLASSES
A. Fabricate all ductwork to SMACNA 2 inch static pressure class.
3.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Duct and Plenum Construction: All sheet metal duct, plenum and casing construction
shall conform to the pressure classifications shown on the Drawings and shall be in
accordance with the constnrction details and installation details in the cunent edition of
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
l. In case of conflicting or incomplete information as to the correct pressure class,
obtain direction from the Architect prior to fabrication.
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
c.
t-7554.01 15800-5
2. Materials and equipment furnished and/or installed under the work of this
Section ofthe Specifications shall be stored handle4 installed, tested and put in
operation in stict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as
specified.
3. Except as specifically shown on Drawings or specified herein, piping, electical
conduig building elements, and similar items shall not come in contact with or
pass through ducts or casings.
a No obstnrctions, unless detailed on the Drawings, shall be allowed inside
of ducnrrorh plenums or casings without written approval of the Architect.
b. Such obstnrctions, if approved by the Architect, shall be streamlined using
the same material and gauge as the duct and constructed in accordance with
current edition of SMACNA LPDS or IIPDS.
4. Duct elbows in rectangular ductwork shall be standard radius, spa.ce permitting,
or miter type with double thickness tuming vanes. Install only radius or five
segment elbows in round or oval ductwork.
5. Provide adjustable air-turning devices at all low pressure supply duct branch
takeoffs, including short takeoffs at grilles, registers and diffirsen.
a. Furnish supplemental support rails where required for proper operation and
fasten sheet metal over any duct lining subject to damage when operating
the device.
b. Adjusting rods shall terminate with regulators installed in lccations
permitting easy access for adjusnnent.
6. Branch takeoffs shall be made in accordance with SMACNA.
7. Provide access doors in accordance with Section 15050, Basic Materials and
Methods, at all locations other than in lift-out ceilings where there are balancing
damper or air-tuming device operators.
B. Ducts Penetrating Partitions, Ceilings and Floors:
l. Openings for ducts passing through floors, walls or ceilings shall be packed with
mineral fiber insulation unless shown otherwise on Drawing details.
2. Openings for ducts passing through fire-rated floors, walls or ceilings shall be
sleeved and complete with fire dampers or doors per SMACNA Fire Damper
Guide, NFPA 80 or 90A, or as shown on the Drawings.
3. Openings for ducts passing through building roof shall be curbed and flashed
watertight unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
1.7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I15800-6
I
I
I
I
t
C. Hangers and Supports:
1. Supports for ductwork and ductwork-connected equipment plus other specialties
and accessories shall be installed in a manner that will not result in or produce
excessive stess, deflection, swaying, saggmg or vibration in the ductwork or in
the building stucture either during erection, cleaning, testing or normal operation
of the system.
a- Ductwork shall not be so resrained as to cause it to snake or buckle
between supports or anchors or to prevent movement due to expansion and
contaction.
Ductwork shall be installed at equipment such tJnt equipment can be
disconnected and removed without further supporting the ductwork.
a. Ductwork shall not introduce anv strains or distortion to the connected
equipment.
Coordinate the location of the ductwork support system with that of all other
installations.
Hangen and supports shall be installed complete, including lock nuts, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessory items, all in accordance with
SMACNA.
Ductwork shall be supported individually, and not in combination with piping,
conduit, and similar items, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
llangers and supports shall be insalled complete, including lock nuts, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessory items.
Ductwork shall be supported individually, and not in combination with piping,
conduit, and similar items.
All hangers, supports, clamps, and angles in contact with the ductwork shall be of
the same material as the duct.
All bolts, nuts, washers, screws, and other fasteners shall be cadmium plated,
stainless steel or otherwise corrosion resistant.
I
I
t
I
2.
4.
).
6.
7.
8.
9.
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
3.03
A.
DUCT LINER
Velocities To 1,500 Feet Per Minute: Duct liner shall be applied to the flat sheet with a
minimum of 50 percent covemge of approved adhesive. Duct liner shall be cut to
assure snug closing comer joints.
l. Black swface of the liner shall face the air stream.
l-7554.01 15800-7
2. On top or sides of duct having a width or height dimension over 20 inches, the
liner shall be additionally secured with welded pins and speed slips or Gripnails
on a ma:<imum of l5 inch centes.
a. Pins shall be cut close to the speed clip.
b. Pins shall start within 2 inches of the leading edge of each section and
within 3 inches of the leading edge of cross joints within the duct section.
3. All exposed edges and the leading edge of all cross joints of the liner shall be
coated with approved sealer.
B. Velocities From 1,501 To 3,000 Feet Per Minute: Duct liner shall be applied to the flat
sheet with a 100 percent coverage ofapproved adhesive.
l. Duct liner shall be cut to assure lmug oomer closing joints.
2. Black snrface of the liner shall face the air stream.
3. On horizontal runs, tops of ducts over 12 inches and width and sides over 16
inches in height shall be additionally securcd with welded pins and speed clips or
Gripnails on a ma:<imum of l5 inch centers.
a. On vertical runs, welded pins and speed clips or Gripnails shall be spaced
on a manimum of l5 inch centers on all'width dimensions of 12 inches.
b. Pins shall start within 2 inches of the leading edges of each section and
within 3 inches of the leading edge of all cross joints within the duct
section.
c. Pins shall be cut close to the speed clip.
4. Exposed edges and the leading edge ofall crossjoints ofthe liner shall be coated
with approved sealer.
3.04 ROOF-MOUNTEDEQUIPMENT
A. Roof Curbs: Where prefabricated roof curbs are specified, fumish for installation
under the Work of Division 7.
1. Verifi that roof openings shown on Structural and Architectural Drawings agree
with curb fumished.
2. Expedite the coordination ofany required changes to avoid field changes or delay
of the Work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
15800-8 l-7554.01
I B. Install roof-mounted equipment on roof curbs after roof flashing has been completed.
Install accessories and connect ductwork.
I END oF sEcrIoN
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
l-7554.01 15800-9
I
I sEcrIoN lssso
I AIRDISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENTI PARTI.GENERAL
t l.0l RELATED SECTTONS
A. Section 01000 - Summary Of Work.
I B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
I .1.02 SUBMITTALS
I A. Equipment: Submit Product Data on all products specified to include physical
I dimensions, configuration, materials of constnrction, mechanical and electrical
I performance and other information as required to demonstrate compliance with these
Specifications.
I 1.03 SAFETREQUrREMENTS
I A. Fire and Smoke lhzafi Classification: All products which make up the various air
I distribution systems and all parts of these systems installed in or above ceilings shall
comply with andl/or be rated in accordance with the applicable requirements of NFPA
I 90A, NFPA 225, ASTM E 84 and UL-723.
B. Maximum Permissible Ratings:
|| l. Flame Spread: 25.
I 2. Smoke Developed: 50.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I 2.OI ROOFTOPMAKEUPAIRHANDLINGUNITS
11 A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Carrier; McQuay;
I Trane; or York are acceptable.
I B. Provide roof-mounted units having supply fan and gas bumer.
I C. Unit shall be self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of
I cabinet and frame, supply fan, indirect gas-fired heat exchanger and bumer, burner
I controls, air filters, and control dampers.
I D. Provide wiring terminals for a single-point tluee-phase power connection.r
I
t-7554.01 15850-l
T
E.
F.
Cabinet Galvanized steel with enamel finisl1 access doors or removable access panels
with quick fasteners screwdriver operated flush cam type. Structural members shall be
minimum 18 gage, with access doors orremovable panels of minimum 20 gage.
l. Insulation: l/2 inch thick neopnene coated glass fiber.
Supply Fans: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently *o*t"d with V-belt drive,
and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor
Heat Exchangers: Aluminized steel, of welded constnrction.
Gas Burner: Atmospheric type bumer as scheduled on Drawings, with pressure
regulator, gas valves, manual shut-ofi intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame
sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-offpilot.
Gas Bumer Safety Controls : Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame,
prevent op€ning of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on igrrition
failure, energize blower motor, and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas
valve to open.
l. High Limit Control: Temperatue sensor with fixed stop at maximum
permissible setting, de-energize bumer on excessive bonnet temperature and
energize burner when temperature drops to lower safe value.
2. Supply Fan Control: Temperature sensor sensing bonnet temperaiures and
independent of burner controls, or adjustable time delay relays with switch for
continuous fan operation.
3. Dampers: Provide outside air and retum darnp€rs with damper operator. Outside
air damper shall fall to closed position. Provide tight fitting dampers with edge
gaskets, ma:cimum leakage 5 percent at 2 inches pr€ssure differential.
Filter Section: Provide a filter section disposible filters and side-panel access doors.
Roof Curb: Minimum 12 inches high galvanized steel, channel frame with gaskets,
nailer strips.
Operating Contols: Provide low voltage, adjustable thermostat to control bumer
operation and ecomnomy cycle to maintain temperature setting.
l. Heating-Only Units;
a. Provide wall therinostat.
2. Locate thermostat in room as shown.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
G,
H,
I.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
J.
K.
I15850-2 l-7554.01
I
I M. Sequence of Operation: See drawings for system flow diagram and sequence of
operation.
f N. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Drawings and Division 16.
I l. Motor: Open dripproof unless otherwise indicated.
t 2. Wiring Tenninations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor
quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box
I sized to NFPA 70.
. 2.02 EXHAUSTFANS
I A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Acme; American
t Coolair; Breidert; Cames; Greenheck; Jenn; Loren Cook; or Penn Ventilator are
I acceptable.
I B. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven centifugal as indicated, with weatherproof spun
I aluminum housing; fan wheel to be statically and dynamically balanced; motor
mounted on resilient rubber isolators; aluminum birdscreen with 85 percent free
I opening; square base to suit roofcurb with continuous curb gaskets.a
C. Roof Curb: 12 inch high of galvanized steel with continuously welded seams, built in
I cant strips, 2 inch insulation and crub bottom, and factory installed nailer strip.!D. Electrical Characteristics and Components:
I l. Motor: Open dripproof unless otherwise noted.
l] 2. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor
I quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box
sized to NFPA 70.
I 3. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, fusible, in housing for thermal overload
protected motor.
I E. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged
with nylon bearings.
I F. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed;
variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selection so required rpm is obtained with
I sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with selfaligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.t
G. Performance: Scheduled on Drawings.
I
!
I
r-7554.0r 158s0-3
r
2.03 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Acutherm;
Anemostat; Cames; Grillmaster; Hart & Cooley (Tuttle & Bailey); J&J; Krueger;
Metal-Aire; Tempmaster; or Titus are acceptable.
l. Model numbers of certain manufactulers are given herein for reference purposes.
B. Tag El and Sl: Square steel louvered face supply diffiEer; beveled drop face border;
removable core; opposed blade volume darper adjustable from face; baked enamel off-
white finish.
1. Titus TDC.
C. TagRl: Rectangularplasticegg-crategrille,with lD"xl?" grid. Whitefinish.
l. Titus 50P.
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.01 RooF-MoUNTEDEQT.nPMENT
A. Roof Curbs: Where prefabricated roof curbs are specified, fumish for installation
under the Work of Division 7.
l. Verifr that roof openings shown on Stnrctural and Architectural Drawings agree
with curb furnished.
2. Expedite the coordination ofany required changes to avoid field changes or delay
of the Work.
B. Install roof-mounted equipment on roof curbs after roof flashing has been completed.
Install accessories and connect ductwork.
3.02 MTSCELLANEOUSEQT.IPMENT
A. Install all air disribution products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t158504l-7554.01
I
- sEcrIoN 15990
I rEsrINc, ADJUSTING AID BALAI\cING oF SYSTEMS
I PARTI-GENERALr1.OI RELATED SECTIONS
t A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work.
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
Ir I.O2 DESCRIPTION
I A. lndependent Testing and Balancing Agency: At completion of installation, the
t meclianical systems shall be adjusted and balanced by an independent testing and
balancing agency (TBA).
I B. Definition Of Independent Independent shall mean TBA is not associated with anyr engineering, contrdsting, or manirfacturing firm, and derives its income solely from
_ testing, adjusting and balancing mechanical systems.I
t C. Contactual Obligation: Contractor shall retain the services of TBA and shall bear all
costs for these services.I I ffit#"fr*flff*,'ff';ff8'f fr*'T#'n:L',l'lH'ff*3ffi;"t"$:
Architect that various mechanical systems do not perform in part or in whole asr iffif,"$*HHf,'d*[ffi$iffifitffixrT""tf"fi1"##tfrJilh
submitted.
f a- This process shall be repeated until satisfactory system performance has been
demonstrated to the Architect, all at no change to the Contract Amount.
I 1.03 QUALTTYASSTJRAITCE
' A. Standard Of Work TBA shall perform work in accordance with the National
t Envirortmental Balance Bureau.
B. Experience and Qualifications:I I yi:I"fr-T,rffi*:ifl*\1T#iJ:ffiYti:.#?:'"*:,:1'Tl",L"llii
Engineer.
r 2. TBA shall have successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and
I c. ,"t;:;tH:"'"i;lre perrormed inaccordance withNEBB procedurar standards
for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
I
I
I t-7554.01 15990-l
I.O4 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Start Of Work: Contractor shall place the system in working operation before the
balancing work begins.
B. Operation Of Systems During Work: Mechanical systems and equipment shall be in frrll
operation and shall continue in operation during testing and balancing.
C. Equipment To Facilitate Balancing: Provide items as thermometer wells, pressure test
cocks, access doors, and similar related items, as required to allow tests and adjustnents
to be made as described in this Section.
D. Drive Changes: ldake changes of fan belts and sheaves io obtain the required cfrn and all
other corrections to the systems nec€ssary for proper performance as may be within the
scope of the Contract or as requested by *rc Architect.
E. Prior to commencing air test and balance Worlg check system for duct leakage, install
clean filters, check for excessive vib'ration, check for proper fan and motor rotation, check
volume dampers for proper operation
l. Make adjustnents and perform conective Work as nscessary.
2. Leave volume dampers in wide open position in preparation for balance Work.
I.O5 WARRANITY
A. Extended Warranty: TBA shall include an extended warranted of 90 days, after
completion of test and balance work during which time the Architect" at his discretion,
may r€quest a recheck or resetting of any systern or systern component.
I.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Approval Of TBA: Within l0 says after Contract award,'submit ttrc following
information Architect shall have final approval authority.
l. Name, addrcss, telephone and fax number of TBA.
2. Name and registration of responsible Registered Professional Engineer.
3. Sample data forms to be used in the balancing work.
4. I-ist and description of at least five projects of similar size and scope to this
Project.
5. Signed statement showing TBA meets the criteria defined as independent
hereabove.
B. Balancing Report: Submit bound" signed and sealed Balancing Report in accordance
with Section 01300 and the contents specified hereunder.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI APPROVED AGENCIES
A. Air-Right Inc.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I15990-2 t-7554.01
I
I
I
t
,
Engineering Service.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Griffith
C. TAB Services.
2.02 EQUTPMENT
A. Calibration: Instruments used shall be accurately calibrated within a six month period
prior to any balancing and maintained in good working order.
l. Calibrating Agency: Calibration shall be done by an independent testing
laboratory or the equipment's manufacturer.
2. Tests: If requested, conduct tests in presence of Architect's representative.
3. Certificate: A certificate ofcalibration shall be made available upon request of
Architect.
B. Provide all required instruments, equipment, tools, scaffolding, ladders and similar
related items to perform the Work required under this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.OI SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Systems To Be Balanced: Test, adjust and balance all air and water syst€ms.
B. Tabulation: Test, adjust and balance all systems to meet the specified design
performance and record all operating pararneters.
C. Conditions For Balancing: All systems shall be verified as to proper perfcirmance
design by simulating design heating and cooling conditions to the maximum extent
possible.
D. Scope: Testing, adjusting and balancing shall include the following:
l. Air Systems:
a. Fan Adjustnent Adjust all fan systems to deliver design air quantities
within a tolerance of minus 5 percent to plus l0 percent.
l) Test air handling unit fans under all operating modes (full retum air,
full outside air, modulated damper position).
2) Provide proper size drive sheaves as required.
b. Volume At Outlets: Measure air volumes at all grilles, registers and
diffusers, and adjust and balance to meet specified design parameters.
2. Motor Overload Protection: Observe and record in the Balancing Report ratings
of all motor thermal overload protection furnished under this or any other
Division of the Specifrcations.
a. Furnish and exchange thermal overload devices as required for proper
motor protection.t
I
t l-7554.01 15990-3
3. Identification Of Balanced Condition: All balancing devices such as dampers
and valves shall be clearly and permanently marked as to the final balanced
position.
4. Finish: Plug all test holes with plastic plugs, replace access doors and belt
guards, replace all ceiling tile, daily ifbuilding is occupied.
5. Measurement Demonstration: Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate the
fluid and air flow quantities shown in thre eahncing Report by field replicating
recorded measurefirents as selected by the Architect.
3.02 BALA}{CINGREPORT
A. Content: After all balancing has been completed, tabulate the following and include in
Balancing Report.
l. Motor Data: RPM, amperage and voltage input to all motors.
2. Motor Protection: Nameplate data and overload heater capacity installed for each
motor.
Air Pressures: Entrance and exit static pressure at each fan, filter and coil.
Air Quantities: CFM capacity and RPM of each fan system, and at each grille,
register, diftrsers, and outside air, return and exhaust dampers.
Air Temperatues: Outside air temperanre; inlet and discharge temperatures,
including wet bulb temperafures at cooling coils, of all heating and cooling coils
under simulated desigr conditions; temperatw€ in all spaces whether or not
equipped with thermostat or temperature transmitter.
Identiff all equipment by tag number, location and area.
Discrepancies: Make note of any discrepancy between recorded parameters and
specified pararneters.
Balancing Equipment: List all balancing equipment used and show calibration
date.
9. Adjustments: List all adjusbrents made to all systems.
B. Drawings: Incorporate in the Balancing Report, reduced size copies of the Mechanical
Drawings.
l. Cross Reference: Where the point of measurement cannot be described
adequately, provide a cross reference number in the Balancing Report and at the
point of measurement on the reduced size drawings.
END OF SECTION
5.
J.
4.
6.
7.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8.
159904 r-7554.0r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
sEcrIoN 16100
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AI\[D METHODS
I PARTI -GENERAL
I r.o1 RELATEDDocuMENTS
A. Provisions of General Requirements, Division l, are apart ofthis Division and Section.
I I.O2 SUMMARY
I A. The scope of work govemed by this Section shall include all electrical work performed
' by this Contractor. This work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the
following:
l. Installationoflightingfixtures.
2. Installation of 480Y/277V and 208Yll20V wiring systems, service outlets,
surface metal raceways and wiring thereto.
3. Installation oftelephone/dataoutlets (wiring by others).
4. Installation ofpanelboards and associated feeders.
- PART2-PRODUCTS
I 2.OI MATERIALS
I A. System components shall be fabricated or manufachued as specified below.
- 1. Manufacturers and model numbers are listed as a guide to set the level of quality
I desired.
11 2. Altemate manufacturers offered by the Contractor will be evaluated for compliance
t H#"ff1*yteristics specified and will be accepted or rejected by the
t B. Combination Motor Starters: Combination motor starters shall be full-voltage,
alternating current, combination, non-reversing motor controllers, consisting of starter
and three pole, fusible disconnect switch mounted in common enclosure.
L Starters shall be equipped with melting alloy type overload relays.
t
I
l-7554.01t 16100 - I
An operating handle for disconnect switch mechanism shall be fumished with
indication and control of switch position, with enclosure door either opened or
closed, and shall be capable of being locked in the OFF position.
Motor starters and disconnect switches shall be mounted in a single NEMA Type
I enclosure (unless specifically required otherwise); and shall be coated with
manufacturers standard color and finish.
Motor controllers and ancillary components shall comply with manufacturers
standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product
information, and as required for a complete installation.
Combination starters shall be size I minimurn, as manufactured by Square D, or
approved equal.
C. Safety Disconnect Switches: Safety disconnect switches shall be installed where
indicated on the Drawings.
l. Switches shall be of heavy duty, three pole, fusible design, and shall be housed in
a NEMA I or NEMA 3R enclosure, as applicable.
2. Switches shall have a short circuit rating of not less than 100,000 RMS
symmetrical anps, at 480VAC.
3. Switches shall be furnished with dual element, time delay, class R cartridge
fuses, as scheduled below.
4. Safety Discormect Swirches shall be Square D, or approved equal.
D. Receptacles:
l. 208 Volt Service: Receptacles for 208VAC use shall match the device or
equipment being served.
a. It shall be the Contactor's responsibility to veriff all outlet configurations
before insalling them.
120 Volt Service: Receptacles for use in I2OVAC service shall be two pole,
three wire, duplex grounded phenolic receptacles, rated not less than 125V,20
amps.
a. Receptacles shall be NEMA configuration 5-20R.
b. Receptacles shall be specification grade, Hubbell Catalog No. 5362-I or
approved equal.
J.
4.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
).
16100 - 2 1-7554.01
I
- 3. GFI Receptacles: Receptacles indicated on the Drawings to be GFI types shall beI Hrffk,,HT""Tfr,,iHTrffi'ilfrit current intemrpting phenoric
! a. Receptacles shall be NEMA configuration 5-20R.
I
b.
lff;lfft"r
shall be specification grade, Hubbell Cataloe No. GF-5362W
r 4. Telephone/Data Receptacles: Telephone/Data outlets shall consist of a dual gangI ffiTff;;JlfH;ll;;*t#,:",ff;xil:.:'ffiJ:ffilfJ"#1ffi1
include a single gang cov€r and blank single gang cover plate.
r E. Switches: Switches for general 120 and 217 volt service shall be toggle type, single
r pole, side and back wired.
l. Switches shall be rated not less than 120V,20 amps.
I 2. Switches shall be Hubbell Catalog No. l22l-I, or approved equal.
3. Two pole switches shall be Hubble Catalog No. 1222I, or approved equal.
t F. Power Wiring: Power wiring shall consist of single insulated conductors.
I I . . Conductors shall be sized as required.by the National Electric Code, but shall not! be smaller than #12 AWG (#I4AWG for control circuits).
t 2. Conductors shall be copper, stranded,600V insulated.
r 3. Conductors shall be rated 90C dry and 75C wet and shall be UL listed type
I Tr{HN/THWN.
G. Telephone Wiring: Telephone cable will be supplied and installed by others.
I H. Data Wiring: Data wiring will be supplied and installed by others.
I I. Conduit: Conduit shall consist of all metat raceway, fittings and hardware necessary tor enclose the wiring as described herein and as shown on the Drawings.
I l. Conduits shall be sized as required by the National Electric Code for the wiring
installed within, but shall not be smaller than 112".
I 2. Exposed Metal Raceways: Exposed metal raceways, and raceways in unfinishedI spaces shall be hot dipped galvanized, rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit
and matching threaded fittings. All raceways shall be UL listed.
r 3. Concealed Metal Raceways: Concealed metal raceways shall be permitted to be
I
EMT with matching fittings.
_ l-7554.01 16100 - 3
t
4. Conduit Bodies and Fittings: Conduit Bodies and Fittings shall consist of die-
cast, metal alloy condulet bodies, outlet boxes, device boxes, insulated bushings,
sealing fittings, cord fittings, etc., to match the raceway system they are
associated with and shall be as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds or equal.
5. Hardware: Hardware shall consist of all malleable iron conduit clamps, beam
clamps and hangers required to install the raceway system. Raceway support
spacing shall not exceed ten feet.
6. Flexible conduit Flexible conduit used to conn@t equipment and lighting
fixtures to their respective power supplies shall be galvanized metal conduit or
liquid tight conduit. Flexible conduit shall be as manufactued by Greenfield,
Sealtite, or approved equal.
J. Jrurction and Outlet Boxes: Junction and outlet boxes shall consist of large or small
metal boxes which are used as pull boxes, terminal or splice boxes in the conduit
ftrceway system. Junstion and outlet boxes shall be sized as required by the National
Electric Code for the wiring to be installed within.
L Location: Junction and outlet boxes which will serve as splice boxes shall be
installed in the raceway system at the locations shown on the drawings and where
required by receptacle wiring to provide a clean installation which does not
increase the hazard of circuit failure. Junction boxes which will act as pull boxes
shall be installed where required by Code to limit the number of bends in conduit
nrns and where the Contractor has dercmrined thern to be necessarv to install
wire.
2. Constnrction: Junction boxes shall be constnrcted of sheet steel which is
galvanized or finished with a conosion rcsistant coating. All junction boxes shall
be of dust tight constnrction.
K. Concrete Anchors: Anchors used to secure supports or apputenances to concrete or
masonry block shall be drilled-in style devices, complying with Federal Specification
FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Cl. l. Anchors shall be as manufactwed by Hilti, Phillips
Redhead, Rawls or approved equal.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The routing of all power circuit raceways has been shown on the drawings in a general,
single line form.
l. The lighting circuit raceways have not been shown on the drawings.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, layout and detail of conduit
runs to permit a complete and proper installation.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I16100 - 4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
The Contractor shall coordinate the conduit routing to avoid interferences with
existing and new utilities, building steel, structures, and equipment placement.
The Contractor shall verifi the actual or assigned location ofall equipment to be
wired or connected under the scope ofthis contact.
B. Conduit Raceways: Raceways shall be installed parallel to building column lines and
shall clear hot water and steam piping by not less than 12".
l. Raceways shall be installed not less than 7'{' above floors or platforms unless
otherwise approved by the Owner.
Raceways shall not be routed along floors or roofs.
Cutting: Conduit ends shall be cut with ends squaxe, threads cut and cleaned.
Ends shall be reamed to remove all rough edges and burrs after threading and
before coupling.
Bends: Conduit bends and offsets shall be avoided where possible.
a. Field bends shall be made symetrically with tools or equipment speciltcally
manufactued for that purpose.
b. Bending shall not damage the outside coating or reduce the internal
diameter of the the conduit.
c. The number, location and radius of conduit bends shall be in accordance
with the National Electric Code.
Joints: Conduit shall be joined by threaded couplings or fittings installed
wrenchtight to provide a mechanically and electrically continuous installation.
a Tbreadless fittings shall not be used except when installed with EMT in
conceialed spaces or unless.otherwise approved by the Owner.
Support: Conduit shall be securely fastened in place and grouped together
wherever possible. Conduit runs and racks shall be supported on c€nters not to
exceed ten feet.
Penetrations: Conduit penetations shall be provided by the Contractor through
walls, floors, ceilings, and platforms as required to install the raceways.
a. Penetrations through fire rated surfaces shall be sealed with an approved
firestop compound, such that the fire rating is maintained.
C. Wiring: All wiring shall be installed in conduit or wireway and shall be continuous
between termination points.
).
4.
2.
4.
).
7.
1-7554.01 16100 - 5
o
l. No splicing orjoints will be permitted in feeder
o
or branch circiuts except at ouflet
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
J.
or accessible junction boxes.
Pulling: All wiring shall be installed as much as possible directly from reels or
coils without being pulled along the ground or subjected to treatnent that may
cause abrasion or kinking of the wire. The Contactor shall pull wire into the
conduit system using UL listed lubricants approved for the wire being pulled.
Splices: Where splices are rcquired at least six inches of free conductor shall be
left at the splice point.
a. Splices shall be mechanically stong and made with solderless compression
or twist-on type connectors.
b. All completed splices shall be taped with vinyl plastic tape.
Grounding: All wiring and installed equipment shall be grounded continuously
utilizing a copper conductor.
a All raceways shall include an equi'pment safety grounding conductor.
Support The Contractor shall support all wiring in vertical raceways or where
wiring enters equipment or enclosures from below.
a- The wiring supports shall be in accordance with the National Electrical
Code.
END OF SECTION
1-7554.01
4.
).
16100 - 6
I
I
I PARr l -cENERAL
I.OI RELATED DOCUMENTS
I A. Provisions of General Requirements, Division l, are a part of this Division and Section.
I r.oz scoPE oF woRK
!
A. The scope of work governed by this Section shall include all electric motors installed
I by this Contractor, including those fumished with equipment speciflred elsewhere in
r these Specifications.
I l.o3 APPLTcABLE DocUMENTS
A. All motors shall conform to applicable standards of ANSI, IEEE, NEMA and AFBMA
I except where the requirements of these standards are modified or supplemented byI these Specifications.
I B. Where there appears to be a conflict between any of the industry standards relating to! manufacturing requirements covered in these Specifications only by reference to the
standards, the requirernents ofNEMA shall govern.I! C. All equipment and materials shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
I the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA).
I PART2-PRoDUcrs
I z.or rYPE!
_ A. All motors shall be squirrel cage, full voltage across-theline starting, induction type
I with starting torque characteristics as required by the load.I
2.02 MOTOR SIZING
r A. Motors shall be sized such that the nameplate horsepower is not exceeded when the
equipment is operated confinuously at the most severe conditions of loading.
r B. The motors shall be sized to drive the equipment without exceeding the specified
temperature rise under maximum load conditions.
r C. Motors shall have a l.l5 service factor but shall be selected such that the motor does
T
I
t
1-7ss4.01
a
SECTION 16485
MOTORS
not operate above a 1.0 service factor at rated load.
16485 - I
o
CIENCY
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
2,03 MOTOR EFFI
A. All continuously operating motors shall be high efficiency design.
B. Motor efficiency shall be measured in accordance with IEEE-I2, Test Method B.
C. As a minimum, motors shall meet the following effrciency and power factor
requirements:
Nameplate HP Min. Efficiency Min. Pwr. Factor
I Hp and less 82% 74%
3 - 5 Hp 87o/o 83o/o
7.5 - l0 Hp 89/o 86%
2.M ROTORS
A. Rotors shall be adequarcly sized to avoid overheating during acceleration of the motor
and driven equipment.
B. Rotors shall be dynamically balanced.
2.05 STARTINCCHARACTERISTICS:
A. Motors shall be designed for full voltage acrosi-the-line starting.
B. Motors shall be capable of starting at 85 percent of their rated voltage.
C. NEMA Type 'A' starting clraracteristic is prohibited-
2.06 MOTORVOLTACERATING:
A. Motor voltage ratings shall be as specified below.
B. Single phase motors shall be fumished with integral thermal protection.
Nameplate Horsepower Voltage Phase
l/2 and less r20t208
3/4 and greater 480
2.07 BEARINGS
A. All motors shall have sealed ball bearings.
B. Motor thrust bearings shall have a minimum life of ten years in accordance with
AFBMA life and thmst vdues.
I
J
16485 -2 t-7554.01
I
I C. The maximum thrust that is to be exerted by the equipment driven by the motor shall
I not exceed 7ff/o of the thrust carrying capability of the motor.
I 2,08 INSULATION
I A. Motors rated 50 horsepower and below shall be furnished with Class "F" insulation.
I B. Insulation shall be specially teated to resist moisture, sulfur fumes, conducting dustr and abrasive dust.
t z.os ENcLosuRES
A. Motors rated 150 horsepower and less shall be totally enclosed if located outdoors and
I shall be shielded dripproofiflocated indoors.
2.IO TERMINAL BO)GS
r A. Terminal boxes shall be the largest that can be accomodated on the motor frame size
fumished.
I B. Location of the terminal boxes shall be approved by the Architect.
I 2.rr MouNrrNGS
A. Unless mounted on a common frame with driven equipment, motors shall be fumished
I with a matched baseplate and separate soleplate such that the motor can be removedt without distubing the alignment of the driven equipment and can be reinstalled and
.ligled by using shims under the motor only.
I
wri
I B. Motors furnished with separate baseplates shall be fumished with jacking screws on the
I
supporting feet of the motor to facilitate erection and alignments.
. z.n MoroR STARTINc EeUIPMENT
I A. Motor starting equipment shall be as specified in section 16100.
2.13 MANUFACTI.JRER
r A. Motors shall bre as manufactured by Siemans-Allis, Westinghouse, General Electric, or
approved equal.
! PART3-EXECUTION
I Not Used
END OF SECTION
I
I
t-7554.01 16485 - 3
t
t
I
t
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION r6sls
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART I - GEMRAL:
I.O1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Provisions of General Requirements, Division l, are a part of this Division and Section.
1.02 scoPE oF'woRK:
A. The scope of work governed by this Section shall include all lighting fixtures installed
by this Contractor.
B. This work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, installation of lay-in
style fluorescent lighting frxtures, strip fluorescent ligbting fixtures, recessed compact
fluorescent lighting fixtures and track mounted incandescent lighting fixtures as
indicated on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. System components shall be fabricated or manufactured as specified below.
l. Manufacturers arid model numbers are listed as a guide to set the level of quality
2. Altemate manufacfi;rers offered by the Contractor will be evaluated for
compliance with dl salient characteristics specified and will be accepted or
rejected on that basis.
B. Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Lighting fixtures for service in suspended ceilings shall be
of lay-in troffer fluorescent desigrr, with sizes and lamps as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Fixtures shall be fabricated of die-formed steel, factory primed and painted with a high
temperature baked enamel finish, with a minimum reflectance of 88%.
D. Ballasts shall be high efficiency, electronic types, and shall be thermally protected.
E. Fixtures shall be fumished complete with T-8, 32watl,3500K energy saving lamps.
F. Fixtures shall be equipped with 3' deep parabolic louvers and latchis which facilitate
easy access to lamps and wireway.
G. Fixtures shall include continuous slot around louver to facilitate retum air fi.rnction.
H. Fixtures shall be UL listed, and as scheduled on the Drawings, or approved equal.
l-7554.01 16515 - I
l,
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t.
_l
oo
1-7554.01
PART3. E)(ECUTION
NotUsed
ENDOFSECNON
I
16515 -2